Specs - HHSC - Hawaii Health Systems Corporation

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY OF WORK 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Project contract conditions. 

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 

A. Main Hospital 

1. Demolition 

a. Abate or remove hazardous materials in the area of work. 

b. Perform selective interior demolition of existing partitions, finishes, mechanical 

and electrical items. 

c. Sawcut existing concrete slab-on-grade and prepare slab edge to receive new slabon-grade. 

2. Repair existing construction to accommodate new work. 

3. Construct new partitions, ceilings, casework, interior finishes, HVAC systems, plumbing 

and electrical items within the Project Scope; CT Scanner Expansion and Central Plant 

Modifications. 

4. Not in scope of work: 

a. Furniture, fixtures and equipment not shown on the finish plans or scheduled in the 

drawings. 

b. Signage. 

1.3 RELATED WORK NOT IN CONTRACT 

A. Hospital will contract separately to construct a new emergency generator to fully support the 

CT scanner and support facilities. 

B. Hospital will move, store and reposition existing furniture, medical equipment, appliances 

and miscellaneous furnishings. 

C. Hospital will contract separately to abate or remove hazardous materials in other areas of the 

hospital not affected by the work. 

1.4 OWNER-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED (OFOI) PRODUCTS 

A. General: Items noted “OFOI” will be furnished and installed by the Hospital including but 

not limited to: 

1. Non-attached medical equipment, fixtures and furnishings. 

2. Toshiba, Aquilion 16, CT Scanner. 

B. Hospital's Responsibilities: 

1. Arrange for and deliver Hospital reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to 

Contractor. 

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 

3. Upon delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 

4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient 

items. 

5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. 

C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 

1. Review Hospital’s shop drawings, product data, and samples. 

2. Provide any necessary utility rough-ins and backing, and install in accordance with 

manufacturers’ instructions. 

Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell Wing AHL Project Number 6168.003 

CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modification 011000-1 

SUMMARY OF WORK

3. Schedule, phase and coordinate work of Owner’s other contractors with work under the 

Contract. Provide a clear path and opening for the installation of OFOI items. 

1.5 OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (OFCI) PRODUCTS 

A. General: Items noted “OFOI” will be furnished by the Hospital and installed by Contractor. 

1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES 

A. Hospital premises will remain operational during the entire period of construction for the 

conduct of normal healthcare and business operations. Contractor shall limit use of Hospital 

premises to allow for continued operations. 

B. Emergency exits during construction must remain open and unblocked at all times. Maintain 

access for staff, patients and public alike. 

C. Construction operations shall be limited to areas noted on the drawings. 

D. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: 

1. General: 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Coordinate work necessary outside these normal 

operating hours with the Hospital’s Facilities and Maintenance Director, Rodney Au, 

(398-9075, rau@hhsc.org). Submit written notice a minimum of three days in advance. 

E. Cooperate with hospital to minimize conflict and to facilitate Hospital's operations at all 

times. Follow Hospital’s rules of conduct, infection control and safety plans. 

F. Access to adjacent rooms, areas and floors must be approved in advance by the Hospital. 

Submit written notice not less than seven days in advance of intended work at adjacent 

rooms, areas or floors. 

G. Closure or obstruction of roadways, walkways or any other access routes to and from the 

hospital must be approved in advance by the Hospital. Submit written notice not less than 14 

days in advance of intended closure or obstruction of roadways, walkways or any other 

access routes to and from the Hospital. 

H. Protect the integrity of the lead shielding of the existing X-ray room. 

I. Maintain vital services with minimal interruption. Outages and interruptions must be 

approved in advance by the Hospital. Submit written notices of outages and interruptions not 

less than 14 days in advance. Emergency services shall take precedence over all scheduled 

outages and interruptions. 

J. Contractor's Personnel: 

1. shall not park on site unless designated areas are made available by Hospital staff. 

2. may use the Hospital cafeteria. 

3. shall not smoke or consumption of food and beverages will not be permitted on the 

premises except in designated areas. 

4. shall not play radios. 

5. shall be properly attired for work. 

6. shall conduct themselves with decorum and courtesy toward staff, patients and the 

general public. 

7. shall not use loud or intemperate language. 

K. Construction Zone Accessibility Requirements 

1. General: Hawaii Revised Statutes (HRS)103-50 requires this project to conform to the 

requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 

2. Ensure accessible routes to emergency entrances and exits to and from accessible parking 



SUMMARY OF WORK

1.7 WORK PLAN 

and public pedestrian routes during the construction period as required by ADAAG 

4.1.1(4). 

3. Provide temporary safe pedestrian passageways around the construction site. 

a. Areas that are used only as work areas shall be designed and constructed so that 

individuals with disabilities can approach, enter and exit the areas. 

b. These guidelines do not require that any areas used only as work areas be 

constructed to permit maneuvering within the work area or be constructed or 

equipped (i.e., with racks or shelves) to be accessible. 

A. This project may need to be completed in planned phases to ensure adequate healthcare 

services and operations are maintained during construction. 

B. Submit a Construction Work Plan a minimum of 30 days before planned construction activity 

is to begin. Indicate the following: 

1. Separate work efforts that will be required to maintain the existing facilities’ operations. 

2. Maintenance of egress to exits. 

3. Maintenance of utility services, such as electrical, air conditioning, hot water, chilled 

water, sanitary sewer systems, etc. 

4. Barriers necessary to separate the renovated portions from the existing spaces. 

5. Barriers necessary to maintain infection control. 

6. Planned time frame for each phase to be completed. 

1.8 ALTERNATES None Identified. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

PART 3 EXECUTION 

Not Used 

Not Used 

END OF SECTION 011000 



SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 

PART 1 

GENERAL 


A. Schedule of values. 

B. Application for payment. 

C. Change procedures. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 011000 – SUMMARY: for allowances and alternates. 

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment 

Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be 

considered. 

B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor 

Agreement. 

C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with 

number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization and bonds and 

insurance. 

D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section. For unit cost 

Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost 

to achieve the total for the item. 

E. Include within each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and 

profit. 

F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for 

Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. Contractor's electronic media driven form 

will be considered. 

B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for 

Payment. 

C. Payment Period: Monthly. 

D. Waiver of Liens: Provide unconditional waiver of liens. Use contractor’s form. 

1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES 

A. The following documents will be used. Sample forms are attached. 

B. Request for Information: standard Contractor form. A request for information shall be 

issued by the Contractor to the Architect to request solutions to problems which are 

discovered during construction, to request drawing and specification interpretation, request 

changes, or request instructions. Identify cost and/or schedule impacts in the Request for 

Information. 

Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell Wing AHL Project Number 6168.003/6111.006 

CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 012600 - 1 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

C. Instruction Notice: Attachment 1, standard Architect form. 

1. Instruction Notice will be issued by the Architect for instructions to the Contractor 

which do not involve a change in the Contract Sum or construction period. 

2. Instruction Notice authorizes the Contractor to proceed at once with the instruction 

included therein. 

3. Instruction Notice which does affect the Contract Sum or construction period must 

have written authorization by the Owner’s Project Manager. Such instruction shall 

have the note "Change Order to Follow" and then be followed with a Quotation 

Request, cross referenced to the Field Order. 

4. Instruction Notice will be distributed as follows: 

a. Two copies to Contractor 

b. One copy to Architect 

c. One copy to each appropriate Consultant 

d. One copy to Owner’s Project Manager 

D. Quotation Requests: Attachment 2, standard Architect form. 

1. Proposed changes to the Contract will be initiated by the Architect in the form of a 

Quotation Request. 

2. A Quotation Request, indicating the party suggesting the change, will clearly describe 

the proposed Contract variation, accompanied by the required drawings, if necessary. 

3. Construction work shall not proceed on the strength of a Quotation Request only. 

4. Quotation Requests will be distributed as follows: 

a. Two copies to Contractor 

b. One copy to Architect 

c. One copy to each appropriate Consultant 

d. One copy to Owner’s Project Manager 

5. The Contractor shall respond to the Quotation Request within the time stated on the 

form. 

E. Change Proposal. Standard Contractor form. 

1. This form shall be issued by the Contractor for any claims he may have and in 

response to a Quotation Request. 

2. The Change Proposal shall include a description of the work and the requested change 

to the Contract Sum and construction time. 

3. All supporting documents, material and subcontract quotations, time sheets, labor 

estimates, etc., shall be itemized and attached to the Change Proposal as necessary for 

proper checking by the Architect, Consultants and Owner’s Project Manager. 

4. Change Proposals, if acceptable, will be signed by Owner’s Project Manager and 

Architect with one executed copy returned to Contractor. The Contractor shall thus 

have authority to proceed with the work and Change Order will follow. 



F. Change Order. Attachment 3, standard Architect form. 

1. This document is issued to the Contractor as an instruction for him to make a change 

to the work of the Contract Documents. 

2. Change Order documents are prepared by the Architect and countersigned by the 

Owner and Contractor. 

3. Approved Change Orders record the following information: 

(a) Cross-reference to Change Proposal. 

(b) Summarized description of change in work required. 

(c) Change in completion date. 

(d) Change in Contract sum. 

(e) Identification of party/individual initiating the change. 

G. Record of Variations: Variations in construction from the plans and specifications shall be 

recorded by the Contractor as required by Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, Project Record 

Documents. These variations shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Owner’s 

Project Manager by the Contractor. 

H. Timeliness of Processing: Instruction Notices, Quotation Requests and Change Proposals 

will be processed and one copy provided the Owner’s Project Manager the same day the 

document is prepared. 

I. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after 

completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. 

Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as 

provided in the Contract Documents. 

J. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full 

information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for 

changes in the Work. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used 

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 




INSTRUCTION NOTICE 

INSTRUCTION NOTICE NO: 

DATE: PROJECT NO: 6168.003 

PROJECT: Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell Wing 

CT Scanner Expansion 

CONTRACTOR: 

HONOLULU 

American Savings Bank Tower 

1001 Bishop Street, Suite 300 

Honolulu, Hawaii 96813 

Telephone (808) 523 

Reference: 

Specifications: 

Drawings: 

Other: 

YOU ARE HEREBY DIRECTED TO PROMPTLY EXECUTE THIS INSTRUCTION NOTICE 

WHICH REPRESENTS THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR ORDERS MINOR CHANGES IN 

THE WORK. 

If you consider that a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time is required, submit your itemized 

proposal to the Architect immediately and before proceeding with the work. If your proposal is 

found to be satisfactory and in proper order, this Instruction Notice will be superseded by a Change 

Order. 

COPIES TO: 

Owner’s Project Manager 

Contractor 

Consultants 

Structural 

Mechanical 

Electrical 

Civil 

Landscape 

Others 

Attachment 1 

QUOTATION REQUEST 

Maui Memorial Medical Center AHL Project Number 6042.000 

Kula Hospital CAH/LTC Bed Expansion 012600 - 4 Contract Considerations

QUOTATION REQUEST NO: 




CONTRACTOR: 

HONOLULU 





Submit a fully itemized quotation for the inclusion of the following change into the contract. This is 

not a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive, nor an instruction to proceed with the work 

herein. 

REQUEST ORIGINATED BY: 

DATE QUOTATION REQUIRED BY: 

COPIES TO: 

Owner’s Project Manager 

Contractor 

Others 

Attachment 2 


Kula Hospital CAH/LTC Bed Expansion 012600 - 5 Contract Considerations

CHANGE ORDER 

CHANGE ORDER NO: 




CONTRACTOR: 

HONOLULU 





You are hereby directed to make the following changes in the Contract: 

Original Contract Sum was: $ 

Net changes by previously authorized Change Orders: $ 

Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was: $ 

Contract Sum will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order $ 

New Contract Sum including this Change Order will be: $ 

The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by 

days 

The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order is: 

ARCHITECT: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: 

By:_______________________ Approved by:_________________ Accepted by:_________________ 

Date:_____________________ Date:________________________ Date:_______________________ 

Attachment 3 


Kula Hospital CAH/LTC Bed Expansion 012600 - 6 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

PART 1 

GENERAL 


A. Submittal procedures. 

B. Construction progress schedules. 

C. Proposed Products list. 

D. Shop Drawings. 

E. Product Data. 

F. Samples. 

G. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 

H. Manufacturers' certificates. 


A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect’s responsive action. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect’s approval. 

Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or Architect accepted transmittal form. 

1. Identify whether submittal is an action submittal or informational submittal. 

2. Submit the number of duplicate documents and samples scheduled in Part 3 below. 

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a 

sequential alphabetic suffix. 

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, 

and specification section number, as appropriate. 

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products 

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is 

in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address. 

Coordinate submission of related items. 

F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the 

contractor. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 013300 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may 

be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 

H. Submit all items relating to color selection at one time, and within 45 days after date of 

Owner-Contractor Agreement. Color selections will not be made until all color related 

submittals have been received. 

I. Provide space for Contractor, Architect, and Consultants review stamps. 

J. Review and Resubmission of Submittals 

1. Architect will review the submittal and stamp it with indication of action as 

appropriate. Architect will retain one copy or the print and return other copies or the 

transparency to Contractor. Consultants will retain one copy. 

2. Submittals returned marked "resubmit" or "rejected": Make corrections and resubmit. 

a) Direct specific attention on resubmittals to revisions other than those requested 

by Architect on previous submittals. 

b) Make shop drawing corrections on the original drawing, identify changes, make 

a new transparency and print. 

3. Submittals returned with markings or comments and marked "confirm": Submit a 

letter indicating acceptance of comments and stating that Contractor will comply with 

marks and comments. 

4. Submittals returned marked "No Exceptions Taken": provide number of prints of the 

transparency Contractor requires for distribution plus two copies which will be 

retained by Architect. Submit number of copies mechanical and electrical items 

which Contractor requires plus three copies. 

5. Maintain transparencies with Project Record Documents as required by Section 

01700. 

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report 

any inability to comply with provisions. 

L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 

1.5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 

A. Submit as part of the Monthly Report required by the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 

1.6 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST 

A. Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit list of major products 

proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each 

product. 

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or 

catalog designation, and reference standards. 

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Present in a clear and thorough manner, accurately and at a scale sufficient to show pertinent 

aspects. Indicate fabrication, layout, anchorage and installation details. 

B. Title each drawing. Identify details by reference to Contract Drawing and detail numbers. 

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and 

location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. 



D. Drawing Size: Minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches and maximum 30 inches by 42 inches. 

E. Submit in the form of one reverse reading reproducible transparency and two opaque diazo 

reproductions for initial submittal. 

F. Shop Drawings: Submit for review. After review, produce copies and distribute in 

accordance with the SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above. 

1.8 PRODUCT DATA 

A. Clearly mark each copy to identify each applicable product, model, option, and pertinent 

data for the products or systems to be provided. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to 

provide information unique to this Project. Highlighting will not be accepted. 

B. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and 

location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. 

C. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above. 

1.9 SAMPLES 

A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with 

integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 

B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, 

and patterns for Architect selection. 

1. Provide custom color samples where requested. 

C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. 

D. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification 

sections. 

1.10 MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, 

storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect in quantities 

specified for Product Data. 

B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special 

environmental criteria required for application or installation. 

1.11 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES 

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer to 

Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 

B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit 

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be 

acceptable to Architect. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS Not Used 



PART 3 

EXECUTION 

3.1 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data, Schedules, Shop Drawings and Other Printed Materials: Submit the number of 

copies which the Contractor requires, plus copies for the following: 

1. One copy: Architect. 

2. One copy: Owner’s Project Manager. 

3. Copies as required for A/E consultants. 

B. Samples: Submit the number of samples which the Contractor requires plus two of which 

will be retained by Architect and Owner’s Project Manager. 

END OF SECTION 



SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 



A. Quality assurance and control of installation. 

B. References. 

C. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 

D. Special inspections. 

E. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 


A. Section 013000 – Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and 

Certificates. 

B. Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and 

workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. 

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from 

Architect before proceeding. 

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more 

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise 

workmanship. 

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. 

F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand 

stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 

1.4 REFERENCES 

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids. 

B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. 

C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification 

from Architect before proceeding. 

D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract 

Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 

1.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 

A. When the individual specifications sections require it, the Contractor shall appoint, employ, and 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 014000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing. 

B. Services will be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with 

specified standards. 

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect, in duplicate, indicating 

observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract 

Documents. 

D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, 

storage and assistance as requested. 

1. Notify Architect and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations 

requiring services. 

2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests 

required for Contractor's use. 

E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by 

the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect and shall be paid by the Contractor. 

1.6 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 

A. Owner will employ Special Inspectors acceptable to the Maui County to perform inspections 

on various elements of the work as required by the Building Code as locally adopted. During 

the course of the work under inspection, each Special Inspector will submit detailed reports 

relative to progress and conditions of the work including deviations from specified 

requirements and stipulating dates, times, and locations. Special inspector will submit a final 

report to the County. Cooperate fully with the Special Inspectors. 

1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS 

A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 

Observer subject to approval of Architect and Owner. 

B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or 

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of 

surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, or to test, adjust, and 

balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 

C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or 

installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 

D. Submit two (2) copies of report written by representative, both to the Owner and to the 

Architect listing observations and recommendations, within ten days of observation 


Not Used 

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. 



CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 014000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

PART 1 - GENERAL 


A. Requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support 

facilities, and security and protection facilities. 

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Sewers and drainage. 

2. Water service and distribution. 

3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 

4. Electric power service. 

5. Lighting. 

6. Telephone service. 

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Project identification and temporary signs. 

2. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. 

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Environmental protection. 

2. Stormwater control. 

3. Tree and plant protection. 

4. Pest control. 

5. Site enclosure fence. 

6. Security enclosure and lockup. 

7. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 

8. Fire protection. 

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Refer to Drawings for additional requirements for temporary protection. 


A. Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for procedures for submitting copies of 

implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 

1.4 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities will be paid by the Owner. Employ means 

and methods for conservation. 

1. Temporary electricity 

2. Temporary water 

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner’s Project Manager 

change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume 

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 015000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

AND CONTROLS

during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of 

previously assigned responsibilities. 

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities 

by all parties engaged in the Work: 

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 

2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. 

B. Water: Potable. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as 

indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size 

required by location and class of fire exposure. 

B. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation or 

combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar 

nonabsorbent material. 

C. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 

120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset 

button, and pilot light. 

D. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for 

surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be 

nonmetallic sheathed cable. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference 

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as 

required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use 

of completed permanent facilities. 

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to 

service connections provided under the Work of the Project. Where utility company provides 

only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and 

equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 

1. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is 

available, provide trucked-in services. 

2. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements 

cannot be used for that purpose. 

3. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove 

effluent that can be discharged lawfully. 

B. Water Service: Connect to existing water source for construction operations. 



AND CONTROLS

C. Sanitary Facilities: Existing designated facilities may be used during construction operations. 

Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition, 

D. Electric Power Service: Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not 

disrupt Owner’s need for continuous service. 

E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination 

for construction operations and traffic conditions. 

F. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for 

common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate 

telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. 

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with the following: 

1. The Contractor may use an area on campus, as designated by the Hospital, as a field 

office. Hospital will also designate an area on campus for staging materials. 

B. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of interior roadways. Include 

warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in 

sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to 

Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. 

Comply with details indicated. 

2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and 

visitors. 

3. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood 

in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated 

wood or steel. 

4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over 

exterior primer. 

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle 

waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or 

unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 

1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, 

for each type of waste material to be deposited. 

2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of 

waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide 

detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. 

Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used 

to dispose of all waste materials. 

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct 

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that 

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable 

effects. 

1. Cooperate and comply with Owner’s Environmental Management Plan. 

B. Noise Control: 



AND CONTROLS

1. Obtain noise permit or permits as required by Chapter 43 State of Hawaii Department of 

Health regulations. 

2. Muffle internal combustion engine-powered equipment to minimize noise and properly 

maintain to reduce noise to acceptable levels. 

3. Blasting and use of explosives will be not permitted. 

4. Do not start up non B highway vehicular equipment prior to 6:45 a.m. without proper 

approval of the Owner’s Project Manager. 

5. Activities of severe and prolonged noise and vibration must be approved in advance by 

Owner’s Project Manager. Submit written notice not less than seven days in advance of 

intended noise producing activity. 

C. Dust Control: 

1. Keep dust within acceptable levels at all times, including non-working hours, weekends 

and holidays, in conformance with Chapter 31 - Air Pollution of the State Department of 

Health, Public Health Regulations, latest edition. 

2. Only wet grinding or cutting of concrete will be allowed on exterior surfaces. 

3. Mechanical dry sweeping not permitted. Vacuuming, wet mopping, approved limited dry 

hand, wet or damp sweeping is acceptable. 

4. During loading operations, water down debris and waste materials to allay dust. 

5. The method of dust control and costs incurred are the responsibility of the Contractor. 

6. Use wet/sticky mats at all entrances to work area to control dust. 

7. The Contractor is responsible for damage claims. 

D. Hazardous Materials: 

A. Asbestos, urea formaldehyde and other hazardous materials may be present in the existing 

structures subject to alteration. Observe the applicable requirements of Hawaii Occupational 

Safety and Health Standards and the Environmental Protection Agency. 

B. When the presence of toxic substances is determined using approved sampling and analysis 

notify the Environmental Protection Agency, in writing, as soon as possible prior to 

beginning demolition. 

C. Do not begin demolition when toxic substances are present until occupants of the building 

are moved to other facilities or are separated from exposure by assured means. 

D. In removing and disposing of toxic substances observe the following requirements: 

a. Provide air-tight compartments within which the toxic substances may be removed. 

b. In lieu of air tight compartments provide competent controlled misting or dust setting 

agent. 

c. Place toxic substances in properly labeled sacks of at least 8 mil polypropylene. 

1) Notify disposal site in advance so that special burial arrangements can be 

made 

E. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around 

excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater 

from heavy rains. 

F. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or 

pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, 

roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control 

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial 

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using 

environmentally safe materials. 

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, 

install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against 

reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 



AND CONTROLS

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible 

from space being served, with sign mounted above. 

a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers. 

b. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended 

purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable 

stairwell. 

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fireprotection 

facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking 

in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 

4. Supervise welding operations, and similar sources of fire ignition. 

5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete 

installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place 

into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 

6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for 

personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish 

procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings 

and information. 

H. BARRIERS 

1. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's 

use of premises, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage 

from construction operations. 

2. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities. 

3. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 

J. INTERIOR ENCLOSURES 

1. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, 

to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent 

damage to existing materials and equipment. 

2. Construction: Framing and sheet materials must be noncombustible, with closed joints 

and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces and all other areas to provide a 

smoke tight area; STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90 and maximum Flame 

Spread Rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 

3. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas. 

K. INFECTION CONTROL 

Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by 

methods that comply with hospital’s infection control regulations and minimize undesirable 

effects. 

1. Cooperate and comply with Owner’s Infection Control Plan. 



AND CONTROLS

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and 

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and 

similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to 

avoid possibility of damage. 




AND CONTROLS

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 



A. Selection of products for use in project 

B. Product delivery, storage, and handling 

C. Manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties 

D. Product substitutions 

E. Comparable products 


A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or 

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," 

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or 

model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product 

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or 

facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless 

explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not 

considered new products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal 

process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities 

related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, 

appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. 

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and 

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other 

designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of 

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 

D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for 

a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 

E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, 

either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for 

Owner. 

1.3 SUBMITTALS 

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names 

of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each 

product. 

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals 

Schedule. 

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: 

a. Specification Section number and title. 

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. 

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 016000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

d. Manufacturer's name and address. 

e. Supplier's name and address. 

f. Installer's name and address. 

g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. 

h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery 

date. 

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 

copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for 

variations from Contract requirements. 

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and 

designations that must be established early in Contract period. 

4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 

copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and 

for variations from Contract requirements. 

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of 

receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable 

product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, 

or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply 

with the Contract Documents. 

B. Substitution Requests: See Hawaii Health Systems Corporation General Conditions for 

Construction. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously 

selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods 

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible 

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, 

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that 

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other 

losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original 

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for 

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to 

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 

5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 



7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight 

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, 

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

9. Protect stored products from damage. 

B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and 

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other 

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on 

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and 

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and 

properly executed. 

2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document 

using appropriate form properly executed. 

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular 

requirements for submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 


2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, 

that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items 

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are 

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used 

successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make 

selection. 

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is 

Architect's. 

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications 

establish "salient characteristics" of products. 

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or 

equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable 

Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a 

single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. 

a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 



2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled 

"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by 

the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. 


3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a 

list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that 

complies with requirements. 


4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" 

introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers 

listed that complies with requirements. 


5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available 

Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of 

the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with 

provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed 

product. 

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled 

"Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by 

one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. 

Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of 

an unnamed product. 

7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that 

size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product 

or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable 

product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product 

Substitutions" Article. 

8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled 

"Basis-of-Design Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of 

manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by 

one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, 

profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. 

Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of 

an unnamed product. 


9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established 

Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and 

matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed 

product matches satisfactorily. 

a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and 

complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the 

Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. 

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected 

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and 

manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. 

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of 

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or 

texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 



. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, 

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture 

from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 

11. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in 

Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for 

processing such selections. 

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Follow the procedures as described in Hawaii Health Systems Corporation General 

Conditions for Construction. 

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 

A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to 

other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract 

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the 

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the 

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 




SECTION 017133 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 

PART 1 – PRODUCTS 

1.1 SALVAGED MATERIALS 

A. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work of 

existing construction, when material is not readily obtainable on current market. 

B. Incorporate salvaged or used material only as indicated or with permission of Architect. 

1.2 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK 

A. New Materials: Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. 

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing products 

where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard. 

PART 2 – EXECUTION 

2.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work. 

B. Beginning of restoration Work means acceptance of existing conditions. 

2.2 PREPARATION 

A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. 

Replace and restore at completion. 

B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded 

metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for 

finished Work. 

C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. 

D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new 

work and finishes. 

E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from 

weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate duct work and piping to 

prevent condensation in exposed areas. 

F. Do not demolish, chip, or penetrate existing structural members without the expressed 

approval of the Architect. 

G. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to 

avoid damage to adjacent work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of 

repair and new Work. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 017133 - 1 ALTERATION PROJECT 

PROCEDURES

H. Consult the Owner where penetration to existing roof membrane is required. 

2.3 INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion and to 

accommodate Owner occupancy. 

B. Project areas and Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical and 

electrical work. 

C. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of 

restoring Products and finishes to original or specified condition as appropriate. 

D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified 

condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 

E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing plumbing, 

ventilation, air conditioning, and electrical systems to full operational condition. 

2.4 TRANSITIONS 

A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. 

Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. 

B. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster, or metals by methods to terminate 

surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division. 

C. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is possible, 

terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. Provide trim 

appropriate to finished surface subject to approval of Architect. 

2.5 ADJUSTMENTS 

A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework 

floors, walls and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps or bulkheads. 

B. Where a change of plane 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing 

a smooth transition for Architect review. 

C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. 

D. At penetrations of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids 

with fire rated, fire resistant material, full thickness of the construction element. 

2.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES 

A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or 

showing other imperfections. 

B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 



PROCEDURES

2.7 FINISHES 

A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. 

B. Finish patches to product uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot 

be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 

2.8 CLEANING 

A. In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary 

Controls clean Owner occupied areas daily. 

B. Clean spillage, over-spray, and dust in Owner-occupied areas immediately. 




PROCEDURES

SECTION 017300 – EXECUTION 



A. Construction layout. 

B. Field engineering and surveying. 

C. Progress cleaning. 


A. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer to demonstrate their 

capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and 

addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor and professional engineer certifying 

that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. 

C. Site Survey: Submit under the provisions of Section 01330, and showing the Work performed 

and record survey data. 


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice 

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying 

services of the kind indicated. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 



A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other 

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and 

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction 

affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and 

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate 

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting 

the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of 

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical 

services. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public 

utilities serving Project site. 

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or 

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances 

and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of 

the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 017300 - 1 

EXECUTION

a. Description of the Work. 

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 

c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 

d. Recommended corrections. 

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with 

existing finishes or primers. 

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of 

connections before equipment and fixture installation. 

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are 

to be installed. 

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, 

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility 

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck 

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before 

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 

Work. 

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown 

diagrammatically on Drawings. 

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for 

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include 

a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the 

Contract Documents. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on 

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are 

discovered, notify Architect promptly. 

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of 

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain 

required dimensions. 

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 

5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable 

tolerances. 

6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established 

by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill 

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 



EXECUTION

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building 

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and 

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. 

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and 

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and 

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log 

available for reference by Architect . 

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING 

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. 

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference 

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control 

points during construction operations. 

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written 

approval of Owner’s Project Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks 

or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control 

points to Owner’s Project Manager before proceeding. 

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base 

replacements on the original survey control points. 

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, 

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having 

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record 

Documents. 

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide 

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked 

construction to its original condition. 

3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate 

progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce 

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and 

debris. 

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the 

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for 

proper execution of the Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the 

entire work area, as appropriate. 

D. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing 

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 



EXECUTION

E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise 

deleterious exposure during the construction period. 




EXECUTION

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 



A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 


A. Section 011000 - SUMMARY: Work by Owner or by separate contractors. 

B. Section 011200 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES: Cutting and patching for 

alterations work. 

C. Section 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 

D. Section 016000 – MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS: Product Options and Substitutions. 

E. Individual Product Specification Sections: 

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 

2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. 

3. Limitations on cutting structural members. 


A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 

2. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 

B. Include in request: 

1. Identification of Project. 

2. Location and description of affected work. 

3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 

4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 

5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 

6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 

7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 

8. Date and time work will be executed. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. 



A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or 

movement during cutting and patching. 

B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. 

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 



CUTTING AND PATCHING


A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and 

methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. 

B. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work. 

C. Maintain excavations free of water. 

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete work. 

B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. 

C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 

D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. 

E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 

F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 

3.4 PERFORMANCE 

A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate 

surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 

B. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior 

approval. 

C. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 

D. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 

E. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal 

voids, fire stopping, to full thickness of the penetrated element. 

F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest 

intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 




CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 


1.1 SECTION INCLUDES administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

A. Inspection procedures. 

B. Warranties. 

C. Final cleaning. 


A. Section 012600 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS for requirements for Applications for 

Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 

B. Section 017300 EXECUTION for progress cleaning of Project site. 

C. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the 

Work in those Sections. 

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial 

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on 

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to 

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar 

releases. 

4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, 

Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property 

surveys, and similar final record information. 

5. Complete startup testing of systems. 

6. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 

7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, 

construction tools, and similar elements. 

8. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 

9. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and 

maintenance. 

10. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual 

defects. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 017700 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of 

request, the Owner’s Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor 

of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion 

after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items 

identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final 

Completion. 

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final 

Completion, complete the following: 

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final 

certifications, and similar documents. 

3. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by 

Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

4. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's 

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 

5. Submit certified copy of Owner’s Project Manager’s Substantial Completion inspection 

list of items to be completed or corrected. The certified copy of the list shall state that 

each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance 

requirements. 

7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 

8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, 

equipment, and systems. Document attendance and discussion topics presented to 

owner’s personnel. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, 

Architect and Owner’s Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor 

of unfulfilled requirements. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area 

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction 

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 

Use Contractor’s form. 

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and 

proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 



2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, 

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

1.6 WARRANTIES 

c. Name of Contractor. 

d. Page number. 

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner’s Project Manager for 

designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of 

Substantial Completion is indicated. 

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of 

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during 

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. 

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 

Project Manual. 

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, 

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch 

paper. 

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark 

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or 

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone 

number of Installer. 

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title 

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or 

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially 

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 


3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply 

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution 

regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each 

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and 

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 



1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification 

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, 

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other 

foreign substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other 

foreign deposits. 

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured 

surface. 

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 

Project site. 

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, 

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural 

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original 

condition. 

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; 

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. 

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. 

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish 

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or 

that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and 

electrical nameplates. 

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and 

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and 

other foreign substances. 

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 

n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains 

resulting from water exposure. 

o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed 

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during 

construction. 



q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. 

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and 

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply 

with requirements for new fixtures. 

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid 

Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. 

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or 

excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous 

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of 

lawfully. 




SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 



A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the 

following: 

1. Record Drawings. 

2. Record Specifications. 

3. Record Product Data. 


A. Section 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES for general closeout procedures. 

B. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the 

Work in those Sections. 


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: 

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings 

and one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot 

and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and 

quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for 

organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. 

b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, two sets of Record 

CAD Drawing files, two copies of Record CAD Drawing plots. Plot and print 

each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. 

1) Electronic Media: CD-R. 

B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and 

contract modifications. 


2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop 

Drawings. 

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies 

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, 

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the 

marked-up Record Prints. 

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be 

difficult to identify or measure and record later. 

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. 

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup 

before enclosing concealed installations. 

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. 

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 017839 - 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

c. Depths of foundations below first floor. 

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. 

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. 

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. 

g. Actual equipment locations. 

h. Duct size and routing. 

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. 

j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. 

k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing 

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, 

show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish 

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted 

from original Drawings. 

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order 

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 

B. Record CAD Drawings: Prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract 

Drawings, as follows: 

1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract 

Drawings. 

2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. 

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 

3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Owner’s Project Manager for 

resolution. 

4. The Contractor is free to negotiate a fee with the Architect, for the CAD Drawings of the 

Contract Drawings for use in recording information. 

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD 

Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings. 

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD 

DRAWING" in a prominent location. 

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable 

paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 

2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that 

correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet 

identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 

3. Identification: As follows: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 



c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." 

d. Name of Contractor. 

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and 

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to 

provide a record of selections made. 

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in 

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where 

applicable. 

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA 

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in 

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where 

applicable. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS 

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous 

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file 

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 


3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project 

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as 

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. 

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the 

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project 

Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and 

in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to 

Project Record Documents for Architect's and Owner's reference during normal working hours. 




SECTION 024119 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 



A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. 

B. Removal of designated construction. 

C. Identification of utilities. 

D. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. 


A. Section 017133 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 

B. Section 015000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY Controls: Temporary 

enclosures, Security at Owner occupied areas, and Cleanup during construction. 

C. Section 017000 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: Project record documents. 

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and subsurface obstructions. 

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, safety of structure, dust control, noise control, 

and pollution control. 

B. Obtain required permits from authorities. 

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 

D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. 

E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without two weeks prior written 

notice to the Owner. 

F. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 


Not Used 



A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and partitions as specified in Section 01500. 

B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. 

C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors and noise to permit 

continued Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01010. 

D. Protect existing materials and systems which are not to be demolished. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 024119 - 1 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR 

REMODELING

E. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring. 

F. Mark location of utilities. 

3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. 

B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect. Do not 

resume operations until directed. 

C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work. 

3.3 DEMOLITION 

A. Disconnect remove or cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas as indicated. 

B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. 

C. Except where noted otherwise, remove demolished materials from site. Do not burn or bury 

materials on site. 

D. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave 

areas in clean condition. 

E. Remove temporary Work. 

3.4 SALVAGE MATERIALS 

A. Coordinate with the Owner, items for salvage. The Owner may elect to salvage items before 

construction begins. If they so elect, then provide the Owner two weeks advance notice before 

work is to begin. 




REMODELING

SECTION 024119 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 



A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. 

B. Removal of designated construction. 

C. Identification of utilities. 

D. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. 


A. Section 017133 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 

B. Section 015000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY Controls: Temporary 

enclosures, Security at Owner occupied areas, and Cleanup during construction. 

C. Section 017000 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: Project record documents. 

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and subsurface obstructions. 


A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, safety of structure, dust control, noise control, 

and pollution control. 

B. Obtain required permits from authorities. 

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 

D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. 

E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without two weeks prior written 

notice to the Owner. 

F. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 


Not Used 



A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and partitions as specified in Section 01500. 

B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. 

C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors and noise to permit 

continued Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01010. 

D. Protect existing materials and systems which are not to be demolished. 



REMODELING

E. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring. 

F. Mark location of utilities. 

3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. 

B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect. Do not 

resume operations until directed. 

C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work. 

3.3 DEMOLITION 

A. Disconnect remove or cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas as indicated. 

B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. 

C. Except where noted otherwise, remove demolished materials from site. Do not burn or bury 

materials on site. 

D. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave 

areas in clean condition. 

E. Remove temporary Work. 

3.4 SALVAGE MATERIALS 

A. Coordinate with the Owner, items for salvage. The Owner may elect to salvage items before 

construction begins. If they so elect, then provide the Owner two weeks advance notice before 

work is to begin. 




REMODELING

SECTION 028100 - EXISTING CONDITIONS - ASBESTOS/LEAD/HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY 


1.1 SUMMARY 

As specified in Section 011000. 

1.2 WORK DESCRIPTION 

A. This section includes the results of the Hospital’s survey for Asbestos, Lead and/or other 

Hazardous materials and is provided for the Contractor’s information. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1.3 ASBESTOS 

1. Section 028233 - REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING 

MATERIALS for requirements of all work which disturbs ACBM. 

2. Section 028416 - HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS 

CONTAINING PCBS AND MERCURY. 

3. Section 028101 - TESTING AND AIR MONITORING for requirements of all 

work which disturbs the asbestos, lead, PCB’s and mercury. 

A. The structure to be renovated under this contract was surveyed for the presence of 

asbestos containing building materials (ACBM), using AHERA requirements. A copy of 

the initial survey report, as well as any subsequent supplemental survey report performed, 

are included in this Section. 

1. Contractor shall notify the Hospital if ACBM, LCP, and LBP not shown in the 

report are suspected in the areas of the building in which work will be performed. 

2. If there is ACBM, LCP, and LBP outside of the areas in which work will be 

performed, this ACBM, LCP, and LBP shall not be disturbed in any way. 

B. If applicable, notify employees, Subcontractors and all other persons engaged with the 

project of the presence of asbestos in the existing building materials in accordance with 

the requirements of Chapter 110, Article 12-110-2(f)(1)(B) of the Occupational Safety 

and Health Standards, State of Hawaii. 

C. In the event that work is required in any building or buildings on the site other than the 

one(s) designated within this project scope, request copies of the asbestos survey 

report(s) for such building(s) from the Hospital. Based on the information contained in 

the additional survey(s), notify affected personnel per paragraph 1.2 B. 

1.4 LEAD-CONTAINING AND LEAD-BASED PAINT 

A. Inform employees, Subcontractors and all other persons engaged in the project that LCP 

and LBP are present in the existing building and at the job site. Follow the requirements 

of Title 12 (Department of Labor and Industrial Relations), Subtitle 8 (Division of 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 028100-1 EXISTING CONDITIONS – 

ASBESTOS/LEAD/HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY

Occupational Safety and Health), Chapter 148 (Lead Exposure in Construction), Hawaii 

Administrative Rules. 

1. Contractor shall notify the Hospital if LCP and LBP is not shown in the report are 

suspected in the areas of the building in which work will be performed. 

2. If there is LCP and LBP outside of the areas in which work will be performed, the 

LCP and LBP shall not be disturbed in any way. 

B. Review the attached lead testing data which identify locations LCP was found. Lead 

testing was for design purposes only, and the results do not satisfy any of the 

requirements of Chapter 12-148. 

1.5 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), MERCURY, AND SELF-ILLUMINATING 

EXIT SIGNS (SIES) 

Inform employees, Subcontractors and all other persons engaged in the project that light 

fixtures may contain ballasts with PCBs, mercury-containing light tubes, and self-illuminating 

exit signs (SIES) materials may be present in the existing building and at the job site. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 


3.1 SURVEY attached 

A. Targeted Hazardous Materials Assessment Survey Report for the Kahuku Medical Center 

Campbell Wing CT Scanner Expansion Project, 37 pages, dated May 25, 2012, prepared 

by Bureau Veritas North America, Inc. 



CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 028100-2 EXISTING CONDITIONS – 

ASBESTOS/LEAD/HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY

SECTION 028101 - TESTING AND AIR MONITORING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1.2 PRELIMINARY 

In performing this project, all possible safeguards, precautions and protective measures should be 

utilized to prevent exposure of any individual to asbestos fibers and PCB’s, mercury, and 

radiation from the work activities of this project located at Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell 

Wing, Kahuku, Oahu, Hawaii. 


Basis for specifications: These specifications are based upon procedures and standards derived 

from U.S. regulatory agencies (EPA, OSHA, NIOSH, and U.S. Public Health) and the Hawaii 

State Division of Occupational Safety and Health as well as from industry and sound industrial 

hygiene practice. They must be followed to ensure that measurable amount of asbestos fibers do 

not exceed the current ambient levels associated with this project. 

A. Testing, daily area air monitoring and final visual clearance inspections shall be provided 

by the General Contractor Hired Qualified Consultant (QC), for the purpose of: 

1. Verifying compliance with the specifications and the applicable regulations listed in 

Sections 028233 - REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING 

MATERIALS and Section 028416 - HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND 

LAMPS CONTAINING PCBS AND MERCURY; 

2. Ensuring that the documentation required by these specifications and by law is 

collected and reported to the Hospital; 

3. Instigating engineering controls and oversight during the project. 

1.4 TESTING/AIR MONITORING/INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE SUPERVISION AND AIR 

MONITORING 

A. Industrial hygiene supervision and air monitoring shall be performed by an independent 

Industrial Hygiene (IH) firm selected, retained and paid for by the General Contractor. The 

IH shall not be paid by the Abatement Contractor. The laboratory used for samples 

analysis shall be proficient in: 

1. The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Proficiency 

Analytical Testing (PAT) program. 

2. The National Institute of Standards and technology, National Voluntary Laboratory 

Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for bulk asbestos of the Environmental Projection 

Agency (EPA) Research Triangle Institute (RTI) program for bulk asbestos analysis. 

Submittals of proof shall be reviewed by the Hospital prior to the beginning of work. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 028101-1 TESTING AND AIR MONITORING

B. All air monitoring and project supervision shall be performed under the direction of a 

Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene. 

The name and certification number of the CIH shall be submitted to the Hospital prior to 

the beginning of the work. On-site air monitoring and project supervision may be 

performed by any technician with a minimum of two years experience in asbestos 

abatement and/or the relevant hazardous material abatement, provided all activities are 

performed under the supervision of the CIH. 

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS 

The testing/air monitoring requirements included in the scope of work for any testing/air 

monitoring consultants or inspections, and all applicable Federal, State and local regulations. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) 


3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper notification to the EPA and/or State of 

Hawaii Department of Health (DOH). 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his employees' personnel protection, exposure 

monitoring and necessary records as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101, Hawaii State 

Law HIOSH 12-145.1, and HAR 501 thru 504 (for asbestos), and all other applicable laws 

and as required in these specifications. The Contractor shall provide a final report with all 

required documentation to the Hospital. 

1. Asbestos air monitoring and testing will be conducted according to the method 

prescribed by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (f): HIOSH 12-145-1: NIOSH 7400 method 

or approved substitute per OSHA Revisions 12 August 1994; and the Asbestos 

Hazard Emergency Act (AHERA) 40 CFR part 763, Asbestos Containing Materials 

in Schools. Asbestos in air samples (environmental, occupational exposure, and 

clearance) shall be analyzed by NIOSH method 582 or equivalent. 

C. The Contractor shall procure legally required reports for air monitoring as part of the 

contract. All air monitoring reports shall include all field data, laboratory reports, test 

results and other pertinent information about the daily work activities. 

D. As provided in the QC scope of work, one copy of reports may be available for the 

Contractor's use. The Contractor may accept such reports as they are offered at his own 

risk. Availability of additional copies of the reports during the work or at any future time 

shall not be considered a part of the contract. 

E. Air monitoring and testing which becomes necessary in order to follow up on work by the 

Contractor, rejected as not conforming to the requirements shall be the responsibility of the 

Contractor. The full cost of such additional monitoring shall be borne by the Contractor, 

and shall not be a part of the final contract payment. 

As the work progresses and waste is generated, the Contractor shall legally transport to the 

authorized disposal site(s) all waste generated daily unless specifically approved by the 

Hospital to delay the disposal operations as specified for waste container storage. The 

Contractor shall pre-schedule and obtain the approval of the Hospital prior to removing the 



waste from the work area. Transport all waste to the pre-designated disposal site in 

accordance with EPA regulation 40 CFR 61.152, Department of Transportation regulations 

49 CFR parts 171 and 172, HIOSH regulation 12-145-10 and local regulations. The 

Contractor shall keep abreast of all changes to transportation regulations and fully comply 

with them. The Hospital’s representative shall provide the required information needed to 

complete the waste manifest. The Contractor shall coordinate waste disposal with the 

Hospital’s representative. The Contractor shall prepare the required waste documentation 

and submit for approval and signature prior to transportation off the project site and 

subsequent disposal. 

3.2 TESTING/AIR MONITORING 

A. The QC will ensure that the applicable specifications are being followed using the methods 

and requirements of the applicable scope of work. 

B. The QC shall have the authority to instigate engineering control measures during the 

project and stop work if deemed necessary. The work shall not start until the Hospital 

representative and QC have provided the Contractor written approval. 

C. Air testing shall be performed by the QC retained by the General Contractor. The QC shall 

be able to prove proficiency in AIHA/NIOSH PAT program and EPA’s RTI program, or 

equivalent. Payment to the testing laboratory shall be by the QC. Any testing initiated by 

the Contractor shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall be included in the contract 

amount. 

D. Air monitoring will be conducted according to the method prescribed by the OSHA 

regulation, 29 CFR 1926.1101 (f) and HIOSH 12-145 (for asbestos); 29 CFR 1926.62 and 

HIOSH 12-148.1 (for lead). NIOSH 7400 method (for asbestos) or approved substitute per 

OSHA revisions 15 August 1994; and the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Act (AHERA) 40 

CFR Part 763, Asbestos containing Materials in Schools. 

1. The QC shall collect a minimum of three representative background air samples 

whenever interior asbestos activities will take place. 

2. Daily area air monitoring shall be performed during the asbestos activities, for the 

duration of this project. A minimum of two samples each shall be collected daily, 

inside the removal area and outside the removal area barrier. 

3. Once the QC has indicated that the work area has passed visual inspection, the 

Contractor shall encapsulate the asbestos removal areas. If the removal area does not 

pass visual inspection, the Contractor shall conduct additional cleaning of the work 

area as directed by the QC, prior to application of encapsulant. 

4. When the encapsulant has thoroughly dried, the QC will conduct final clearance air 

testing using phase contrasts microscopy (PCM). Following the completion and 

verification by PCM that the work area air samples are within acceptable 

concentrations (less than 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc)) the work area may 

be occupied. 

5. The work area will be open to other trades and personnel without respiratory 

protection. 



G. Final visual clearance shall be performed by the QC immediately after all removal activities 

have been completed for each work area. 

H. The QC shall conduct visual inspections of the work areas where PCB’s, mercury, and 

SIES removal and disposal work is being conducted. The QC will conduct a visual 

inspection of the work area during ballasts and lamp removal operations to ensure general 

cleanliness of the work area. The QC will also conduct inspection of the work area prior to 

the opening of the work area to other trades and personnel. In addition, the QC will inspect 

ballasts, mercury light tubes, and SIES removed prior to packaging/shipping/disposal. 

Any testing above and beyond what is specified and initiated by the Contractor shall be 

paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Hospital. 




SECTION 028233 - REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1.2 PRELIMINARY 

In performing this asbestos abatement project, all possible safeguards, precautions, and protective 

measures should be utilized to prevent exposure of any individual to asbestos fibers. 


A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to carry out the safe disturbance of 

non-friable and friable asbestos-containing material (ACM) and asbestos-contaminated 

material, in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, from all surfaces as 

identified and to safely complete this project, including all incidental and pertinent 

operations. The asbestos work shall generally include the abatement of the following 

materials from the Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell Wing: 

1. Removal and disposal of approximately 1.100 square feet of beige “pebble design” 

vinyl sheet flooring with associated mastic located throughout the office/waiting 

room, dark room, waiting area, work area, office, and portions of the main corridor; 

as specified on the drawings. 

2. Removal and disposal of approximately nine square feet of sink undercoating located 

on beneath the sink in the dark room; as specified on the drawings. 

B. Post-removal encapsulation work shall include the coating of all surfaces where ACM has 

been disturbed. 

C. In general, the principal items of work shall be as follows: 

1.4 COORDINATION 

1. Protection of all on-site personnel and visitors. 

2. Set-up and erect barriers around the work areas, post sign and secure work areas. 

3. Disturbance of asbestos-containing floor covering and sink undercoating 

4. Encapsulation of surfaces following abatement and final cleaning. 

5. Final cleaning and disposal of all ACM and asbestos-contaminated materials in 

accordance with regulatory requirements. 

Prior to commencement of work, an annotated description of all work activities shall be 

submitted to the Hospital. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to repair existing damaged and 

missing items and/or replace, to the Hospital's satisfaction, all items identified as damaged and/or 

missing that cannot be proven to have been in this condition prior to the commencement of this 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 028233-1 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF 

ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS

project. The contractor shall coordinate all asbestos work with the General Contractor and the 

Hospital. 


The following submittals must be provided within ten consecutive calendar days from award: 

A. Detailed Work Schedule: Actual start and completion dated for the asbestos work and 

other work specified. The schedule shall be formulated on a day/week basis. The schedule 

shall be updated weekly, with 6 copies submitted to the Hospital. 

B. Notices: As early as possible but prior to commencement of work as regulated by each 

agency, but not later than 20 working days before commencement of any on-site project 

activity, send a written "10-day notice" in accordance with Hawaii Administrative Rule 

(HAR) Chapter 501 - Asbestos Requirements, of the proposed asbestos abatement work 

with copies to the Hospital and to the following agency: 

1. State of Hawaii - Department of Health, Indoor and Radiological Health (IRH) 

Branch, Asbestos Section, 591 Ala Moana Blvd., Honolulu, Hawaii 96813 

C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits and arrangements for transportation and disposal of 

asbestos-containing or contaminated materials. 

D. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, material safety data 

sheets (MSDS), installation instructions and field test procedures for each material, and all 

equipment related to asbestos handling and abatement (i.e., chemical mastic remover), 

including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications and 

proposed uses within ten consecutive calendar days from the award. Indicate by transmittal 

form that a copy of each installation instruction has been distributed to the installer. 

E. Samples: Submit samples of the following items for approval prior to ordering materials: 

1. Asbestos Encapsulant(s): Submit copies of manufacturer's literature including all 

laboratory data, MSDS, and application instructions. 

2. Plastic Sheeting: Three 8-1/2- by 11-inch pieces of each thickness and type with 

labels indicating actual mil thickness. 

3. Tapes and Adhesives: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature including all 

laboratory data. 

4. Warning Labels and Signs: Submit copies of examples of all required signage. 

5. Protective Clothing: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature on all protective 

clothing and one sample of each item (which will be returned to the Contractor). 

6. Respirator Equipment: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature on all respirator 

equipment. 

F. Documentation for Instruction: Submit to the Hospital documentation that each and every 

individual including foremen, supervisors, other company personnel or agents, and any 

other individual who may be exposed to airborne asbestos fibers, who may be responsible 

for any aspects of abatement activities, or who is allowed or permitted to enter areas where 




such exposure may occur, is AHERA trained (and current) which includes instruction on 

the hazards and health effects of asbestos exposure. Also submit to the Hospital 

documentation that personnel stated above have had instructions on the nature of the 

activities and operations accordance with qualitative procedures as detailed in HIOSH 12- 

145, Qualitative and Quantitative Fit Testing Procedures), on protective dress, on entry and 

exit from the work areas under normal and emergency conditions, on all aspects of work 

procedures and protective measures, and on all provisions of HIOSH 12-145, and that each 

and every employee understands this instruction. This documentation shall be an outline 

format of the instruction and shall be signed by all employees to be engaged on this project 

and by all individuals before being allowed within the project site and must include 

acknowledgment and an assumption of the potential risk of exposure by that individual and 

a release of liability of the Hospital for any such exposure. The Contractor shall be 

responsible for keeping the documentation up to date and subsequent submittals to the 

Hospital before any additional employee or individual, not currently on this list, is allowed 

within the project site. 

G. Documentation from Physician: Submit to the Hospital documentation from a physician 

that all employees or agents who may be exposed to airborne asbestos have been medical 

monitored to determine whether they are physically capable of working while wearing the 

respirator required without suffering adverse health effects. In addition, documentation that 

all individuals permitted within the project site have received medical monitoring or had 

such monitoring made available to them as required in HIOSH 12-145-11(a). The 

Contractor must be aware of and provide information to the examining physician about 

unusual conditions in the work place environment (e.g. high temperatures, humidity, 

chemical contaminants) that may impact on the employee's ability to perform work 

activities. The Contractor shall keep and make available to all affected individuals a record 

and the results of such examinations. 

H. HEPA Vacuums: Submit manufacturer's certification that vacuums conform to ANSI Z9.2- 

79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems as 

applicable to this project. 

I. Respirators: Submit certification that respirators meet all requirements of HIOSH and 

EPA. Document NIOSH approval of all respiratory protective devices utilized onsite. 

Include manufacturer's certification of HEPA filtration capabilities for all cartridges and 

filters. 

J. Rental Equipment: When rental equipment is to be used in abatement areas or to transport 

asbestos-containing waste, a written notification concerning intended use of the rental 

equipment must be provided to the rental agency with a copy submitted to the Hospital. 

K. Entry Log: Maintain a log of all personnel other than the Contractor's employees and 

agents who enter the work area while asbestos operations are in progress until after final 

clearance is received that the work area is suitable for re-occupancy. A sample form is 

provided at the end of this Section. The log shall contain the following information as a 

minimum: 

1. Date of visit. 

2. Visitor's name, employer, business address, and telephone number. 

3. Time of entry and exit from work area. 




4. Purpose of visit. 

5. Type of protective clothing and respirator worn. 

6. Certificate of release signed and filed with the Contractor. 

L. Waste Disposal Manifest Forms: Submit copies of all transport manifests, trip tickets and 

disposal receipts for all asbestos-containing waste materials removed from the work area 

during the abatement process to the Hospital. Final payment will not be made until copies 

of all submittals have been furnished to the Hospital. 

M. Emergency Planning Procedures: Emergency planning shall be developed prior to 

abatement initiation and agreed to by the Contractor and the Hospital. 

1. Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted adjacent to 

the Worker Protection Notices specified hereinafter. 

2. Emergency planning shall include notification of police, fire, and emergency 

personnel of planned abatement activities, work schedule and particularly barriers 

that may affect response capabilities. 

3. Emergency planning shall include considerations of fire, explosion, toxic 

atmospheres, written procedures shall be developed and employee training 

procedures shall be provided. 

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING 

Delivery and Storage of Materials: Deliver materials to the site in original packages, containers 

or bags fully identified with manufacturer's name brand and lot number. Store materials in a dry 

well-ventilated space, under cover and off the ground and away from surfaces subject to 

dampness or condensation as approved by the Hospital. Material that becomes contaminated with 

asbestos shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations. Replacement materials 

shall be stored outside the contaminated work area until abatement is completed. 

1.7 PROTECTION 

A. Site Security: The work area is to be restricted only to authorized, trained, and protected 

personnel. These may include the Contractor's employees, employees of Subcontractors, 

the Hospital and their representatives, State and local inspectors and any other designated 

individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to commencing with 

work activities for this project. 

1. Entry to the work area by unauthorized individuals shall not be permitted without the 

prior approval of the Hospital or Hospital's representative and any such entry shall be 

reported immediately to the Hospital or Hospital's representative by the Contractor. 

2. A Visitor's Log shall be maintained. 

3. The Contractor shall have control, subject to approval of the Hospital, of security in 

the work area and in proximity of Contractor's equipment and materials. 

B. Site Protection and Safety: As a minimum, follow the requirements of EPA, HIOSH, 

OSHA and NIOSH. Take all necessary precaution to ensure there is no asbestos 




contamination to those areas not included in the scope of work and as identified on the 

drawings. 

C. Protective Covering: The Contractor shall provide and install additional protective 

covering to protect the building from possible damage. Note: It is the responsibility of the 

contractor to ensure that removal of the protective sheeting does not result in the damage of 

walls, fixtures or other surfaces. Surfaces shall be returned to their original condition as 

directed by the Hospital. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for and make 

good on any or all damages by his or his employee's negligence. 

D. Safeguarding of Property: The Contractor shall take whatever steps necessary to safeguard 

his work and also the property of the Hospital and other individuals in the vicinity of his 

work area during the execution of this Contract. He shall be responsible for and make good 

on any and all damages by his employees' negligence. The contractor shall not load 

structure with weight that will endanger the structure. 

E. Completed Work: The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection for surfaces 

encapsulated under this section. 

1.8 ABBREVIATIONS 

A. AHERA: Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act. 

B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, Inc. 

C. CFR: Code of Federal Regulations. 

D. HIOSH: Division of Occupational Safety and Health, Department of Labor and Industrial 

Relations, State of Hawaii. 

E. EPA: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 

F. NESHAPS: National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 

G. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. 

H. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 

1.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

In performing this asbestos abatement project, all possible safeguards, precautions, and protective 

measures should be utilized to prevent exposure of any individual to asbestos fibers. 

A. Furnish Contractor certification, within ten consecutive days from award, that the 

Contractor is experienced with the EPA, OSHA and HIOSH regulations related to asbestos, 

application, removal, disposal, and treatment. 

B. Furnish employee certifications, within ten consecutive calendar days from award, that 

employees have had instructions on the dangers of asbestos exposure, on respirator use, and 

decontamination, from an EPA-approved training facility, as required by AHERA 

Regulations 40 CFR 763, Appendix C to Subpart E "worker training", April 30, 1987. 




C. Contractor shall examine and have at all times in his possession at his office (one copy) and 

in view at each jobsite office (one copy) a current issue of the following publications: 

1. State of Hawaii: Occupational Safety and Health Standards; Title12, Department of 

Labor and Industrial Relations; Subtitle 8 Division of Occupational Safety and 

Health; Part 3 Construction Standards; Chapter 145, Asbestos. 

2. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910.2 - Access to Employee 

Exposure and Medical Records, Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

(OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor. 

3. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910.134 - Respiratory Protection, 

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor 

(Federal Register, Vol. 63, No. 1152, January 8, 1998). 

4. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910.145 Specifications for Accident 

Prevention Signs and Tags, U.S. Department of Labor. 

5. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910.1001 - General Industry 

Standard for Asbestos OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor. 

6. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910-.1200 - Hazard Communication 

OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor. 

7. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1926 - Construction Industry OSHA, 

U.S. Department of Labor. 

8. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1926.1101 - Construction Standard for 

Asbestos: Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite and Actinolite, Final Rule dated 

August 10, 1994 OSHA. 

9. Title 34, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 231, Appendix C, Procedures For 

Containing and Removing Building Materials Containing Asbestos, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 

10. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1910, 1915, and 1926, Occupational 

Exposure to Asbestos; Final Rule issued August 10, 1994 and corrected and clarified 

June 29, 1995 (60FR33974) and September 29, 1995 (60FR50411),OSHA. 

11. Title 34, Code of federal Regulations, Part 231, Appendix C, Procedures for 

Containing and Removing Building Materials Containing Asbestos, U.S. EPA. 

12. Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, part 61, Subparts A and M (revised Subpart 

B), National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, Asbestos NESHAP 

Revision; Final Rule dated November 20, 1990, U.S. EPA. 

a. Environmental Protection Agency Regulations Governing Asbestos Abatement 

Projects (40 CFR 763.120, 121). 

b. Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 61, (new Appendix A to Subpart 

M): Interpretive Rule for Roof Removal Operations Under the Asbestos 

NESHAP (Federal Register, Vol. 59, No. 116, July 17, 1994). 




13. Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, part 763, Subpart E, Asbestos Hazard 

Emergency Response Act (AHERA), USEPA. 

14. Guidance for Controlling Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, (Purple 

Book), U.S. EPA (EPA 560/5-85-024). 

15. ANSI Z88.2, Practice for Respirator Protection. 

16. ANSI Z9.2, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust 

Systems. 

D. The Contractor shall comply with the above requirements and any applicable Federal, State 

and/or local regulations. Where conflict or any inconsistency among requirements or with 

this specification exists, the more stringent requirements shall apply. Ignorance of the 

above requirements and any applicable Federal, State and local regulations resulting in 

additional costs to the Contractor shall not be paid by the Hospital. 

E. All regulations shall govern over these specifications, except that any more stringent 

specification or specification providing greater protection against asbestos exposure, injury, 

loss or liability shall control to the extent permitted by regulation. Any questions 

regarding conflict or inconsistency between specifications and/or regulations should be 

directed to the Hospital. 

F. Whenever approval of the Hospital is required prior to proceeding with other work, the 

following shall be complied with: 

1. The Contractor shall allow the Hospital 24-hours from notification to respond to the 

request for inspection. 

2. The Contractor shall designate one person (either a foreman or superintendent) who 

will be authorized to request inspections. The name of the designated person shall be 

submitted in writing to the Hospital prior to commencing the work. Requests from 

any other person will not be considered an official request. 

3. The designated person, when requesting inspection, shall provide the following 

information: 

a. Name of caller. 

b. Building and rooms to be inspected. 

c. Work phase of inspection, as specified. 

G. The Contractor shall provide all required protective barriers to isolate the areas where 

asbestos removal is taking place. 

1.10 PERSONNEL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 

A. The Contractor acknowledges that he alone is responsible for instruction and enforcement 

of personnel protection requirements and that these specifications provide only a minimum 

acceptable standard. 




B. Provide workers with personally-issued and marked respiratory equipment approved by 

NIOSH and accepted by OSHA and HIOSH. Work area preparation shall be performed, at 

a minimum, in half face personal air purifying respirator. The respirator shall also be 

equipped with HEPA cartridges approved for asbestos by NIOSH. All removal work 

related to the removal and bagging of asbestos-containing joint compound and associated 

gypsum wallboard, shall be performed in, at a minimum half face respirators equipped with 

HEPA cartridges approved for asbestos by NIOSH. 

C. Loading and Unloading of Double-Bags at the Project Site and Landfill: This task will be 

performed in a minimum of half-face dual-cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA 

cartridges that are NIOSH approved for asbestos. 

D. Other: Should any condition, for any reason, be encountered where the exposure level 

exceeds the action levels provided by the Hospital/Hospital's representative and/or 

regulatory standards, the Contractor shall stop work and determine the causes of the 

excessive levels. Should the action level continue to be exceeded, the Contractor shall stop 

work. Work will not be resumed until approval is received from the Hospital. 

E. Beards: Prohibit beards that interfere with the seal of the respirator face piece. 

F. Provide workers with sufficient sets of disposable protective full body clothing consisting 

of material impenetrable by asbestos fibers and of the proper size for each individual to 

accommodate movement without tearing. Such clothing shall consist of full-body 

coveralls, footwear, gloves, and headgear. Provide hard hats as required by applicable 

safety regulations. Disposable clothing shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be 

disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste. Protective clothing shall be worn by all 

personnel within the work area from the start of pre-cleaning wet-wiping until the work 

area has received its final clearance. 

G. No visitors shall be allowed in work areas, except as authorized by the Hospital or 

Hospital's representative. Provide authorized visitors with suitable respirators with fresh 

cartridges. Provide authorized visitors with suitable disposable protective full-body 

clothing consisting of material impenetrable by asbestos fibers and of the proper size for 

each individual to accommodate movement without tearing. Such clothing shall consist of 

full-body coverall, footwear, gloves and headgear, including hard hat when required and 

insulated rubber boots or equal. 

H. All electrical systems used for asbestos abatement operations shall as a minimum be 

protected with "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters" selected and installed in strict 

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the National Electric Code and all other 

pertinent ones. 

I. Additional safety equipment (e.g. hard hats meeting the requirements of ANSI Z89.1-1981, 

eye protection meeting the requirements of ANSI Z87.1-1979, safety shoes meeting the 

requirements of ANSI Z41.1-1967, disposable PVC gloves), as necessary, shall be provided 

to all workers and authorized visitors. 


A. Abatement: Procedure to control fiber release from asbestos-containing building materials. 




1. Removal: All herein specified procedures necessary to remove asbestos-containing 

materials from an area and disposal of the material at an approved site in an 

acceptable manner. 

2. Post-Removal Surface Encapsulation: Procedures necessary to coat surfaces from 

which asbestos-containing materials have been removed and where designated on the 

drawings to control any residual fiber release. 

B. Air-Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific, known volume of 

air in a stated period of time. For this project, NIOSH 7400 Method or approved substitute 

per HIOSH Regulation, shall be used. 

C. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added to reduce water surface 

tension and thereby provide more effective penetration. 

D. Authorized Visitor: The Hospital, its representatives, air monitoring personnel, or a 

representative of any regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project. 

E. Hospital representative: Person responsible for onsite inspection during contractors work 

activities. He/she will ensure the contractor conducts work in accordance with the 

specifications and applicable regulatory requirements. 

F. Fixed Object: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area which cannot be removed 

from the work area without dismantling. 

G. Friable Asbestos: Asbestos-containing material which can be crumbled to dust, when dry, 

under hand pressure. 

H. HEPA Filter: A High Efficiency Particulate Air filter capable of trapping and retaining 

99.97 percent of mono-dispersed particles 0.3 micrometers or greater in diameter. 

I. HEPA Vacuum Equipment: Vacuuming equipment that utilizes a High Efficiency 

Particulate Air (HEPA) filter. 

J. Holding Area: A secure area used for the storage of double-bagged asbestos-containing 

material before removal from the site to an approved disposal site. 

K. Post-Removal Encapsulation: A liquid material which is applied to surfaces from which 

asbestos-containing material has been removed to control the possible release of residual 

fibers, either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by 

penetrating into the material and binding its components (penetrating encapsulant). 

L. Surfactant: A chemical-wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing 

the quality of water required for a given operation or area. 

M. Wet-Cleaning/Wiping: The process of eliminating contamination from building surfaces, 

plasticized surfaces, and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools which have 

been dampened with water, and disposing of these cleaning tools and water as asbestos 

contaminated waste. Streaking caused by wiping down will not be acceptable. 


2.1 MATERIALS 




A. Plastic Bags: Minimum thickness 6-mil polyethylene film labeled as specified hereinafter. 

B. Tapes: Tape shall be capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for 

attaching polyethylene sheets to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and 

capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including the use of amended 

water. Silver cloth duct tape, minimum 2-inches wide, and double-faced foam tapes, by 

Nashua, 3-M, Arno, or approved equal shall be used on polyethylene sheeting, red or 

NATO orange tape, minimum 2-inches wide for exit arrows. 

C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall be capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene 

and for attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar 

materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of 

amended water, 3-M #76, #77, or approved equal. 

D. Asbestos Encapsulant: Encapsulant shall be non-flammable with a Class A fire 

classification. Encapsulant shall be odorless when dry, and compatible with materials 

applied by others (this contract). All references to application at strengths below full 

strength shall be as approved by the product manufacturer for the intended use. 

E. Warning Labels and Signs: As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR 

1926.58 and HIOSH regulation 12-145. Permanent signage for access panels and areas 

with encapsulated asbestos-containing materials shell be as specified hereinafter. Signage 

shall be approved by the Hospital. 

F. Protective Clothing: As specified hereinafter. The Contractor is cautioned that during the 

summer and fall, there is usually a tremendous shortage of coveralls due to the 

consumption of these items by mainland contractors for summer abatement projects. The 

Contractor shall have all the required sets of coveralls required for this project on island 

prior to the start of work. There will be no time extension for the unavailability of 

coveralls or related equipment. 

G. Plastic Sheeting: Minimum thickness of 6-mil polyethylene film. 

H. Other Materials: Provide all other materials, which may required to property prepare and 

complete this project. 

2.2 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. General: Provide and fabricate suitable tools for the asbestos abatement procedures. 

B. Water Sprayer: Airless or a pressure sprayer for amended water application as applicable. 

C. HEPA Vacuum: High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) vacuum. 

D. No power driven tools or equipment shall be permitted for removal of asbestos-containing 

materials. 

E. Other tools and equipment as necessary. 


3.1 WORK AREA PREPARATION 




A. Work by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor: 

1. Step 1: 

2. Step 2: 

a. The General Contractor shall remove any remaining equipment, furniture, and 

room contents within the designated work area. 

b. Posting of Caution Signs: Post caution signs in and around the work area to 

comply with 29 CFR 1910.1001 (g) (1), HIOSH regulation 12-202-13 and all other 

Federal, State and local requirements. Signs shall be posted at a distance 

sufficiently far enough away from the work area to permit a person to read the sign 

and take necessary protective measures to avoid exposure. 

c. Seal Openings: Close and lock all windows, doors and seal all vents, ducts, grilles, 

diffusers, electrical outlets, and other penetrations leading into the work area with 

two layers of 6-mil thick polyethylene plastic sheeting sealed with tape. At the 

beginning of each work day, the Contractor shall inspect and ensure that the 

window openings are closed and locked. 

d. General Barriers: Temporary barriers for corridors, doorways and cased openings 

not used for normal passage during abatement shall be sealed with 6-mil 

polyethylene plastic sheeting. Tape as required to provide airtight seal. Where 

openings will continue to be curtained doorways in the abatement work or 

personnel and security doors in the non-contaminated areas, slit panel plasticized 

doors may be used. 

e. Emergency Exit: Designate and maintain emergency and fire exits from the work 

area in accordance with local codes and regulations. In the event of a fire, 

emergency exit procedures have priority over normal work exiting procedures. 

f. Marking Exits: Maintain and mark both normal and emergency exits from the 

work area. This should include large tape or orange spray-painted arrows 

indicating the direction of egress, and markings at curtained doorways designating 

which side of the plastic sheeting to access first. One arrow marking shall be 

visible from every work location. Establish a color or designation system to 

distinguish normal exiting to the personnel decontamination unit and emergency 

existing when life safety conditions prevail. 

g. The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the integrity of the 

work area at all times. 

a. Temporary utility services are also generally specified under the Special 

Provisions. Requirements specified herein amplify on those provisions as they 

apply to the asbestos abatement operations. 

b. Temporary Electricity and Lighting: 

(1) Existing electrical service to the building may be used for temporary 

electrical power during abatement and replacement work; however, the 

electrical power to the work area will be shut down during abatement work. 




(2) The General Contractor shall verify the location(s) of available electrical 

service outside the work areas and shall tie into the existing system at a 

location approved by the Hospital. 

(3) Install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located so that 

power is available throughout the project by use of construction type power 

cords (where applicable). 

c. Temporary Water: 

(1) Existing domestic water service to the building may be used for temporary 

water during construction. Location of tie-in shall be approved by the 

Hospital. 

(2) The General Contractor shall install branch piping with taps as necessary 

throughout construction area (where applicable). 

d. Temporary Sanitation Facilities: 

(1) Existing Toilet facilities in the Building may be used by the Contractor's 

personnel during asbestos abatement work. The Contractor shall coordinate 

with the General Contractor and the Hospital for existing toilet facilities. 

(2) Maintain toilet facilities in a clean and sanitary condition in compliance 

with applicable codes and ordinances. The Contractor’s personnel shall be 

properly decontaminated prior to using these facilities. 

e. Temporary Fire Protection: 

(1) Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during the 

asbestos abatement operations. 

(2) Equipment shall be of the appropriate type to fight fires associated with the 

existing building materials and those materials used during construction 

operations. 

f. Decontamination Enclosure Systems: 

(1) General: The Abatement Contractor shall construct a three stage 

decontamination unit (system) or use portable units acceptable to the QC. 

Connect the system to the work area with framed-in or accordion-type 

tunnels, and line the tunnels with plastic sealed with tape at all joints. All 

vertical surfaces subject t to observation from the exterior non-contaminated 

areas shall be constructed of opaque materials. 

(2) Access: In all cases, access between contaminated rooms or areas shall be 

through an airlock, while access between any two rooms within the 

decontamination enclosure system shall be through a curtained doorway. 

(3) Personnel Decontamination Unit: Provide a personnel Decontamination 

enclosure system continuous to the work area consisting of three totally 

enclosed chambers as follows: 




i. An Equipment Room with two curtained doorways, one to the work area and one to 

the shower; 

ii. 

iii. 

A Shower Room with two curtained doorways, one to the Equipment Room and 

one to the Clean Room. The shower room shall contain at least one shower with 

clean water. Careful attention must be paid to the shower enclosure to insure 

against leakage of any kind. Ensure a supply of soap at all times in the shower. 

Drainage from the shower shall be disposed of as contaminated waste water or 

filtered as specified hereinafter. 

A Clean Room with one curtain doorway to the Shower Room and one 

entrance/exit doorway to non-contaminated spaces. The Clean Room shall have 

sufficient space for storage of worker’s street clothes and personal effects, towels, 

and other uncontaminated items. 

(4) Equipment Decontamination Unit: Provide an equipment decontamination 

enclosure system consisting of: 

(5) Maintenance of Decontamination Unit: At the beginning of each work shift 

and throughout abatement operations, all seals and curtained doorways shall 

be inspected and repaired immediately (if not found in proper condition). 

All areas shall be kept clean at all times. Ensure that drainage-filtering 

systems are kept clean and operational at all times. 

i. The Abatement Contractor shall maintain the Clean Room and shall repair and 

sanitize respirator equipment after each use. 

ii. 

At the end of each work shift the shower shall be thoroughly disinfected, the filter 

bag shall be returned to the Equipment Room for disposal, and the Equipment 

Room shall be thoroughly HEPA vacuumed and wet cleaned. 

(6) Worker Protection Notice: Post the following notice on the outside of the 

enclosure system. Workers and authorized personnel, in order to enter the 

work area, shall: 

i. Remove all clothing, unless it is to remain in the Equipment Room, for eventual 

disposal. 

ii. 

iii. 

iv. 

Don the appropriate respiratory protection. Follow all training procedures and 

manufacturer's instructions. Once all of the above has been completed, proceed to 

the shower. 

Don protective clothing (full body coveralls, gloves, boots, headgear etc.) after 

donning respirator. 

All workers and authorized personnel, in order to leave the work area, shall remove 

gross (visible) contamination from their persons and their equipment and brush off 

any remaining dust with a fine bristle brush. Leave the brush in the work area. 

v. Decontaminate in the decontamination unit. 




vi. 

No smoking, eating, drinking shall be allowed inside the work area or the 

decontamination enclosures. 

(7) Waste Water Filtration System: All wastewater shall be treated as 

contaminated with asbestos and shall be filtered using two in-line filter 

cartridges (Filterite Type 6CMC-1 or approved equal) with 2" inlets and 

outlets. The outlet of the first cartridge shall connect to the inlet of the 

second cartridge. The first cartridge shall contain one 100-micron pre-filter 

and the second cartridge shall contain one 0.5-micron filter (or equal staging 

according to the type of filtering unit). Filtered waste water shall be 

properly collected and disposed of in the City and County sanitary sewer 

system in accordance with current standards set by the City and County of 

Honolulu, Department of Public Works, Waste Water Management, Water 

Quality Division. Discharge of water into the city storm drain system is 

prohibited unless the proper NPDES permit is acquired. Dispose of 

contaminated filters as ACM. 

Negative Air Pressure System: Quality of Exhaust Units For the purpose 

of this section, the negative air units are assumed to draw the same flow, 

then the Qualified Consultant can calculate and determine that a minimum 

of 4 ACH(room air changes/hour) and negative (-) 0.02 inches water gauge 

are being achieved during the duration of the work. The Abatement 

Contractor shall inspect and correct deficient airtight barriers if required 

negative pressures cannot be achieved. If additional units are necessary to 

maintain the required negative pressure, shall be provided by the Abatement 

Contractor at no additional charge to State of Hawaii. The Abatement 

Contractor shall provide one spare exhaust unit of equal size and capacity as 

the largest operating unit at the job site. The Abatement Contractor shall be 

responsible for maintaining the integrity of the negative pressure within the 

work area. 

Air Openings: Provide additional make-up openings as necessary to 

effectively move air through the work area and to avoid creating too high of 

a pressure differential that would damage or cause "blow-in" of temporary 

barriers and plastic coverings. Provide inlets by making openings in the 

plastic sheeting near the ceiling and as far back as possible from the exhaust 

units. Seal openings whenever the pressure differential drops below the 

required minimum. 

Filter Replacement: Change filters in exhaust units in accordance with the 

manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with EPA Guidance For 

Controlling Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, Appendix J, 

paragraph J.3.2.2.1 or when there is an obvious loss of negative pressure. 

Provide replacement filters in accordance with the manufacturer's 

instructions and paragraphs J.2.1.2.2 of the above referenced document. 

System Dismantling: When clearance has been approved by the Qualified 

Consultant, remove and dispose of pre-filters and shut off the exhaust units. 

If the exhaust units are to be used in another work area, leave the final 

HEPA filter in place and seal all intake openings to the unit to prevent 

contamination due to asbestos fibers collected in the final filter, wet-wipe all 

exposed surfaces, seal the unit completely in plastic sheeting and move the 




machine as required. Decontaminate machines as specified for equipment 

cleaning. 

COMMUNICATIONS: Provide a communications system suitable for 

inside or outside in order to monitor all activities within the work area and 

to readily transfer messages from one location to another. 

3. AFTER STEP 2 IS COMPLETED, NOTIFY THE HOSPITAL AND GET ITS 

APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH REMOVAL WORK AS SPECIFIED 

HEREINAFTER. 

Commencement of work shall not start until: 

a. Pre-abatement submissions, notifications, postings and permits have been provided 

and are satisfactory to the Hospital. 

b. All equipment for abatement, clean-up and disposal are on hand. 

c. All worker training, certification, and medication documentation are completed and 

have been approved by the Hospital. 

d. Contractor receives written permission from the Hospital to commence site activities. 

3.2 ASBESTOS FIBER CONCENTRATIONS IN THE WORK AREA 

The maximum permissible exposure limits (PELs) to airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers 

within the prepared (plasticized) work area when under respiratory protection shall be in 

accordance with Hawaii OSHA, Rule 12-202-13(b). The QC shall stop the work whenever these 

limits are exceeded. The Contractor shall remedy the condition. The QC shall certify that the 

work area conditions are acceptable prior to commencing the work. The expenses resulting from 

the delays shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall not be paid by the Hospital. 

3.3 REMOVAL PROCEDURES 

A. Workers performing removal work shall don personnel protection specified in this Section. 

B. All existing surfaces shall be protected from amended water and encapsulants. Surfactants 

will cause oxidation and blistering. 

C. Work Area Preparations: Post proper caution and warning signs and erect barriers around 

the building. 

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to field verify the locations, access, thickness, 

extend of effort and satisfy himself as to the total work and/or effort to complete the work. 

No additional payment will be considered by the Hospital for any changes to actual site 

conditions. Refer to Notice to Contractor Section for the date and time that Contractors 

may investigate the existing field conditions. 

E. The asbestos-containing flooring shall be sprayed with amended water containing a wetting 

agent (surfactant) to reduce fiber releases preceding the disturbance of the asbestoscontaining 

material. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet it to the substrate without 

causing excessive dripping or delamination of the material. Spray the asbestos-containing 

material repeatedly during removal to maintain a wet condition and to minimize asbestos 




fiber dispersion. Before beginning the next section, the material shall be packed while still 

moist into sealable double plastic bags, sealed airtight. The work area shall be cleaned at 

the end of each day or work shift and waste materials packed while still moist into the 

plastic bags. Bags shall not be overfilled. They shall be sealed to prevent accidental 

opening and leakage by tying tops of bags in an overhand knot or by taping in a gooseneck 

fashion. Do not seal with wire or cord. Bags shall be transported from the work area to the 

vehicle, used for transporting waste to the disposal site, by methods to ensure that the bags 

do not tear or open. At no time shall bags be permitted to be dropped or thrown. 

F. The asbestos-containing sink undercoating shall be sprayed with amended water containing 

a wetting agent (surfactant) to reduce fiber releases preceding the disturbance of the 

asbestos-containing material. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet it to the substrate 

without causing excessive dripping or delamination of the material. Spray the asbestoscontaining 

material repeatedly during removal to maintain a wet condition and to minimize 

asbestos fiber dispersion. Dismantle plumbing prior to demolition of casework. Packed the 

material while still moist into sealable double plastic bags, sealed airtight. The work area 

shall be cleaned at the end of each day or work shift. Bags shall not be overfilled. They 

shall be sealed to prevent accidental opening and leakage by tying tops of bags in an 

overhand knot or by taping in a gooseneck fashion. Do not seal with wire or cord. Bags 

shall be transported from the work area to the vehicle, used for transporting waste to the 

disposal site, by methods to ensure that the bags do not tear or open. At no time shall bags 

be permitted to be dropped or thrown. 

3.4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL AND ASBESTOS 

CONTAMINATED WASTE (SOLID AND/OR LIQUID) 

A. As the work progresses and waste is generated, the Contractor shall legally transport to the 

authorized disposal site(s) all waste generated daily unless specifically approved by the 

Hospital or Hospital's representative to delay a disposal operation as specified for waste 

container storage below. The Contractor shall pre-schedule and obtain the approval of the 

Hospital or Hospital's representative prior to removing the waste from the work area(s). 

Transport all waste to the pre-designated disposal site(s) in accordance with EPA regulation 

40 CFR 61.152, Department of Transportation regulations 49 CFR parts 171 and 172, 

HIOSH regulation 12-145-10 and local regulations. The Contractor shall keep abreast of 

all changes to transportation regulations and fully comply with them. The Hospital’s 

Hazardous Waste representative shall provide the required information needed to properly 

complete the waste manifest. The Contractor shall coordinate hazardous waste disposal 

with the Hospital’s representative. The Contractor shall prepare the required waste 

documentation and submit for verification prior to transportation off the project site and 

subsequent disposal. No waste shall leave the site prior to the Hospital’s approval. 

B. Sealed waste bags may be temporarily stored in a pre-designated outside area, (i.e. a locked 

container or dumpster) until a truckload quantity is obtained when approved by the Hospital 

or Hospital's representative. The storage area shall be prominently identified and posted 

with signs. Waste containers shall be lined with polyethylene sheets. 

C. Workers from non-contaminated areas, in full protective clothing and cartridge respirators 

shall move the bagged material from the storage area into the truck. Ensure that all 

containers are sealed properly before removing for transport and disposal. Bags and 

containers shall be marked with OSHA labels prescribed by the Hawaii OSHA regulations 

referenced in these specifications. Label shall state, "DANGER - CONTAINS ASBESTOS 

FIBERS -AVOID CREATING DUST - CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD." 

Additionally, label bags in accordance with OSHA requirement 29 CFR 1910.1001, 




HIOSH regulation 12-145-8 or EPA regulation 40 CFR 61.150 if more restrictive. The 

outside of all containers shall be clean before leaving the work area. For ACM waste 

material to be transported off the facility site, label containers or wrapped waste materials 

with name of waste generator and location at which the waste was generated. 

D. A label with the name of the waste generator and location from which the waste was 

generated shall be clearly indicated on the outside of the bags in accordance with the 

November 20, 1990 NESHAP Revision, Final Rule, Waste Disposal Section describing 

marking, labeling and offsite disposal requirements. Shipment records shall be maintained 

using forms described in this latest NESHAP Revision. 

E. Vehicles used for transporting waste to the disposal sites shall have a completely enclosed, 

lockable storage compartment. Storage compartments shall be plasticized and sealed with a 

minimum of one layer of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting on the sides and top and two layers of 

6-mil polyethylene sheeting on the floor (bed). If allowed by HIOSH, waste materials, 

except those with sharp edges (metal edging, screws, nails, broken tile with sharp edges 

etc.), properly double bagged may be transported to the disposal site without being placed 

in drums if the transporting vehicle is prepared as specified above in addition to any more 

stringent requirements by HIOSH. The compartment shall be thoroughly wet-cleaned 

and/or HEPA vacuumed following the disposal of each load at the disposal sites at an 

approved location with electrical power as required. At the conclusion of the asbestos 

abatement, or before transport vehicles are used for other purposes, the polyethylene 

sheeting shall be properly removed and disposed of as contaminated waste. After this has 

been accomplished, compartments shall once again be wet-cleaned and HEPA vacuumed in 

order to eliminate all debris. 

F. Workers unloading drums or bags at the disposal sites shall be dressed in full-body 

protective clothing and cartridge respirators. 

G. Waste disposal manifest forms shall be properly completed to assure custody and disposal 

of all ACM and asbestos-contaminated waste at approved disposal sites. Forms shall be 

kept on file as directed by the Hospital with copies submitted to the Hospital the next 

working day after each trip. 

NOTE: IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE THAT ANY 

LANDFILL USED FOR DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING OR ASBESTOS 

CONTAMINATED WASTE IS APPROVED FOR THAT PURPOSE. 

H. Bags must be placed in the hole for burial. Dumping of bags from the containers will not 

be allowed. However, if a bag is torn and if acceptable by the landfill, the entire container 

may be buried or the tear shall immediately be mended with duct tape and the bag placed 

into another bag and sealed. 

I. Liquid waste for disposal into the sanitary sewer system shall be filtered as specified herein 

before for waste water filtering system. 

J. If, at any time, the QC decides that work practices are violating pertinent regulations, or 

endangering workers, or contaminating the environment, he/she will immediately notify the 

Contractor and corrective action must be taken immediately. 

K. The Contractor shall pay all waste disposal charges including special handling fees which 

amount shall be included in the bid proposal and no reimbursement of these charges will be 




3.5 FINAL CLEANUP 

made to the Hospital. The Contractor shall make a 24-hour advance notice of all deliveries 

to the landfill. Delivery time shall be as directed by the landfill operator. 

A. Remove all visible accumulation of ACM and debris by HEPA vacuums, sponging, wetwiping, 

etc. The work area shall be totally visibly clean. The Contractor, in the presence 

of the QC, shall make a complete visual inspection of the work area to ensure dust free 

conditions. 

B. Post-removal encapsulation of the affected areas where abatement and final cleaning has 

taken place shall begin as specified hereinafter when approved by the QC. 

C. Remove signage required by the asbestos removal and encapsulation work. Signage 

applicable to job site safety and the performance of the remaining portions of the work shall 

remain as applicable. 

D. Completely remove all temporary materials when their use is no longer required. Clean 

and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. Restore 

existing facilities to their original condition as approved by the Hospital. 

3.6 EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHING CLEANING 

All contaminated equipment and tools used for removal work shall be washed and cleaned in the 

work area prior to removing them from the work areas. No washing of contaminated equipment 

and tools will be allowed outside the work area. 

3.7 AIR MONITORING AND TESTING 

The General Contractor shall hire an independent qualified consultant (QC) to oversee and 

conduct air monitoring during the duration of this project. See Specification Section 028101 - 

TESTING AND AIR MONITORING for duties, responsibilities, and qualifications. 

3.8 ADDITIONAL CHARGES FOR AIR MONITORING/TESTING BEYOND CONTRACT TIME 

The Contractor shall be responsible for the direct reimbursement to the Hospital of any additional 

air-monitoring charges required by the Contractor's not completing the work in the specified 

contract period. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the reimbursement of additional fees 

incurred for additional clearance samples when re-sampling is required. 





SECTION 028416 – HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBS 

AND MERCURY 


1.1 SUMMARY 



A. This section describes work for the removal and disposal of fluorescent light ballasts with 

polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), mercury-containing fluorescent lamps, and selfilluminating 

exit signs (SIES) from Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell Wing, Kahuku, 

Oahu, Hawaii. Light fixtures that are to be removed for disposal shall be inspected by the 

Contractor for the presence of suspect-PCB ballasts and mercury-containing light tubes. 

Ballasts without the “No-PCB’s” labeling shall be assumed to contain PCBs. PCB ballasts 

shall be properly removed, packaged and disposed of in accordance with current Federal, 

State, and local regulatory requirements. All fluorescent lamps should be removed and 

properly packaged prior to re-use or transport to a EPA-approved recycling facility which 

accepts such waste. SEIS shall be removed and properly packaged and disposed at a 

approved waste disposal facility. All pertinent information regarding the removal and 

disposal shall be submitted to the Hospital no later than 120 days from that start of site 

work. The work shall include removal of all PCB ballasts, mercury-containing light tubes, 

and self-illuminating exit signs within the work area as specified herein and as identified in 

the Bureau Veritas report attached to Section 028100 - EXISTING CONDITIONS - 

ASBESTOS / LEAD / HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY. 

B. In performing the removal and disposal of fluorescent light fixtures, lamps, and SIES, all 

possible safeguards, precautions and protective measures should be utilized to prevent 

exposure of any individual to PCB, mercury, and radiation. 

C. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to carry out the safe handling, 

removal, and disposal of generated waste. Work for this project shall be performed in 

accordance with applicable laws and regulations. 

D. The Contractor is responsible for verifying quantities and location of said materials that 

will be removed for this project. 

E. The Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any on-site work unless the General 

Contractor Hired Qualified Consultant (QC) is present. The Contractor shall give no less 

than a 10-working day written notice by facsimile to the Hospital and the QC of the date 

and time of the start of work. 


A. Pre-Project Submittal: Submit the required copies of the Pre-Project Submittals to the 

Hospital for approval, at least 10-working days after the written notice to proceed is 

received by the Contractor or unless authorized otherwise by the Hospital. No work shall 

commence until the pre-project submittal is approved by the Hospital. The submittal shall 

include the following: 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 028416-1 HANDLING OF LIGHTING 

BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBS AND MERCURY

1. Documentation for Instruction: Each worker and supervisor shall submit current and 

vailid Hazardous Materials Emergency Response Training (HAZWOPER) training 

certificates applicable for handling PCBs and mercury-containing materials. 

2. PCB, Mercury, and SIES Removal Plan: The Contractor shall submit to the Hospital 

a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in the removal and 

disposal of PCB, mercury-containing materials, and SIES. The plan shall also 

include interface of trades, sequencing of related work, material disposal plan, 

protective equipment, respirators, on-site storage and a detailed description of the 

method to be employed in order to control pollution. The plan shall be approved 

prior to the start of site work. 

a. Identification of PCB, mercury, and SIES waste associated with the work. 

b. Estimated quantities of waste to be generated and disposed. 

c. Names and qualifications of each Contractor that will be transporting, storing, 

treating, and disposing of the waste. Include the facilitiy location and a 24- 

hour point of contact. Furnish two copies of EPA, State, and local PCB waste 

permit applications, permits, and EPA hazardous waste generator Identification 

numbers (as applicable). 

d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who will be 

working on-site conducting the removal, packaging and disposal work. 

e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to include 

cleaning and transport equipment. 

f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures shall be 

detailed in the plan. 

g. Work plan and schedule for PCB and mercury waste containment, storage, 

removal and disposal. Waste shall be containerized and inventoried daily. 

3. Notification: Notify the Hospital at least 10-working days prior to the start of the 

removal work. 

4. Transporter Certification: Submit certification of notification to EPA of the 

Transporter’s waste activities and EPA Identification numbers. 

5. Permits: Submit copies of all permits and arrangements for transportation and 

disposal of generated waste materials. 

6. Protective Clothing: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature on all protective 

clothing and one sample of each item which will be returned to the Contractor. 

B. Post-Project Submittals: 

1. Entry Log: Maintain a log of all personnel other than the Contractor's employees and 

agents who enter the work area while PCB, mercury, and SIES operations are in 

progress. The log shall contain the following information as a minimum and certified 

copies shall be submitted to the Hospital weekly: 

a. Date of visit 





b. Visitor's name, employer, business address and telephone number 

c. Time of entry and exit from work area 

d. Purpose of visit 

e. Type of protective clothing 

f. Certificate of release signed by the Contractor's workers and visitors 

2. Waste Disposal Manifest Forms: Submit copies of all transport manifests, trip tickets 

and disposal receipts for all waste materials removed from the work area during the 

removal process. The Contractor shall submit interim waste documentation when the 

waste is inspected by the QC and Hospital and received by the waste transporter for 

delivery. Following transport to the approved waste disposal site, the Contractor 

shall submit the final and completed waste documentation signed by all responsible 

parties (i.e. Hospital and QC). 

3. Emergency Planning Procedures: Emergency planning shall be developed prior to 

the start of the work and agreed to by the Contractor and the Hospital. 

a. Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted adjacent to 

the Worker Protection Notices specified hereinafter. Everyone prior to entering 

the work area must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge receipt of 

emergency exits and emergency procedures. 

b. Emergency planning shall include considerations of fire, explosion, toxic 

atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips, trips and falls, and heat related injury. 

Written procedures shall be developed and employee training procedures shall be 

provided. 

A. Site Security: The work area is to be restricted only to authorized, trained, and protected 

personnel. These may include the Contractor's employees, employees of sub-contractors, 

Hospital, State and local inspectors and any other designated individuals. A list of 

authorized personnel shall be established prior to the start of work. 

1. Entry to the work area by unauthorized individuals shall not be permitted without the 

approval of the Hospital and any such entry shall be reported immediately to the 

Hospital by the Contractor. 

2. A Visitor Log shall be maintained. 

3. Food, drink, and smoking shall not be permitted in areas where PCB, mercury, and 

SIES are handled or where items are stored. 

B. Site Protection and Safety: As a minimum, follow the requirements of EPA, HIOSH (State 

of Hawaii), OSHA and NIOSH. 

C. Safeguarding of Property: The Contractor shall take whatever steps necessary to safeguard 

their work and the property of the Hospital and individuals in the vicinity of their work area 




during the execution of this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make 

good on any and all damages by employee negligence. 


A. Training Certificates: Within one year prior to assignment to acitivities involving PCB and 

mercury work, each employee shall be instructed by a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) 

or equivalent safety specialist of the hazards of PCB, mercury, and SIES, safety and health 

precautions, the use and requirements for protective clothing, equipment, their respirators, 

and the additional requirements 40 CFR 761. The training should include engineering and 

other hazard control techniques and procedures. Submit certificates signed and dated by 

the CIH or equivalent safety specialist, indicating that the employee has received training. 

B. Hired Qualified Consultant: A Qualified Consultant (QC) shall be retained by the General 

Contractor to oversee activities during the removal, handling, packaging, and disposal of 

PCB-containing material, mercury-containing materials, and SIES, the QC shall be onsite 

to inspect the removal work to ensure that the requirements of the contract have been 

performed in accordance with the project specifications. 


A. Furnish employee certification, within 10 consecutive calendar days from award, that the 

employees have had instructions on the hazards associated with of PCBs, mercury, and 

radiation exposure to include respirator use and decontamination procedures. 

B. The Contractor shall examine and have at all times in their possession at their office (one 

copy) and in view at each jobsite office (one copy) a current issue of the following 

publications: 

1. Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 761, Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) 

Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution In Commerce, and Use Prohibitions, U.S. 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 

2. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 171, General Information, Regulations, 

and Definitions 

3. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 172, Hazardous Materials, Tables, and 

Hazardous Materials Communications Regulations. 

4. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 173, Shipments and Packagings. 

5. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 176, Carriage by Vessel 

6. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 177, Carriage by Public Highway. 

7. Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 178 Shipping Container Specification 

8. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910.145 Specifications for Accident 

Prevention, Signs and Tags, Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

(OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor 

9. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section 1910.1000, Air Contaminants. 




C. The Contractor shall comply with the above requirements and any applicable Federal, 

State, and local regulations. Where conflict or any inconsistency among requirements or 

with this specification exists, the more stringent requirements shall apply. Ignorance of the 

above requirements and any applicable Federal, State and local regulations resulting in 

additional cost to the Contractor shall not be paid by the Hospital. 

D. All regulations shall govern over these specifications, except where a more stringent 

specification or a specification providing greater protection against PCB, mercury, and 

radiation exposure, injury, loss or liability. Any question regarding conflict or 

inconsistency between specification and/or regulations should immediately be directed to 

the Hospital. 

WHENEVER APPROVAL OF THE HOSPITAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO 

PROCEEDING WITH OTHER WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH 

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: 

1. The Contractor shall allow the Hospital and the QC 24-hours from notification to 

respond to the request for inspection. 

2. The Contractor shall designate one person (either a foreman or superintendent) who 

will be authorized to request for inspections. The name of the designated person 

shall be submitted in writing to the Hospital prior to commencing with the work. 

Request from any other person will not be considered an official request. 

3. The designated person when requesting for inspection shall provide the following 

information: 

a. Name of caller 

b. Building and rooms to be inspected 

c. Work phase of inspection, as specified 

E. At the completion of the removal work, the following documents shall be provided to the 

Hospital for their records: 

1.7 EQUIPMENT 

1. Visitor's log showing all persons entering the site. 

2. Certification of the training of the Contractor's employees. 

3. All PCB, mercury, and radiation disposal form(s) and manifests. 

A. Furnish the Hospital and the QC with two complete sets of personal protective equipment 

daily, as required herein, for entry to and inspection in the control area. The personal 

protective equipment shall include disposable protective whole body covering. The 

personal protective equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor. Any proper 

Respiratory protection and qualifications shall be the responsibility of the Hospital 

representative and the QC. 

1. Respirators: Select respirators approved by the National Institute for Occupational 

Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human Services, for use in 




atmospheres containing PCB and mercury material. Respirators shall comply with 

the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. 

2. Protective Clothing: Furnish personnel exposed to PCB, mercury, and SIES material 

with fire-retardant, disposable protective whole body clothing, head covering, gloves, 

and foot coverings. Furnish disposable plastic or rubber gloves and footwear to 

protect hands and feet respectively. Reduce the level of protection only after 

approval from the QC. 

3. Warning Signs and Labels: Provide warning signs at approaches to the PCB, 

mercury, and SIES control areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may 

read the sign and take the necessary precautions before entering the area. Provide 

and affix labels to impermeable bags, PCB, mercury, and SIES waste drums, and 

other containers containing PCB, mercury, and SIES, scrap, waste, or debris. The 

labels shall be of sufficient size to be clearly legible, and display the following: 

“CAUTION: Contains PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyls)” or “CAUTION: Contains 

Mercury” or “CAUTION: Radiation. Signs and labels shall comply with the 

requirements of 29 CFR 1910.145. and 40 CFR 761, Subpart C. 

B. PERSONNEL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Workers shall wear and use PPE during 

PCB and Mercury removal. Workers' personnel protection equipment, as required by 

OSHA regulations, shall consist of but not limited to the following. 

1. Disposal coveralls 

2. Disposable rubber gloves 

3. Disposal foot covers (polyethylene) 

4. Chemical Safety Goggles 

C. PCB, MERCURY, SIES SPILL KIT: Assemble a spill kit to include several pairs of the 

following items: 

1. Disposable polyethylene gloves 

2. Disposable Coveralls 

3. Chemical Safety Goggles 

4. Disposable polyethylene foot covers 

5. PCB Caution Sign: "PCB Spill-Authorized Personnel Only" and Mercury Caution 

Sign: "Mercury Spill-Authorized Personnel Only" 

6. 100-foot caution tape 

7. Absorbent material 

8. Polyethylene waste bags 

9. Cloth backed tape 

10. Rags 





11. Paper and writing equipment 

12. Waste containers 

A. Abatement: Procedure to control material release from PCB-containing, mercurycontaining 

materials, and self-illuminating exit signs (SIES) removal. 

B. Authorized Visitor: The Hospital, and the QC or a representative of any regulatory or other 

agency having jurisdiction over the project. 

C. Leak: Leak means any instance in which the PCB or mercury article, container or 

equipment has any PCB or mercury on any portion of its external surface or in the case of 

mercury-containing lamps where fumes or vapors are released when broken. 

D. Mercury: Mercury as used in this specification shall mean the same as mercury, mercury 

article, mercury article container, mercury equipment, mercury-containing, mercury Item, 

or mercury containing Lamp. 

E. Polychlorinated Biphenyl: PCB as used in this specification shall mean the same as PCB, 

PCB Article, PCB article container, PCB equipment, PCB item, PCB-contaminated 

equipment, as defined in 40 CFR 761, Section 3, Definitions. 

F. PEL: OSHA has in place two 8-hour time-weighted averages (TWA) for chlorodiphenyl: 

1. For chlorodiphenyl with 42 percent chlorine TWA = 1 milligram per cubic meter of 

air. 

2. For chlorodiphenyl with 54 percent chlorine TWA = 0.5 milligram per cubic meter of 

air. 

G. Removal: All herein specified procedures necessary to remove PCB and mrcury materials 

at an approved site in an acceptable manner. 

H. Spill: Spill means a uncontrolled release which results in any quantity of PCB or mercury 

running off/out or about to run off the external surface of the equipment or material, as well 

as the contamination resulting for those releases. 

I. Holding Area: A secure area used for the storage of PCB and mercury containing material 

before removal from the project site to an approved disposal site. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 


3.1 PCB, MERCURY, AND SIES CONTROL AREA 

Establish a PCB, mercury, and SIES control area by roping off the area to prevent unauthorized 

entry of personnel. No one will be permitted in the PCB, mercury, and SIES control area unless 

the person is provided with appropriate training and protective equipment. Food, drink and 

smoking materials is prohibited in the designated control area. 




3.2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 

Workers shall wear and use personal protective equipment upon entering the work area. Footwear 

and disposable rubber gloves shall be worn at all times during the removal process. 

3.3 SPECIAL HAZARDS 

A. PCB, mercury, and SIES shall not be exposed to open flames or other high temperature 

sources since toxic decomposition by-products may be produced. 

B. PCB, mercury, and SIES shall not be heated to temperatures of 55C (135F) or higher. 

C. Avoid breaking mercury-containing lamps and SIES. Vapors/fumes are hazardous. 

Package lamps to avoid breakage during shipping to mainland disposal/recycling site. 

3.4 WORK PROCEDURE 

A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to carry out the safe and complete 

removal of PCB, mercury containing material, and SIES located at the site as indicated or 

specified in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. The PCB, mercury, and 

SIES work shall generally include the removal of suspect-PCB ballasts, mercury containing 

light tubes from fluorescent light fixtures, and self-illuminating exit signs. 

B. Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as specified herein. Eating, 

smoking, or drinking shall not be permitted in the PCB and mercury control area. No one 

will be permitted in the PCB and mercury control area unless the person is provided with 

appropriate training and protective equipment. Package and mark PCB and mercury 

materials as required by EPA and DOT regulations and dispose of in accordance with EPA, 

DOT, and local regulations at a permitted site. 

1. PCB, Mercury, and SIES Control Area Requirements: During the PCB, mercury, and 

SIES removal operation, should the employees need to exit the controlled area, they 

will be required to remove their disposable coveralls, place them in an approved 

impermeable disposal bag, and then exit the area. The Contractor is solely responsible 

for complying with any and all regulations concerning his employees' safety and 

health. The PEL for PCB shall not be exceeded at any time. 

2. Inspection: Inspection and reporting shall be performed by the QC. 

3. Inspection During PCB, Mercury, and SIES Removal Work: The QC shall perform 

daily inspections during the entire PCB and mercury removal operation. If the 

adjacent areas are contaminated, the contaminated areas shall be cleaned, ventilated 

and visually inspected. Only when the area is deemed essentially free of PCB and 

mercury-containing waste materials, will unprotected persons be allowed into the area. 

3.5 WORK OPERATIONS 

Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB, mercury or PCB-contaminated 

materials, and SIES are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR 761 and the applicable 

requirements of this section including but not limited to: 

1. Obtaining advance approval of PCB, mercury, and SIES storage sites. 

2. Notifying the Hospital and QC prior to commencing the operation. 




3. Reporting leaks and spills to the Hospital. 

4. Cleaning up spill 

5. Maintaining an access log of employees working in a PCB, mercury, and SIES control area 

and providing a copy to the Hospital upon completion of the operation. 

6. Inspection of PCB, mercury and PCB-contaminated items and waste containers for leaks 

and forwarding copies of inspection reports to the Hospital. 

7. Maintaining a spill kit as specified in paragraph entitled "PCB, Mercury, and SIES Spill 

Kit." 

8. Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill and testing records. 

3.6 PCB, MERCURY, AND SIES REMOVAL PROCEDURE/PROCESS 

Select PCB, mercury, and SIES removal procedure to minimize contamination of work areas with 

PCB, mercury or other PCB-contaminated debris/waste. Handle PCB and mercury such that no 

skin contact occurs. PCB and mercury removal process should be described in the work plan. 

1. Removal of PCB-Containing Lighting ballast, Mercury-Containing Lamps, and Selfilluminating 

Exit Signs: 

a. Signs shall be posted at a distance sufficiently far enough away from the work area to 

permit a person to read the sign and take the necessary protective measures to avoid 

exposure. 

b. All light fixtures shall be deenergized prior to the light fixture removal. 

c. Workers shall wear rubber gloves, safety glasses, and other necessary personnel 

protective equipment at all times during the fluorescent light fixture removal process. 

d. Remove mercury-containing lamps and package and dispose as specified in this 

section. Avoid breaking the lamps. 

e. Remove fluorescent light fixtures from ceiling and place into the PCB and mercury 

control area. Inspect the ballast in the light fixrture to determine if a “No-PCBs” 

label is shown. If no label is observed, the ballast shall be assumed to contain PCBs. 

If the light fixture ballast is leaking and it is not possible or feasible to clean the light 

fixture, dispose of entire fixture as PCB-contaminated. 

f. If the fluorescent light fixture ballast is leaking oil, avoid ingestion, contact with skin, 

and inhalation and follow the procedures for PCB clean-up procedures (3.11). If the 

light fixture ballast is not leaking, remove from fixture and place into approved waste 

container (lined 55-gallon drum) for disposal. 

g. Dispose of all PCB-containing and contaminated material as specified in this section. 

3.7 SOLVENT CLEANING 

Cleaning of tools or equipment: Cleaning of contaminated tools or equipment shall be wiped or 

rinsed down with a solvent wetted rag. 




3.8 PCB, MERCURY, AND SIES SPILL CLEANUP REQUIREMENTS 

A. PCB, Mercury, and SIES Spills: The Contractor shall immediately report any PCB and 

mercury spills or leaks. 

B. PCB, Mercury, and SIES Spill Control Area: Rope of the area around the PCB and/or 

mercury spill or leak area and post a "PCB Spill Authorized Personnel Only" and/or 

“Mercury Spill Authorized Personnel Only” caution sign. Immediately transfer leaking 

items to a drip pan or other container. 

C. Mercury Spill Cleanup: The mercury cleanup shall begin immediately after its discovery, 

and after vapors are no longer visible (for mercury-containing lamp breaks). The personnel 

shall wear personal protective equipment specified in the specifications. The spill area 

shall be mopped up or cleaned up with absorbent material in the PCB. The material used to 

clean up the mercury material shall be properly contained and disposed of as solid mercury 

waste. 

D. PCB Spill Cleanup: The PCB cleanup will be performed in accordance with the disposal 

requirements and procedures outlined in 40 CFR 761, Subpart G. Clean-up procedures 

shall begin immediately but no later than 48-hours after its discovery. The spill will be 

mopped or cleaned with absorbent material from the PCB spill kit. The material used to 

clean up the PCB material shall be properly contained and disposed of solid PCB waste. 

E. Record Keeping and Certification: Document cleanup procedures in accordance to 40 CFR 

761, Section 125, Requirement for PCB Spill Cleanup. Provide certification of cleanups to 

include decontamination proceedures. 

F. Sampling Requirements: Perform post cleanup sampling as required by 40 CFR 761, 

Section 130, Sampling Requirements. Do not remove boundaries of the PCB and mercury 

control area until site is determined clean by the QC. 

3.9 STORAGE FOR DISPOSAL 

A. Storage Container for PCB and Mercury: The Contractor shall comply with requirements 

and procedures outlined in 40 CFR 178. Store liquid PCB in containers that are EPA and 

Department of Transportation (DOT)-approved. Store non-liquid PCB materials or 

equipment in DOT-approved containers. 

B. Waste Containers, Waste Articles and PCB-Contaminated Items: Label with the following: 

1. "Solid (or liquid) Waste Polychlorinated Biphenyls" and “Mercury Containing 

Lamps” as applicable. 

2. The PCB or Mercury Caution Label, paragraph entitled "PCB and Mercury Caution 

Label" 

3. The date the items were placed in storage and the name of the cognizant 

activity/building. 

3.10 APPROVAL OF TEMPORARY STORAGE SITE 

A. Obtain the Hospital approval to store the PCB and mercury materials and containers (where 

applicable). 




B. The following criteria will be followed to select a storage site: 

1. Adequate roof and walls to prevent rainwater from reaching the stored PCB or 

mercury. 

2. Floors constructed of smooth and impervious material to prevent or minimize 

penetrations of PCB or mercury. 

3. No drain valve, floor drains, expansion joints, sewer lines or other openings that 

would permit liquids to flow from the controlled area. 

C. Temporary onsite storage shall not exceed 90 days from start of removal work. 

3.11 CLEANUP 

Cleanup: Clean surfaces within the PCB, mercury, and SIES control area daily. Do not allow 

PCB or mercury material, debris and dust to accumulate. Restrict the spread of dust, debris, 

vapors and fumes; keep waste from being distributed over the general area. Do not remove the 

PCB and mercury control area or roped-off perimeter and warning signs prior to the the Hospital's 

receipt of the QC certification. The QC will visually inspect the affected surfaces for residual 

PCB and mercury material and accumulated dust before the removal of the PCB and mercury 

controlled area. The Contractor shall re-clean areas showing dust or residual PCB or mercury 

material. 

3.12 DISPOSAL OF PCB, MERCURY, AND SIES MATERIALS 

PCB and mercury disposal shall comply with requirements and procedures outlined in 40 CFR 

761. LOCAL WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES DO NOT ACCEPT PCB, MERCURY, AND 

RADIOACTIVE WASTE. Before transporting the PCB, mercury, and SIES waste, the 

Contractor shall submit the following to the QC: 

1. The site specific EPA Generator I.D. number, disposal manifest and receipts showing 

acceptance of the material by the approved waste disposal or recycling site. 

2. The Contractor shall submit transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB 

and mercury waste activities. 

3. The Contractor shall coordinate hazardous waste disposal with the Hospital’s 

representative. The Contractor shall prepare the required waste documentation and submit 

for review prior to transportation off the project site and subsequent disposal. 

3.13 CERTIFICATE OF DISPOSAL 

Certificate of disposal shall be submitted to the Hospital and the QC within 30 days of the date 

that the disposal of the PCB and mercury waste identified on the manifest was completed. 

Certificate for the PCB, mercury and PCB items disposed shall include: 

1. The shipping papers shall use chain-of-custody form and include names and addresses of 

the disposal/recycling facility, the Contractor, EPA Identification, and the Landfill Operator 

and information on the type and number of waste containers. 

2. The identity of the PCB and mercury waste affected by the Certificate of Disposal 

including reference to the manifest number for the shipment. 




3. A statement certifying the fact of disposal of the identified PCB and mercury waste, 

including the date(s) of disposal, and identifying the disposal process used. 

4. A certification as defined in 40 CFR 761, Section 3. 

3.14 PAYMENT 

Payment for disposal of PCB, mercury, and SIES waste will not be made until the certificate of 

disposal has been furnished to the Hospital. 





VISITOR/WORKER ENTRY LOG 

(Sample) 

DATE 

PROJECT 

SUPT. 

ALL PERSONNEL MUST SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT EVERY TIME THEY ENTER/EXIT THE 

WORK AREA. PLEASE PRINT CLEARLY. ATTACH EMPLOYEE RELEASE FORM FOR ALL 

VISITORS. 

NAME 

EMPLOYER 

Name, *Address, *Phone 

TIME 

IN 

TIME 

OUT 

*PURPOSE 

OF VISIT 

**TYPE OF 

PPE ISSUED 

*NOT required of Contractor's employees 

** Type of PPE (Personal Protective Equipment) Issued to include list of protective clothing worn and 

type of respirator used (Type "C", half-face dual cartridge, etc. 




EMPLOYEE RELEASE FORM 

(SAMPLE) 

Project Name:______________________________________________________________ 

Employee Name:_____________________________________________________________ 

Employee Address:__________________________________________________________ 

Employee Telephone No.:____________________________________________________ 

Classification of Worker:_________________Union Card / I.D.Number:_______________ 

Have you had in the past, or present, any respiratory problems? 

Yes_________No_________ 

Have you worked in the past with PCB or Mercury type materials? 

Yes_________No_________ 

The project you will be working on involves the removal or disturbance of PCB and Mercury in the 

building. They is considered a health hazard. 

The company is supplying all necessary safety clothing and working conditions required and necessary 

for your protection from PCB and Mercury hazard. 

Are you willing and able to perform the PCB and Mercury related work with full knowledge of your 

current medical condition? 

Yes_________No_________ 

You shall be instructed at the commencement of the job on the required use of safety equipment, clothing, 

working conditions and procedures. These must be rigidly adhered to. Smoking is not permitted in the 

work areas. Disregarding of safety instructions shall result in instant dismissal. 

I acknowledge and understand the safety instructions and medical monitoring that has been given to me 

by the company at my work commencement and have answered the above questions truthfully. 

Signed________________________________________________ 

Employee 

Date____________________________ 




SECTION 031516 - TERMITE CONTROL BARRIER SYSTEM 



Furnish materials, labor, and equipment necessary to install a termite barrier system at new pipe 

penetrations. 

1.2 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS 

Coordinate installation of termite barrier system with Section 033000 CONCRETE, plumbing and 

electrical sections. 


A. SBCCI Public Safety Testing and Evaluation Services, Inc., report 9713 for Termite Control 

System used to provide protection against subterranean termites. 

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Provide a corrosion- resistant fine stainless steel mesh system complete with adhesion and 

attachment accessories across all termite entry points to the building, including, but not limited 

to: 

1. Pipe and conduit penetrations to concrete slabs. 

B. System shall be integral to concrete slabs on grade and shall be installed in coordination with 

concrete slab forming, reinforcing and finishing. 


A. Prior to the start of work, a signed certificate from the system supplier stating that the installer 

and installation mechanics are approved at the appropriate level by the system supplier. 

B. Manufacturer's material specifications, application instructions, and Material Safety Data Sheets for 

the termite barrier system materials intended to be used. 


A. Qualifications 

1. Installer: Use only an installer trained and accredited by the system supplier. 

2. Installation mechanics: The installer shall employ only workers trained and accredited, at 

the appropriate level, by the system supplier. 

B. Pre-installation Meeting: No less than one week prior to beginning installation, convene a preinstallation 

meeting at the construction site attended by the Contractor, the installer and the 

installer's crew leader, and representatives of the trades affected by this work. Review conditions 

of preparation, storage and handling, installation procedures, sequencing, protection and 

coordination with related work. 

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING 

Kahuku Medical Center, Campbell Wing AHL Project No: 6168.003/6111.006 

CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 031516 - 1 TERMITE CONTROL BARRIER 

SYSTEM

A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials to the site in original unbroken packaging and 

containers, with the original labels intact. 

B. Storage of Materials at Job Site: Store in accordance with the system supplier's 

recommendations. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

The Contractor shall warrant the installation free from defects of workmanship materials for a 

period of one year after acceptance of the installation. Upon notification of any defects, the 

Contractor shall promptly make good any such defects developed within the warranty period 

without expense to the Owner. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Asbestos Prohibition: No asbestos containing materials or equipment shall be used under this 

section. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials and equipment incorporated in the project 

are asbestos free. 

B. Barrier Mesh: Type AIAA marine grade 316 stainless steel mesh of 0.18 mm diameter wire with 

mesh openings of 0.66 x 0.45 mm. 

C. Accessories: Parging adhesives, clamps, ties, and other accessories as recommended by system 

supplier. 

2.2 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCT – TERMITE BARRIER SYSTEM 

A.. 

Products scheduled on drawings are products of TermiMeshHawaii, www.termimeshhawaii.com. 

B. Provide the Basis- Of- Design Product or an equal performing system of HDPE or a combination 

of stainless steel mesh and HDPE: 



A. Verify the condition of the site under proposed slab is proper for the installation of termite 

barrier system and that the following are complete. 

1. The ground has been cleared of wood scraps. 

2. The site has been compacted and cushion fill has been placed and compacted. 

3. Footings and foundations, and outer forms are in place. 

4. All electrical and plumbing penetrating pipes are in place. 


A. Strictly follow the manufacturer's instructions published in Builder's Installation Notes. 



SYSTEM

1. Install mesh as required, fit and clamp mesh around all pipe penetrations, and terminate at 

perimeters as appropriate for the building construction as described in Builder's Installation 

Notes. 

2. Install special fittings appropriate to construction as described in Builder's Installation 

Notes. 

B. Install mesh after vapor barrier and reinforcing steel is in place. 

C. Where required, mesh is integrated into subsequent construction as described in Builder's 

Installation Notes. 

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. In the event following trades on the site move or damage the mesh, clamps or parging mix, 

immediately contact the mesh installer, for recommendations of necessary repairs. 


A. Protect the installed mesh and attachments before, during and after the work of following trades. 




SYSTEM

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete 

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 

1. Footings. 

2. Slabs-on-grade. 


A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the 

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace 

slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when 

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances 

warrant adjustments. 

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and 

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent 

bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop 

spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

F. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating 

compliance with requirements: 

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of 

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. 

G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 

1. Cementitious materials. 

2. Admixtures. 

3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 

H. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 033000-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete 

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities 

and equipment. 

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete 

Production Facilities." 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to 

ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to 

ASTM E 548. 

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing 

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing 

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency 

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician 

- Grade II. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand 

from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain 

admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. 

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the 

Contract Documents: 

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 

material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and 

damage. 

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and 

other contaminants. 


2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, 

and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of 

joints. 

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. 

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 



C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced 

plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities 

not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall 

thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. 

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic 

concrete loads without detrimental deformation. 

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally 

sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. 

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. 

G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. 

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, 

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of 

concrete surfaces. 

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced 

plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent 

spalling of concrete on removal. 

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of 

exposed concrete surface. 

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in 

concrete surface. 

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive 

dampproofing or waterproofing. 

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 

B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, 

deformed bars, assembled with clips. 

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized. 

D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. 

E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn 

steel wire into flat sheets. 

F. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. 

G. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from 

galvanized steel wire into flat sheets. 

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES 

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to 

length with ends square and free of burrs. 



B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, 

ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated. 

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy 

coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. 

D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or 

sprayed zinc. 

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and 

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar 

supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of 

Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, 

use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar 

supports. 

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, 

and source, throughout Project: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray. 

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. 

Provide aggregates from a single source. 

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 

2.5 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with 

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those 

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing 

calcium chloride. 

2.6 WATERSTOPS 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, 

Type G. 

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for 

embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate 

corners, intersections, and directional changes. 



1. Profile: As indicated. 

2. Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick; nontapered. 

B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, 

butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to 

concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch. 

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not 

less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressuresensitive 

joint tape. 

2.8 CURING MATERIALS 

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for 

application to fresh concrete. 

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, 

weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene 

sheet. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, 

Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with 

bonding of floor covering. 

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic 

fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a 

Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. 

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene 

butadiene. 

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid 

curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of 

grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to 

hardened concrete. 

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. 

Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with 

bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of 

concrete or debris. 



2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of 

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed 

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 

B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of 

cement. 

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement 

and workability. 

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low 

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial 

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with 

a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time 

from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing 

and delivery time to 60 minutes. 

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine 

mixer. 

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but 

not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is 

released. 

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each 

additional 1 cu. yd. 

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project 

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount 

of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. 


3.1 FORMWORK 

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support 

vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, 

until structure can support such loads. 



B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, 

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as 

follows: 

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 

2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. 

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. 

Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. 

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required 

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support 

screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of 

formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely 

braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at 

inconspicuous locations. 

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and 

bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such 

items. 

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, 

and other debris just before placing concrete. 

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks 

and maintain proper alignment. 

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written 

instructions, before placing reinforcement. 

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work 

that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, 

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with 

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and 

Bridges." 

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer 

face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, 

and other conditions. 

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 



3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS 

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that 

does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less 

than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be 

damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that 

supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of 

its 28-day design compressive strength. 

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without 

loosening or disturbing shores. 

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or 

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. 

Apply new form-release agent. 

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. 

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete 

surfaces unless approved by Construction Manager. 

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to 

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 

B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

3.6 JOINTS 

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before 

placing concrete. 

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that 

would reduce bond to concrete. 

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and 

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack 

weld crossing reinforcing bars. 

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to 

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. 

Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace 

overlaps with wire. 

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 



B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at 

locations indicated or as approved by Construction Manager. 

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across 

construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through 

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset 

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder 

intersection. 

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and 

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with 

walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or 

partially hardened concrete surfaces. 

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning 

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 

one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing 

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after 

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof 

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inchwide joints into concrete when 

cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete 

develops random contraction cracks. 

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at 

slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade 

beams, and other locations, as indicated. 

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished 

concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below 

finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealants," are indicated. 

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length 

is required, lace or clip sections together. 

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 

Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side 

of joint. 

3.7 WATERSTOPS 

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations 

indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically 

fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. 

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded 

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 



B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to 

limitations of ACI 301. 

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to 

mixture. 

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no 

new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes 

of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as 

indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures 

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to 

ACI 301. 

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators 

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 

inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that 

have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time 

necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other 

embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. 

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within 

limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked 

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured 

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb 

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 

E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing 

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of 

ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool 

concrete is Contractor's option. 

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep 

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, 

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and 

patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits 

on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed 

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching 



adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly 

across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and 

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is 

small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill 

low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, 

smooth, granular texture. 

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated. 

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete 

by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface 

is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface 

defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated. 

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an 

unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed 

anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch 

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather 

protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, 

dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and 

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after 

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported 

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after 

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the 

remainder of the curing period. 

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed 

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. 

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with 

the following materials: 

a. Water. 

b. Continuous water-fog spray. 

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete 

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 



3.12 JOINT FILLING 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining 

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends 

lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less 

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using 

cover material and waterproof tape. 

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive 

floor coverings. 

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive 

penetrating liquid floor treatments. 

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining 

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with 

bonding of floor covering used on Project. 

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy 

rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and 

repair damage during curing period. 

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging 

concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound 

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with 

bonding of floor covering used on Project. 

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a 

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial 

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain 

continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until 

construction traffic has permanently ceased. 

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact 

faces of joint clean and dry. 

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed 

joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Construction 

Manager. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to 

Construction Manager's approval. 

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 

two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for 

handling and placing. 



C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, 

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, 

and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more 

than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. 

Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and 

brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar 

before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs 

secured in place with bonding agent. 

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and 

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding 

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match 

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly 

higher than surrounding surface. 

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and 

structural performance as determined by Construction Manager. 

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish 

and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test 

surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, 

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that 

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of 

width, and other objectionable conditions. 

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing 

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired 

areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair 

underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to 

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level 

surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out 

low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor 

elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to 

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level 

surface. 

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in 

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas 

with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance 

all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply 

bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original 

concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with 

adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. 

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and 

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place 

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish 

to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Construction Manager's approval, using 

epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. 



F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Construction 

Manager's approval. 


A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests 

and inspections and to submit reports. 

B. Inspections: 

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 

2. Steel reinforcement welding. 

3. Headed bolts and studs. 

4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and 

slabs. 

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to 

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or 

fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. 

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests 

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite 

sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 

Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for 

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete 

mixture. 

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature 

is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite 

sample. 

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. 

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each 

composite sample. 

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite 

sample. 

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured 

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. 

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 

28 days. 



. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of 

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured 

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures 

for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three 

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive 

strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive 

strength by more than 500 psi. 

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Construction Manager, concrete 

manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressivestrength 

tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete 

placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch 

in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and 

materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day 

tests. 

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device 

may be permitted by Construction Manager but will not be used as sole basis for 

approval or rejection of concrete. 

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete 

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other 

requirements have not been met, as directed by Construction Manager. Testing and 

inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored 

cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by 

Construction Manager. 

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to 

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not 

comply with the Contract Documents. 




SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 



A. Framing with dimension lumber. 

B. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 

C. Wood furring. 

D. Plywood backing panels. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS include the following: 

A. Section 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. 

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in 

least dimension. 

C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 

1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 

2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component 

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate 

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of 

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of 

treatment. 

B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 


A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood 

product through one source from a single manufacturer. 


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air 

circulation around stacks and under coverings. 



ROUGH CARPENTRY


2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency 

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency 

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the 

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on 

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade 

compliance issued by grading agency. 

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for 

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed 

sizes for dry lumber. 

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER 

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in 

contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated 

according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no 

arsenic or chromium. 

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical 

formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise 

adversely affect finishes. 

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use 

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board 

of Review. 

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of 

each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by 

inspection agency. 

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry. 

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING 

A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades and species indicated on the drawings according 

to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading 

agency indicated 

B. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 

C. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom 

from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, 

including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 

1. Species and Grade: As indicated. 



ROUGH CARPENTRY

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

3. Cants. 

4. Furring. 

5. Grounds. 

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 

percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: As indicated. 

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS AND SUBTOPS FOR SOLID SURFACING 

COUNTERTOPS 

A. DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not 

indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 

2.6 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified 

in this Article for material and manufacture. 

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative 

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating 

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, 

where indicated, flat washers. 

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with 

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in 

unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as 

determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and 

inspecting agency. 

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, 

Class Fe/Zn 5. 

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 



ROUGH CARPENTRY

B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated 

on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: 

1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 

2. At exposed connectors: Architectural Products Group by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 

and galvanized structural steel fabricated connections as indicated on the drawings. 

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, 90 OR Z-max coating designation. 



A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for 

attaching other construction. 

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame 

Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with 


D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, 

specialty items, and trim. 

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where 

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips 

not more than 16 inches o.c. 

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and 

as follows: 

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 

inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to 

close furred spaces. 

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at 

ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not 

inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width 

as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness. 

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with 

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with 

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or 

optimum joint arrangement. 

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated 

lumber. 



ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 

J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 

complying with the following: 

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 

2. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof 

Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. 

K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully 

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 

Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not 

countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 

L. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with 

fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 

1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. 

2. Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION 

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated 

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other 

work involved. 

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required 

for tolerance of finish work. 


A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite 

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. 

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, 

apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPAregistered 

label. 




ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 062600 - SCULPTURAL WALL SYSTEM 



A. Solid mineral 3-dimentional pre-cast sculptural panels and surface finishing materials to achieve 

a seamless wall finish. 


A. Section 092900 GYPSUM BOARD. 

B. Section 099100 PAINTING. 


A. ASTM – E84 – Test method for burning characteristics of building materials. 

B. BS476 - Fire tests on building materials and structure. Methods for determination of the fire 

resistance of non-load bearing elements of construction. 

C. ASTM C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars 

D. ASTM C-348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars. 

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Armourcoat Sculptural Wall System panels shall be tested by a qualified independent testing 

agency for the following properties according to the following test methods: 

B. Flame Spread Index = 0, Smoke Developed Index = 0: Class ‘A’ when tested according to 

ASTM E84 

C. Fire propagation and surface spread of flame: Class '0' when tested in accordance with BS 476: 

Part 6 and 7. 

D. Compressive Strength = >33Mpa when tested according to ASTM C109M. 

E. Flexural Strength = >10Mpa when tested according to ASTM C-348. 


A. Reference Section 013000 - Submittal procedures. Submit the following items: 

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product data sheet (PDS 22 - Armourcoat Sculptural 

Wall System). 

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate Sculptural designs, surface finish and locations. 

D. Samples: Submit 2 samples, 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating design profile. A separate 

sample may be required indicating surface finish: colour and texture. 

E. Qualification Data: Certificate issued by Armourcoat Surface Finishes Inc. indicating that 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 062600 - 1 SCULPTURAL WALL SYSTEM

installer has attended training class and is authorized to install Armourcoat Sculptural Panels. 

F. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, 

and exclusions of warranty. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this Section. Include list 

of at least three completed projects of similar scope with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of architects and owners. Installers must have attended Armourcoat 

training class. 

B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide only proprietary, factory-formulated materials as 

produced by Armourcoat, Ltd. specifically for applications indicated. Substitutes within the 

system are not permitted. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide finished system with the following surfaceburning 

characteristics as determined per BS 476: Part 6 and 7: Class '0'. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver materials to the construction site in their original packaging with manufacturer’s labels 

identifying manufacturer and product; color designation; lot number; and date of manufacture. 

B. Inspect materials upon delivery and immediately report to Architect damaged or defective 

materials. 

C. Store panels vertically in shipping crates until ready to be installed. Never stack panels against 

a vertical surface as there is a chance they may warp. 

D. Protect panels against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. Store 

panels in area of installation for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation. 

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install and/or finish Armourcoat Sculptural Wall systems 

when substrate or ambient air temperatures is under 45º F (7º C) or over 86º F (30ºC) and when 

the relative humidity conditions are above 70%. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, 

during and after installation completion. 

B. Finished project lighting must be installed and fully operational in desired finished 

state/orientation prior to any seam/joint finishing work. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard written warranty. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 



1. Armourcoat Surface Finishes Inc.: 4330 Production Court, Las Vegas, Nevada, 89115, 

USA. Tel: 702 644 0601. Fax: 702 644 0554. Email: HYPERLINK 

"mailto:sales@usa.armourcoat.com" sales@usa.armourcoat.com. Web: 

www.usa.armourcoat.com. 

B. Product: Armourcoat Sculptural Mineral Panel 

1. Design: Flow Wave 

C. Finish: Paint. 

D. Color: As selected by Architect. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Armourcoat Sculptural panels. Panel sizes and thickness dependent upon design. 

B. Flow Wave designs 1200mm x 600mm (70 7/8th inches x 23 5/8th). 

C. Thickness of panels from 3/5th inch – 1 ¼ inches 

D. Panels are made from a fiber reinforced mineral composite that contains a minimum of 30% 

post consumer recycled material. 

E. Armourcoat Bondplast Panel adhesive. Gypsum based adhesive glue. Must be mixed with 

gauging liquid as described below. 

F. Armourcoat R34 acrylic resin. Mix with clean water in a ratio of 1:4 to form a gauging liquid 

for mixing with the Armourcoat Bondplast. 

G. Optional Materials 

1. Armourcoat P80 

2. ArmourColor Clearseal Gloss 

H. Accessories 

1. Dry mix joint compound. 

2. 100mm Self adhesive Mesh Joint Tape. 

3. Screws: Type and length dependent on panel design and substrate construction. 



A. Verify the suitability of existing conditions before starting work. 

B. Verify that final lighting is in place and is fully operational. 

C. Do not begin work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

D. Acceptable Substrate Tolerances: Verify that substrates are true and level. Substrates shall be 

constructed to the following tolerances: 

1. ± 0.05 inches in 2 feet and ± 0.15 inches in 6 feet. 




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for substrate and surface 

preparation (see Armourcoat Substrate specification sheet SSS11) 

B. Remove hardware, electrical switch and outlet plates, lighting fixtures and other items already 

in place that are not to receive sculptural finish. 

C. After completion of work, reinstall items using workers skilled in the trades involved. 

D. Protect adjacent surfaces and items that are not to receive finish, but which cannot be removed, 

from finish work. Use masking materials that will not damage protected items and surfaces. 

E. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond including mold, mildew, oil, grease, salts, 

contamination and dirt using methods recommended by manufacturer. 


A. Install panels in accordance with Manufacturers Installation Instructions. 

B. Sand and fill all joints to create a flush and seamless surface. 

C. Apply a primer undercoat to surface and inspect the entire surface for any defects prior to the 

final decoration. Fill and sand any minor surface blemishes ready for final decoration. 

D. Apply decoration in accordance with the manufacturers recommended installation instructions. 

E. Provide finish free of unsightly defects. 

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove temporary coverings used to protect adjacent surfaces and reinstall hardware, plates, 

lighting fixtures and other items previously removed. 

B. Clean and repair adjacent surfaces and items soiled or damaged during Work of this Section. 

C. Maintain and protect completed Sculptural surfaces until time of acceptance at Substantial 

Completion. 




SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 



A. Interior frames and jambs for opaque finish. 

B. Custom plastic-laminate cabinetry. 

C. Plastic laminate countertops. 

D. Resin plastic fabrications. 


A. Section 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 

1. For wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork 

and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 

2. For plywood backup panel for support for sculptural wall system. 

B. Section 062600 SCULPTURAL WALL SYSTEM 

C. Section 064661 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL FABRICATIONS 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, 

finishing materials and processes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

1. Show details full size. 

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed 

blocking and reinforcement. 

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished 

comply with requirements. 

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project 

names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information 

specified. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork 

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 064023 - 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL 

WOODWORK

that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as 

sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility 

for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork. 

D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork 

Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and 

other requirements. 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork 

complies with requirements of grades specified. 


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork 

have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation 

areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in 

"Project Conditions" Article. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until wet work is complete. 

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress 

to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field 

measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying 

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field 

measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to 

ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related 

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be 

supported and installed as indicated. 


2.1 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH 

A. Grade: Custom. 

B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. 

2.2 CABINETRY AND COUNTERROP MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each 

type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 



WOODWORK

1. Grade: Custom 

B. Board Products: Comply with the following: 

1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue. 

C. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class 

required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction 

indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as 

required by woodwork quality standard. 

1. Basis to Design Product: Products are scheduled on the drawings. 

2. Provide the Basis- of- Design Product or, subject to compliance with requirements, other 

manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into 

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Formica Corporation. 

b. Pioneer Plastics Corp. 

c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of 

opening, self-closing. 

1. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. 

2. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch 

in diameter. 

3. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. 

4. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112]. 

5. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 

6. Typical Drawers: Heavy Duty Grade 1HD-100: Side mounted; full-extension type; zincplated 

steel ball-bearing slides. 

7. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches 

wide. 

8. Pull Out Counter: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches 



WOODWORK

wide. 

9. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

10. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch black, molded-plastic 

grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 

11. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with 

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 

2.4 UNDERCOUNTER SUPPORTS FOR LAMINATE COUNTERS 

A. Basis- of- Design Product: As scheduled on the drawings. 

1. At Contractor’s option fabricated steel supports may be as detailed on drawings. 

2.5 RESIN PLASTIC SHEET PRODUCTS 

A. Provide co-polymer resin with 40% recycled pre-consumer recycled content panels: 

B. Basis- of- Design Products: Varia Ecoresin manufactured by 3 Form. 

a. Color and Pattern: As scheduled on drawings. 

b. Provide the Basis- of- Design Product or an equal product of another manufacturer. 

C. Accessories: Support framework 

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Preservative treated dimension lumber at 

Contractor’s choice. 

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 

Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior 

walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead 

expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood 

moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation 

areas. 

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum 

extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for 

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for 

scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will 

be complete. 

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be 



WOODWORK

emoved after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check 

measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings 

before disassembling for shipment. 

C. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing 

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or 

roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts 

to remove splinters and burrs. 

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETRY 

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. 

1. Grade: Custom. 

2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

3. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying 

with the following requirements: 

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS 

b. Vertical Surfaces: VGS. 

c. Edges: VGS. 

4. Core Material: Rotary-cut closed-grain hardwood veneer or mdf veneered plywood, 

exterior glue. 



A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before 

installation. 

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and 

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade 

specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. 

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. 

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged 

finish at cuts. 

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use 

fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with 

woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 



WOODWORK

E. Interior frames and jambs for opaque finish: 

1. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum 

length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches 

long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and 

stagger in adjacent and related members. 

2. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and 

finish same as wood base if finished. 

3. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 

4. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch 

in 96 inches. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base 

cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 

F. Countertops 

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation 

from a straight line. 

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls 

with adhesive. 

3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 07900 "Joint 

Sealers." 

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual 

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform 

appearance. 

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to 

restore damaged or soiled areas. 




WOODWORK

SECTION 064661 – SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL FABRICATIONS 



A. Countertops and backsplashes and undermount integral lavatories. 

B. Threshold at floor tile termination. 


A. Section 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY: For plywood subtops under solid surface countertops. 

B. Division 22 for lavatory plumbing fittings. 

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data: For countertop materials and lavatories. 

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrications. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, 

methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base 

cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 


A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. 


2.1 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 

A. Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1. 

B. Basis-of- Design Products: As scheduled on drawings. 

1. Colors and Patterns: As scheduled on drawings. 

C. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a 

precoated finish. 

1. Profile: As scheduled on drawings. 

2.2 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Countertops: 

1. 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material 

2. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 064661 - 1 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 

FABRICATIONS

3. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes. 

Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, 

sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 

a. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. 



A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. 

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of 

countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent 

surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, 

and clean entire surface. 

1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions 

for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 



CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 064661 - 2 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 

FABRICATIONS

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING 



A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM). 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following: 

1. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of 

each structural component and assembly. 

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

B. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES. 

C. Field quality-control reports. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by 

fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install 

manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction 

testing on fireproofing. 

1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and 

construction. 

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements 

for specified performance and test methods. 

1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. 

Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than 

minimum specified in Part 2. 

2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in 

referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 078100 - 1 APPLIED FIREPROOFING

3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests 

that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing. 

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 

5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions 

for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or 

primers. 

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing 

complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, 

if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. 


2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of 

each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source. 

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 by a 

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing 

agency. 

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. 

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 

A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with 

indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar 

before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at 

place of application. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of 

the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are 

not limited to, the following manufacturers: 

a. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div. 

b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Construction Products. 

c. Isolatek International. 

d. Pyrok, Inc. 

2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based on field 

testing according to ASTM E 736. 



4. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. and as specified in the approved fire-resistance 

design, according to ASTM E 605. 

5. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to 

requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less 

than 0.375 inch. 

6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 

7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing 

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. 

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less. 

8. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial 

formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and 

are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. 

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or 

both of the following requirements: 

1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL 

or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with 

requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and 

according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 

1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose 

scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable 

of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire 

exposure. 

2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar 

items, are securely attached to substrates. 

3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other 

suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. 



B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that 

substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during 

application. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. 

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory 

condition to receive fireproofing. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and 

products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, 

topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. 

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application 

procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable 

to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings 

indicated. 

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or 

remove fireproofing. 

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items 

penetrating fireproofing are in place. 

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying 

fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. 

D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and 

fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended 

use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in 

writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 

E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each 

area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in 

writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 

F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. 

G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer. 

H. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing 

over which they are applied. 



I. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing 

material and matching finish approved for required mockups. 

J. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. 

K. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, 

inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. 

L. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written 

instructions for each finish selected. 


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special 

inspections: 

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10. 

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with 

application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed 

applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or 

exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. 

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 

2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results 

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING 

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of 

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean 

exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. 

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting 

from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas 

and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. 

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. 

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using 

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. 




SECTION 078413 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 



A. Selection and provision of Code conforming through-penetration firestop systems for 

the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies: 

1. Walls and partitions. 

B. Penetrations include both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items 

including but not limited to: 

1. Pipe, conduit, duct and wire penetrations from all trades. 

2. Structural members. 

C. Selection and provision of Code conforming fire resistive joint systems in the 

following construction joints: 

D. Head of wall joints between fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and 

fire-resistance-rated partitions. 

1. At steel beams. 

E. Field Inspection, destructive testing and repair of installed systems. 


A. Section 092900 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES: Construction of stud framing 

openings in rated partitions to conform to UL designs in this Section. 


A. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

B. UL-05 - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Resistance Directory. 

C. UL 2079B98- Standard Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 

D. UL Fire Resistance directory. 

E. Factory Mutual Global (FM) Approval Guide. 

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Select and provide through-penetration firestop systems tested by Underwriter’s 

Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual Global (FMG) to resist spread of fire, resist 

passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain fire-resistance rating of assembly 

penetrated as the 2003 International Building Code as locally adopted. 

B. F-Rated Systems: Provide systems with F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance 

rating in hours of constructions penetrated. 

C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions where systems protect penetrating 

items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas, 

provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings equaling or exceeding 

fire-resistance rating in hours of constructions penetrated. as well as F-ratings. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 078413-1 THROUGH-PENETRATION 

FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

D. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 

E. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 

F. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 

G. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall 

cross-sectional area. 

H. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and 

physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to 

these conditions both during and after construction. 

I. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide 

moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 

J. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to 

possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads 

involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 

K. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop 

systems not requiring removal of insulation. 

L. For through-penetration firestop systems and fire resistive joint systems exposed to 

view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed 

ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 


A. Submit in accordance with Division 01. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Penetration Key Plans: Provide a plan drawn to the same scale as the project 

drawings and indicating the designations of the selected UL tested designs 

chosen for each penetration condition or joint encountered. 

2. Plan notes shall indicate wall or slab construction at each location, kind and 

material of penetrating item and minimum separation required from adjacent 

conditions whether another construction or another penetrating item that 

would render the UL or FMG design inapplicable. 

3. For each system proposed include applicable UL or FMG system number with 

their corresponding F and t ratings and manufacturer’s detail drawings for each 

tested and listed firestop system proposed. 

4. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and 

inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop 

condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by 

through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. 

C. Product Data: 

1. System Design Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system 

indicated on the Penetration Key Plans, submit documentation, including 



FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

illustrations, from UL-05 or other qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

2. Product Data: Submit data on the component products of the selected designs. 


demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with 

project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other 

information specified. 

E. Letter of Qualification: Provide letter from manufacturer that installing each staff 

member of the installing contractor has received sufficient training to properly install 

the tested designs of that manufacturer. 

F. Compliance Certificates: Provide written certification, signed by contractor and 

Installer, certifying and verifying that: 

1. Proper system firestopping materials have been installed at each installation 

location. 

2. Each firestop system is installed in exact accordance with manufacturer’s 

published requirements. 

3. Each firestop system complies with appropriate building code requirements. 

4. Each firestop system is installed in all specified or indicated locations in rated 

assemblies. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced firm that has been approved by FMG 

according to FMG 4991, “Approval of Firestop Contractors”. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of 

penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through- penetration firestop and 

fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those 

specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 

1. Firestopping tests are performed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) or 

2. Systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems 

complying with the following requirements: 

D. System products bear UL classification marking. 

1. Systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration 

firestop system designations listed by the UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." 

E. Pre-installation Conference: Contractor shall conduct conference at Project site to 

comply with requirements in Division 01. Manufacturer’s technical representative 

must attend. 


A. Deliver System products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages 

with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; 

date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and 

inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and 

mixing instructions for multi-component materials. 



FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

1. Store and handle materials for systems to prevent their deterioration or damage 

due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install systems when ambient or substrate 

temperatures are outside limits permitted by system manufacturers or when substrates 

are wet due to rain, condensation, or other causes. 

B. Ventilate installed systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, 

where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 


A. Coordinate construction of openings and joints in, and penetrations to, fire rated 

assemblies to conform with the selected and approved UL fire tested penetration and 

joint designs. Coordination includes but is not limited to: 

1. Offsetting the penetrating item from parallel walls, ceilings or from other 

penetrating items so that the penetration detail matches the tested design on all 

sides. 

2. Rerouting the penetrating item so that the item penetrates the rated barrier at 

an angle of 90 degrees or at an angle sufficiently great to stay within the limits 

of the tested design. 

B. Limit the size of sleeves, core-drilled holes, or cut openings so that the annular space 

remaining between penetrating item and the surrounding construction does not exceed 

that of the tested design. 


2.1 SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide systems by one of 

the following: 

1. Nelson Firestop Systems. 

2. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 

3. Specified Technologies Inc. 

4. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

5. Or pre-approved equal. 

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the 

substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating firestop systems, 

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestop system 

manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

B. Components of tested systems: Provide components for each firestop system that are 

needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components 

specified by system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting 

agency. 

2.3 MIXING 



FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with firestop system 

manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if 

required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, 

mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform 

quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other 

conditions affecting performance. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing firestop systems 

to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the 

following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items 

foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop systems. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound 

surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. Remove 

loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by firestop system 

manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine 

primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestop systems from contacting 

adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would 

otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods 

used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as 

possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article 

and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published 

drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to 

support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce 

cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 

C. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other 

accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. 

D. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following 

results: 



FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings 

and penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to 

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

3.4 FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. Perimeter Fire-containment Systems 

B. Where indicated for gaps between tops of fire-resistance-rated partition assemblies and 

fire-resistance-rated ceilings, floor slabs and roofs, provide a perimeter 

fire-containment system with the fire-test-response rating of the assembly indicated, as 

determined by testing identical systems per UBC Standard 26-9 and UL 2079 by UL 

or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and 

inspecting agency. 


A. Inspecting Agency: General Contractor shall Employ Manufacturer’s Technical 

representative to inspect firestop systems and to prepare test reports. 

B. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected firestop systems comply 

with or deviate from requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing firestop systems with other construction only after inspection 

reports are issued. 

D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestop systems so they comply with 

requirements. 

3.6 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl 

labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides 

of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to 

remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on 

labels: 

1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not 

Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Firestop system manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 




FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and 

with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by firestop system manufacturers 

and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that 

ensure firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial 

Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and 

remove damaged or deteriorated firestop systems immediately and install new 

materials to produce firestop systems complying with specified requirements. 




FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

SECTION 08710 0 – FINISH HARDWARE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Furnish and deliver to the building site, all finishing hardware required for all scheduled doors, 

complete as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. 

B. It is the intent of these specifications to cover in general the class and character of all finish 

hardware required. 

C. The hardware list specified hereinafter has been made for the convenience of the Contractor and 

covers in general the necessary hardware for doors, casework, etc., but all other doors, etc., 

shown on the plan and not covered by the general characterization shall be fitted with appropriate 

hardware to the same standards as the hardware described throughout these specifications. 

Contractor shall furnish hardware schedule as hereinafter specified. 

D. Suppliers proposing substitutes of equivalent products other than the manufacturers named 

hereinafter shall submit schedules listing product and manufacturer specified, and product and 

manufacturer of proposed substitute. This schedule shall be submitted according to the 

GENERAL CONDITIONS. 

E. Products of manufacturers which are not locally represented are not acceptable. Products which 

are not locally stocked or serviced, or which must be "special ordered" are not acceptable. 


A. Section 134900 - RADIATION PROTECTION: For wood doors and hollow metal frames to 

receive hardware specified in this section. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 

B. Schedule: Furnish copies of the schedule of hardware in compliance with specifications and 

drawings. List each opening and hardware to be applied. State keying, material, finish and 

manufacturer's number for each item. Required types are listed. 

C. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature along with schedule for 

information only. 

D. Keying Schedule: Submit a keying schedule for approval by the Hospital’s Project Manager using 

keying nomenclature as listed in DHI document "Keying Terminology". Door designation listed 

in the Keying Schedule shall be same as those used on Drawings and Hardware Schedule. Keying 

of locks shall be as directed by the Hospital’s Project Manager. 


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with 

minimum three years documented experience. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, 

hinges, closer, etc.) from a single manufacturer. 



FINISH HARDWARE

B. Hardware supplier qualifications: Supplier must have a local warehouse and office and have 

local inventory for all items supplied for this project. 


A. Conform to applicable code for accessibility and requirements applicable to fire rated doors and 

frames. 

B. Definition: "Door Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are 

required for swing and sliding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware 

specified in same Section as door and door frame. 

C. Perform work in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines 

ADAAG Section 404, ANSI A117.1, NFPA 80, NFPA 101, NFPA 252 and the International 

Building Code as applicable. Each door that is an element of an accessible route shall comply 

with ADAAG Section 402. 

1.6 DELIVERY 

A. Examine the drawings, specifications, and details in order to check all items so they will be 

suitable and of perfect fit and delivered where and when required. 

B. All hardware shall be delivered to the job site, packed separately with all trimmings, screws, etc., 

for the particular door, all properly labeled and numbered so that they can be checked when 

delivered. 

C. Upon delivery of the finishing hardware to the job site by the hardware supplier, the General 

Contractor shall have a responsible person check in the material at the place for storage. The 

hardware shall be protected from damage at all times, both prior to and after installation. 


1.1 GENERAL CHARACTER 

A. All hardware shall be of the best quality in construction, design and finish, and free from any 

defects. Any defective pieces shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. 

B. Hardware shall be of the manufacture, type, weight, function and quality as shown by 

factory numbers or an approved equal. 

C. Hinges: Regular bearing and ball bearing types as indicated. 

D. Finish: As scheduled. 

E. Hardware shall comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act 

Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), Chapter 4, where required. 

1.2 KEYING 

A. Locks shall have four (4) keys each. Locks for the same rooms shall be keyed alike. All locks 

shall be master keyed to the existing Sargent Master Key System. During period of construction, 

all locks shall be operated by a special master keys. Regular day and master keys are to be 

retained by the Contractor so they cannot be obtained or duplicated by unauthorized persons. All 

keys shall be stamped with DHI key symbol. The special construction master key shall become 

inoperable when regular keys are turned over to the Hospital’s Project Manager. Proper 



FINISH HARDWARE

certification of factory assembly of all locks and cylinders as well as factory master keying shall 

be furnished by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of this portion of the work. Certificate 

shall then be given to the Hospital’s Project Manager. Provide 10 construction master keys. 

1.3 FASTENINGS 

A. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fastenings for proper application of hardware. 

Fastenings shall be of suitable size and type of securing hardware for heavy use. (e.g. Expansion 

shields securing hardware such as door stops/holders to concrete or solid grouted masonry 

substrates shall completely fill the depth and diameter of drilled holes. Shimming of the shields or 

the use of plastic shields are not acceptable.) Fastenings must harmonize with the hardware as to 

material and finish. 

B. Furnish necessary expansion shields, toggle bolts, machine screws or other suitable approved 

anchoring devices where hardware is to be installed on concrete, masonry or other types of 

backing. 

1.4 TEMPLATES 

A. Templates as may be required to be furnished the Contractor within seven days after 

receipt of an order and approved hardware schedule. 

1.5 TOOLS AND INSTRUCTIONS 

A. All tools and maintenance or installation instruction packed with the closers and locksets shall be 

given to the Hospital when the project is completed. 


1.1 HARDWARE MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE/SUPPLIER INSPECTION 

A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Before start of work, the Contractor, hardware installer, hardware 

manufacturer's representative or supplier and the Hospital’s Project Manager shall meet to review 

the hardware installation instructions and installation conditions. 

B. Before final inspection of the work and acceptance of the project by the Hospital’s Project 

Manager, the supplier of hardware and other items specified in this Section shall visit the site and 

carefully inspect all parts for conformance to this specification, adequacy for intended use, proper 

functioning, appearance, finish and successful operation, assuming joint responsibility with the 

General Contractor. 

1.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. Product numbers indicated in the HARDWARE GROUPS are those of the manufacturer's listed 

and are used to establish the quality of the products intended. 

B. Typical requirements are described in the catalogs of: 

MANUFACTURER LIST 

CATEGORY VENDOR NAME MFG 

SLIDING DOOR LOCKSET BY FSB, INC. FSB 

HINGE BY McKINNEY PRODUCTS COMPANY MCK 

ASTRAGAL BY PEMKO PEM 

BOTTOM DOOR GUIDE BY PEMKO PEM 



FINISH HARDWARE

DOOR BOTTOM BY PEMKO PEM 

DOOR SEAL BY PEMKO PEM 

INTERMEDIATE PIVOT BY RIXSON DOOR CONTROLS RIX 

PIVOT SET BY RIXSON DOOR CONTROLS RIX 

DOOR CLOSER BY SARGENT MANUFACTURING COMPANY SAR 

ENTRY LOCK BY SARGENT MANUFACTURING COMPANY SAR 

LOCKSET BY SARGENT MANUFACTURING COMPANY SAR 

MORTISE CYLINDER BY SARGENT MANUFACTURING COMPANY SAR 

PRIVACY LOCKSET BY SARGENT MANUFACTURING COMPANY SAR 

ALUMINUM TRACK BY STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS STA 

HANGER BY STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS STA 

OH TRACK STOP BY STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS STA 

D.P. STRIKE BY TRIMCO TRI 

FLUSH BOLT BY TRIMCO TRI 

HD FLOOR STOP BY TRIMCO TRI 

KICKPLATE BY TRIMCO TRI 

WALL STOP (CONCAVE) BY TRIMCO TRI 

HW GROUP - 001 

6.0 EA HINGE T4A3386 5 X 4.5 US26D MCK 

1.0 EA LOCKSET 28-10G24 LL US26D WBX SAR 

2.0 EA FLUSH BOLT 3917-12 626 TRI 

1.0 EA D.P. STRIKE 3910 630 TRI 

2.0 EA WALL STOP (CONCAVE) 1270WV 626/630 TRI 

2.0 EA ASTRAGAL 29310CS 84" PEM 


REUSE EXISTING HARDWARE 


3.0 EA HINGE TA2314 4.5 X 4.5 US26D MCK 

1.0 EA LOCKSET 28-10G24 LL US26D WBX SAR 



3.0 EA HINGE TA2314 4.5 X 4.5 US26D MCK 

1.0 EA PRIVACY LOCKSET 49-8265 LNL US26D WBX SAR 

1.0 EA KICKPLATE K0050 10" X 34" 630 TRI 



1.0 EA ALUMINUM TRACK BP250N-01-72 STA 

1.0 PR HANGER BP250N-41 STA 

2.0 EA OH TRACK STOP BP250-77 STA 

1.0 EA BOTTOM DOOR GUIDE 102N PEM 

1.0 EA SLIDING DOOR LOCKSET 1147 RC 6204 SS B 2-3/4" X 1-3/4" FSB 

1.0 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 41 X 13-0921 X 626 SAR 


1.0 EA PIVOT SET L147 US26D 3/4" RIX 

1.0 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT ML19 US26D RIX 

1.0 EA ENTRY LOCK *28-74-10G24 LL US26D WBX SAR 

*LEAD LINE INSIDE ROSE AND LATCH 



FINISH HARDWARE

1.0 EA DOOR CLOSER 351 H EN SAR 

1.0 EA DOOR BOTTOM 315CN 36" PEM 

1.0 EA DOOR SEAL S88D17 PEM 

1.0 EA HD FLOOR STOP 1215CKU 626 TRI 


1.0 EA ENTRY LOCK 28-10G24 LL US26D WBX SAR 

1.0 EA DOOR SEAL PK55D17 PEM 

BALANCE OF HARDWARE IS EXISTING 

END OF SCHEDULE 



FINISH HARDWARE

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 



A. Interior metal stud partition framing. 

B. Concealed sheet metal blocking. 

C. Suspended ceiling framing. 

D. Interior gypsum board, joint treatment, and accessories. 

E. Acoustical insulation and acoustical sealants. 


A. Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: For plywood sheathing applied to studs. 

B. Section 099100 - PAINTING: Surface finish. 


A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board 

assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, 

provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to 

ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire 

Resistance Directory." or GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 

2. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, 

provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated 

according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and 

identification of manufacturer or supplier. 

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from 

weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 

Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board 

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 092900 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Steel Framing and Furring: 

a. Clark Dietrich Industries, Inc. 

b. Atlas. 

c. Cemco 

2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: 

a. G-P Gypsum Corp. 

b. Temple Inland 

c. National Gypsum Company. 

d. United States Gypsum Co. 

e. BPB America, Inc. 

2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter 

wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. 

C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from 

corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type 

indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that 

imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a 

qualified independent testing agency. 

D. Hangers: As follows 

1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch 

diameter. 

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 

inch, a minimum 1/2-inchwide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized 

zinc coating. 

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 

G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 

1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide 

flange, 3/4 inch deep. 



2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. 

3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound 

transmission. 

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by 

a slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. 

G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of 

main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. 

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 660 System. 

c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. 

2.3 STEEL STUD PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Components, General: As follows: 

1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gage: double studs at door and window openings, 

and where indicated on the drawings. 

C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges. 

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width 

indicated. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. 

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide 

flange. 

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 

2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. 

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch 

2. Depth: 7/8 inch unless indicated otherwise. 

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide 

flange. 



1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 

H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment 

flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit 

insulation thickness indicated. 

I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and 

other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

2.4 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PRODUCTS 

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each 

area and correspond with support system indicated. 

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 

1. Two side paper faced 

a. Core: 5/8 inch Type X. 

b. Tapered Edge. 

C. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard ASTM D3273. Manufactured to applicable 

standards of ASTM C 630 and ASTM C1177. 

1. One side and two side glass mat faced gypsum board. 

a. Core: 5/8 inch, moisture resistance treated gypsum, Type X. 

2. Basis- of- Design Products: 

a. G-P DensArmor Plus Interior Guard. 

b. Temple Inland Greenglass. 

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Rolled zinc or plastic. 

2. Shapes: 

a. Cornerbead: Use 90 degree type at outside corners of partitions, rounded type at 

gypsum board soffits. 

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed 

panel edges. 

3. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where control joints exist in the substrate and parallel to 

changed in substrate such as between stud partition and furred masonry. 

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Paper Faced Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 



2. Glass-Mat Faced Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 

3. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is 

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

C. Joint Compound: Provide where scheduled in Part 3 below 

1. Setting-type, sandable topping compound, or, 

2. Drying type. 

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex 

sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission 

through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing 

representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 

1. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 

2. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum 

panels to continuous substrate. 

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by 

panel manufacturer. 

D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener 

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 

E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) 

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag 

wool, or rock wool. 

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of 

assembly. 



A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, 

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions 

affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 



3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing 

installation. 

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board 

assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, 

furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board 

manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's 

"Gypsum Construction Handbook." 

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading 

imposed by structural movement. 

1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 

2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install 

slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally 

support assembly. 

a. Use deep-leg deflection track 

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. 

Frame both sides of joints independently. 

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling 

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay 

hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by 

bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger 

spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard 

suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in 

form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and 

hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced 

standards. 

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, 

eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, 

and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 

4. Support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger 

inserts that extend through forms. 

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 

6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 

B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for 

panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member 

and transversely between parallel members. 

C. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for 



assemblies indicated. 

D. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than 

that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 

1. Hangers: 48 inches 

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches. 

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches. 

E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system 

meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other 

and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING 

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board 

assemblies abut other construction. 

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation 

strip between studs and wall. 

B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary 

not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. 

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended 

ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at or above suspended ceilings. 

Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating 

partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 

1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not fasten studs to 

top track to allow independent movement of studs and track. 

2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of 

floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, 

install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and 

decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous 

from floor to underside of solid structure. 

a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. 

D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel 

can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 

E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable 

written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb 

anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to 

jamb studs. 

1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch 

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 

3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof 

structure above. 



F. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless 

otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above 

door heads. 

3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily 

installed after panels have been installed on one side. 

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to 

avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of 

adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and 

ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate 

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered 

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not 

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. 

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open 

(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 

H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above 

ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke 

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 

3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural 

members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to 

fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inchwide 

joints to install sealant. 

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except 

floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inchwide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead 

edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting 

structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

K. Acoustic Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion 

joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install 

acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply 

with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and 

closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing 

partitions above acoustical ceilings. 

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and 



finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 

M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 

3.6 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS 

A. Single-Layer Application: 

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest 

extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless 

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end 

joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses 

of board. 

B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before 

applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers 

at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches 

minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance-rated 

assembly. 

C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and 

face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring 

member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, 

unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on 

opposite sides of partitions. 

1. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer 

either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with 

vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over 

furring members. 

D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with 

screws. 

F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate 

(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum 

board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels 

until fastening adhesive has set. 

3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same 

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations 

approved by Architect for visual effect. 

3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 



A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, 

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for 

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended 

for tape. 

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to 

ASTM C 840, for locations scheduled in Part 3 below 

1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints unless a higher level of finish is required for fireresistance-rated 

assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 

2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, 

and trim flanges. 

3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, 

fasteners, and trim flanges. 

4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to 

tape, fasteners, and trim flanges 

3.9 SCHEDULE OF BOARD PRODUCTS 

A. In toilet rooms and housekeeping rooms: 

1. Walls behind tile wainscots: Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board. 

2. Walls above tile wainscots: Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board. 

3. Walls where glazed coatings are scheduled: Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum 

Board. 

4. To steel stud exterior wall framing or furring: Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum 

Board. 

B. On all other walls ceilings and interior soffits: Gypsum wallboard. 

3.10 SCHEDULE OF JOINT FINISH 

A. At glass mat faced gypsum board: 

1. Embedding and fill coats: Use setting type joint compound with glass fiber mesh. 

2. Full skim coat: Drying type joint compound for Level 5 finish. 

B. At paper faced of gypsum board where 24 hour drying time is not possible for each coat. 

1. Embedding and fill coats: Use setting type joint compound with glass fiber mesh. 

2. Finish coat: Drying type joint compound. 

C. Use drying types (readymix) and paper tape elsewhere. 

3.11 FRAMING SCHEDULE 

A. Interior Ceiling and Soffit Framing: Frame with conventional or T-bar suspension grid assembly 

at Contractor's option. 



3.12 SCHEDULE OF BOARD FINISHES. 

A. In ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas: Level 1 

B. Where panels are substrate for tile: Level 2 or 3. 

C. At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated: Level 4. 




SECTION 093000 – TILING 



A. Porcelain floor tile and base, thin bed application. 

B. Ceramic wall tile and trims in thin bed application to tile backer board substrates. 

C. Glass wall tile in thin bed application to tile backer board substrates. 

D. Metal edge trims. 

E. Expansion joint treatment. 


A. Product Data: For each of product listed. 

B. Shop drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and 

locations of expansion, control and isolation joints in tile substrates and layout of movement 

joints finished tile surfaces. 

C. Samples of various tiles required shall be submitted to the Architect for approval and for 

color and pattern selection. Samples shall be identified as to grade and manufacturer. 

D. Certificate: Before installation of tile, provide Standard Form of Master Grade Certificate 

signed by the Tile Contractor and Manufacturer stating grade and kind of tile. 

E. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and grouting product. 

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE. 

A. Product: All packages of tile shall be delivered to the job in sealed cartons bearing grade seals 

in conformance with ANSI A137.1. 

B. Execution: Where applicable and not otherwise explained on the Drawings, follow 

recommendations of the TCNA (Tile Council of North America) Handbook for Ceramic Tile 

Installation. 

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged 

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 


1. Accent Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 1 percent of amount installed 

but not less than one unopened box, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size 

indicated. 

2. Field Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to one half of one percent of 

amount installed but not less than one unopened box, for each type, composition, color, 

pattern, and size indicated. 

2.1 TILE MATERIALS: 

A. Products selected for this project are scheduled on drawings. 



TILING

B. Appearance characteristics for determining acceptable tile material substitution. 

1. Color, texture and gloss of the individual tiles patterns. 

2. The mix and coordination of color match of the tile in the basis-of- design patterns. 

3. Actual and relative tile dimension and thicknesses of tile combined within the same 

pattern. 

2.2 SETTING MATERIALS 

A. Basis- Of- Design Products 

1. Products scheduled on drawings are products of Laticrete, Inc. 

2. Provide the Basis- Of- Design Products or, subject to the requirements of this section, 

equal performing products of one of the following manufacturers: 

a. Mapei 

b. Merkrete. 

c. Bonsal. 

B. Setting Bed and Grout Products: 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

1. Thin Bed Mortar Materials: 

a. Modified portland cement: High performance mortar formulation with high 

adhesion strength, Laticrete 254 Platinum, MAPEI, Ultraflex 3 or pre-approved 

equal. 

b. Color: White. 

2. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A 118.3 two- or three part premeasured slow curing epoxy grout; 

Laticrete Spectralock Premium. 

A. Tile Terminations 

a. Colors: As scheduled on drawings. 

1. Profiles and finish: As indicated on drawings. 

2. Products: Standard profiles manufactured by Schluter Systems, Blanke Corporation 

orpre-approved equal. 

B. Sealants for Movement Joints 

1. Silicone sealant tinted to match grout colors; Latisil silicone gun grade sealant 

manufactured by Laticrete, factory-tinted to match grout joints or approved equal. 

2.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS 

A. Units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end 

butt joints ½ inch thickness; 

1. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. 



TILING

2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 

3. US Gypsum Corporation; Durock Cement Board. 

4. James Hardie Company; HardieBacker. 

B. Accessories: 

1. Vapor retarder: 10 mil polyester sheet. 

2. Vapor retarder joint tape. 

2.5 GLASS-MAT, WATER-RESISTANT BACKING BOARD 

A. Units complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, Type X. 

2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include the following: 



1. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. 

2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 

3. Or, pre-approved equal. 

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, 

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and 

curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 

Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical 

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before 

installing tile. 

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if 

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 


3.2 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions and install at locations indicated to receive wall tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap 

where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. Apply over 

taped vapor barrier. Terminate barrier over waterproof membrane 



TILING

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce 

a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 

D. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and 

manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 


A. Remove coatings, and substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are 

incompatible with tile-setting materials. 

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound 

according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product 

specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample 

submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one 

package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved 

Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site 

before installing. 

C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to 

prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with 

continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile 

surfaces. 


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications 

for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to 

methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

B. Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with 

TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete 

covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at 

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without 

marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in 

items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and 

other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when 

adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile 

fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 

Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within 

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, 

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, 



TILING

mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

H. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealants." 

3.5 TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Tile installation systems and methods: See Schedule below. 

B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting 

bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would 

otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish. 

C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets 

carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 

D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer 

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, 

remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they 

are free of foreign matter. 

1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's 

written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners 

recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners 

are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect 

metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with 

clean water before and after cleaning. 

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating 

manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating 

to prevent it from clogging drains. 

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to 

completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy 

covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is 

completed. 

1. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile 

surfaces. 

3.7 TILE AND JOINT SEALING SCHEDULE 

A. Floor and base modified portland cement grout joints: Water based sealer 

B. Epoxy grout and wall joints: Sealer not required. 

3.8 TILE SETTING 



TILING

A. Movement Joints: Provide vertical joints at maximum 12 feet on center and at inside corners. 

B. Sealants: Apply a grout-matching color sealant at movement joints, at inside corners, at tops 

of wainscots, at penetrations and at outside corners. 




TILING

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 



A. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. 

1. Basis- of- Design Products exempted. 


A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling product. 

1. Basis- of- Design Products exempted. 

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 

percent of quantity installed. 


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in 

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they 

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct 

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized 

moisture content. 

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed 

and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 095113 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for 

Project when occupied for its intended use. 


2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

B. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and 

electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 

1. Class: heavy duty. 

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing 

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated 

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical 

ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of 

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. 

C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each 

product type. 

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern 

designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, 

provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply 

with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical 

performance, edge detail, and size. 

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS 

A. Basis- Of- Design Products 

1. Products scheduled on drawings are products of Armstrong World Industries. 

a. Pattern and color: As scheduled on the drawings. 

2. Provide the Basis- Of- Design Products or approved equal performing products with 

similar appearance in the sole judgment of the Architect, by one of the following 

manufacturers 

a. CertainTeed Corp. 

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 



c. Tectum Inc. 

d. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 

e. US Gypsum Interiors Inc, or, subject to the requirements of this section. 

B. Performance – Acoustic Panel. 

1. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) 0.70 

2. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) 35 

3. Reflectance: 90 percent. 

4. Provide humidity resistance and bio block. 

C. Performance – Wood Veneer Faced Panel. 

1. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; N/A 

2. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; 38 

3. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (HPVA) 

4. Reflectance: N/A. 

5. Dimensional Stability: Standard 

D. Size: 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

2. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 

E. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels 

treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, 

mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or 

bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to 

ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal 

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with 

applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, 

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated 

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft 

temper. 

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 

3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 



4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load 

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but 

provide not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire. 

D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic 

forces. 

E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical 

panels in place. 

F. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 

24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 

2.5 BASIS-OF – DESIGN PRODUCT - METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following available 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 

limited to, the following]: 

1. CertainTeed Corp. 

2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 

3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 

C. Narrow-Face, Uncapped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll 

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip 

galvanized; to produce structural members with 9/16-inchwide faces. 

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 

2. Face Design: Slotted, box-shaped flange. 

3. Face Finish: Painted white in color as selected from manufacturer's full range. 

4. Reveal Finish: Painted to match flange color. 

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM 

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not 

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with 

seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as 

that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and 

suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners 

unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms 

reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at 

exposed suspension member. 



2.7 PERIMETER TRIM 

A. Components: 

1. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel, factory-finished in (factory-applied baked 

polyester paint to match ceiling grid color. 

a. Depth: As indicated on drawings. 

2. Accessories: 

a. Inside and Outside Corners: Commercial quality extruded aluminum sections 

formed to match the Axiom trim channel profile that connect to straight Axiom 

sections. 

b. Hanger clips. 

B. Basis- of- Design Product: Axiom – Classic Custom Perimeter Trim manufactured by 

Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical 

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified 

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements 

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel 

ceilings. 

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture 

damaged, or mold damaged. 



A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at 

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply 

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic 

design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's 

"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling 

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces 

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 



3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger 

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard 

suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in 

form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a 

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, 

eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not 

deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing 

members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and 

appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger 

involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to 

age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 

6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from 

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of 

each member. 

7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within 

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of three 

tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, 

without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires 

into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. 

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and 

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of 

moldings before they are installed. 

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more 

than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 

inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. 

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system 

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, 

precise fit. 

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: 

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 

b. Install panels with pattern running in one direction. 



2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install 

panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel 

faces flush with bottom face of runners. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and 

suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and 

touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be 

successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 




SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 



A. Resilient base. 

1.2 RELATED SECTION 

A. Section 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size 

Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern 

required. 




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 

B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with 

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but more than 95 

deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 096513 - 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by 

manufacturer, but not less than or more than 95 deg F. 

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 

completed. 


2.1 RESILIENT BASE 

A. Basis – of – Design Products: Product scheduled on drawings is a product of Johnsonite. 

1. Color and texture: As scheduled on the drawings. 

B. Provide the Basis–of–Design Product or an equal product of one of the following 

manufacturers. 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 

3. Flexco, Inc. 

4. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. 

5. Roppe Corporation, USA. 

C. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 

D. Style: Cove (base with toe). 

E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. 

F. Height: 4 inches. 

G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

H. Outside Corners: Preformed. 

I. Inside Corners: Job formed. 

J. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY 

A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. 

1. Material: Rubber. 


A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and 

substrate conditions indicated. 





A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in 

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign 

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of 

resilient products. 

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other 

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of 

adjacent pieces aligned. 

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in 

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient 

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 

H. Job-Formed Corners: 

1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. 

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates 

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet that would otherwise 

be exposed. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient 

products. 



B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 




SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 


1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: 

A. Vinyl sheet flooring. 


A. Section 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 




1. Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 3 linear feet in roll form and in full roll 

width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are 

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming 

method indicated. 

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by 

floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 

2. Smoke Generated: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 662 

qualified testing agency: less the 450. 

C. Slip Resistance: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM D 2047 by a 

qualified testing agency. 

1. Dry: 0.50 or higher. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 

85 degrees F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 096516 - 1 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

1. 48 hours after installation. 

B. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. 

C. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 


2.1 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING 

A. Basis – of – Design Products: Product scheduled on drawings is a product of Altro Group. 

1. Color and texture: As scheduled on the drawings. 

B. Provide the Basis–of–Design Product or an equal product of one of the following 

manufacturers. 

1. Forbo Flooring, Inc. 

2. Lonseal, Inc.; 

3. TOLI International; 

C. Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1303. 

1. Type (Binder Content): Type I, minimum binder content of 90 percent. 

2. Wear-Layer Thickness: 0.6 mm or thicker. 

3. Overall Thickness: 0.080 minimum. 

4. Backing Class: Class A 

D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. 

E. Seaming Method: Heat welded. 


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or 

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for 

applications indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Epoxy or two component polyurethane water-resistant type recommended by 

manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. 

C. Welding Rod and Seam Glaze: Manufacturer's recommended product. 

1. Color: As scheduled on drawings. 

D. Adhesive between vinyl and rubber goods: Use manufacturer’s standard rubber cold adhesive. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 





A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor 

coverings. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by 

manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed 

with installation only after substrates pass testing. 

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed 

with installation only after substrates pass testing. 

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation 

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of 

water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity 

level measurement. 

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowellable leveling and patching 

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be 

installed. 

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at 

least 48 hours in advance of installation. 

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before 

installation. 

3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. 

B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. 

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: 

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 

inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 

4. Avoid cross seams. 



D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, 

and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. 

E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 

F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in 

installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor 

coverings installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges 

to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. 

G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to 

produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, 

telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 

H. Seamless Installation: 

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to 

permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish 

seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 

2. Glaze seams after welding. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. 

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. 

C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

D. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS 


1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: 

A. Vinyl wall covering. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: 

A. Section 099100 PAINTING 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, 

durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. 

B. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inchlong section of wall covering. 

1. Basis- of- Design Product exempted. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for wall covering. 


A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 




1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount 

installed. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied 

with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified 

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: 

a. Flame-Spread Index: 15 or less. 

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 25 or less. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 097200 – 1 

WALL COVERING


A. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the 

surfaces to receive wall covering. 

B. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time 

recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 



A. Low-Emitting Materials: Wall covering system shall comply with the testing and product 

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the 

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental 

Chambers." 

2.2 WALL COVERINGS 

A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot. 

2.3 VINYL WALL COVERING 

A. Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide mildew-resistant products complying with the 

following: 

1. FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101-D for Type II, Medium-Duty products. 

B. Products 

1. Basis- of- Design Product – Vinyl Wall Covering: As scheduled on drawings. 

a. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As scheduled on drawings. 

2. Provide the Basis- of- Design Product or, subject to compliance with requirements of this 

section and with comparable appearance in the sole judgment of the Architect, provide a 

approved product of another manufacturer: 

C. Total Weight Excluding Coatings: 13.3 oz per sq yard. 

D. Backing: Osnaburg fabric. 

E. Repeat: Reversible match pattern. 

2.4 ACCESSORIES 

A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and 

substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 

B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 099100 PAINTING 

and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. 

C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wallcovering 

manufacturer. 



WALL COVERING

D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting 

performance of the Work. 



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, 

grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. 

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, 

unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 

1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete 

masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 

2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer 

manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 

D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and 

similar items. 

E. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas 

not less than 24 hours before installation. 


A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable 

to products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements apply. 

B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and 

corners. 

C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. 

D. Install reversing every other strip. 

E. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible 

shrinkage. 

F. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor. 

G. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside 

corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. 



WALL COVERING

H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 

I. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams 

without any overlay or spacing between strips. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 

B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 

C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 

D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, 

and similar items. 




WALL COVERING

SECTION 099100 - PAINTING 



A. Field applied finishes 

1. Conventional interior paint finishes 

2. Interior clear finishes 

1.2 SCOPE OF PAINTING AND CLEAR FINISHING WORK 

A. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop 

priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is 

not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an 

item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces 

whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the 

Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 

C. Surfaces to be finished: 

1. Interior surfaces scheduled to receive painter's finishes. 

2. Non-ferrous metals, plated or factory finished items specifically noted to be painted or 

when such items occur as accessories and appurtenances to surfaces required to be 

painted. 

3. Exposed mechanical and electrical items in areas to be painted. 

4. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following 

a. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 

b. Heat exchanger 

c. Ductwork. 

d. Insulation. 

e. Motors and mechanical equipment. 

f. Accessory items. 

5. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following 

a. Conduit and fittings. 

b. Switchgear. 

c. Panelboards. 

D. Surfaces not to be finished: 

1. Prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts and labels 

and identifying plates. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 099100-1 

PAINTING

a. Concrete floors, paving, walks, stairs, and textured concrete unless scheduled. 

Other concrete surfaces scheduled not to be painted. 

b. Structural steel and metal elements designated to receive sprayed fireproofing 

unless such finishes have been UL tested with the designated assembly and are 

approved by the fireproofing manufacturer. 

c. Finish hardware, unless prime coated. 

d. Glass, plastic laminate, ceramic tile. 

e. Acoustical ceilings, unless scheduled to be painted. 

f. Integrally colored DEFS finishes. 

g. Flooring and floor coverings. 

h. Plumbing and lighting fixtures, and electrical device plates. 

i. Items with complete factory finishes except where noted. 

j. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible 

spaces. 

k. Finished metal surfaces include the following: 

1) Anodized aluminum. 

2) Stainless steel. 

3) Chromium plate 

4) Copper. 


l. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: 

1) Valve and damper operators. 

2) Linkages. 

3) Sensing devices. 

4) Motor and fan shafts. 

m. Labels include over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other 

code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or 

nomenclature plates. 

A. Divisions 22 and 23 Mechanical: Mechanical and plumbing identification. 

B. Division 26- Electrical: Electrical identification. 


A. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 

B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 



PAINTING

C. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural 

Specifications Manual. 

D. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 

E. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 

F. Standard gloss ranges developed by the National Paint and Coatings Association (NPCA). 


1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at 

an 85-degree meter. 

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured 

at a 60-degree meter. 

3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at 

a 60-degree meter. 

4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when 

measured at a 60-degree meter. 

5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at 

a 60-degree meter. 

A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include primers. 

B. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material 

and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by 

manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 

C. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label 

analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed 

for use. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors 

available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 

E. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate 

actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use 

representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required 

sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each 

sample for location and application. 

3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and 

texture only: 

a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. 

b. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch square samples of each color and material on 

hardboard. 

c. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural- or 

stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. 



PAINTING

d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch square samples of flat metal and two 8-inchlong 

samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to 



specified. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting 

system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a 

record of successful in-service performance. 

1. Applicator Training: 

a. Airless Spraying: Where the Contractor proposes to employ airless spraying, the 

applicator(s) shall have completed an approved "Spray Applicator Certification 

Program" conducted by the Painting Industry of Hawaii. As a minimum, the 

certification shall include material and equipment selection, use and 

maintenance, hands-on application and safety training. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from 

the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 

C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of 

coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in 

PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 

1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for 

each type of coating and substrate to be painted. 

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface. 

b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 

c. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, 

apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as 

specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. 

d. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate 

coating systems of a similar nature. 

2. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples. 

3. Paint, Stain and Coating Application: Meet requirements of PDCA “Custom Grade”. 


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and 

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. 

B. Product Storage: 

1. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area. Do not 

allow temperature in storage area to exceed temperature allowed by the stored product 

manufacturer. 

2. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and 



PAINTING

esidue. 

3. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary 

measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health 

hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature 

range required by the paint product manufacturer. 

B. Provide minimum lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 


A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the 

quantities described below. 

1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 

L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. 

2. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage. Label each 

container with color, type, texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's 

label. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.1 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials of the types 

scheduled under Finish Systems below that are: 

1. Compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service 

and application, 

2. Recommended by coating manufacturer based on testing and field experience as 

documented in published product literature or confirmed in writing by manufacturer. 

B. Material Quality: Paint systems and components product types are specified in Part 3 below. 

Where applicable, provide products from the product lines offered by a single manufacturer 

listed in Paragraphs 2.1 below. Exceptions: 

1. If a paint product type is not listed in the product lines below, provide the selected 

manufacturer’s best quality product of the type required. 

2. If the selected manufacturer does not produce a required paint product type, provide a 

paint system containing that product type produced by one of the other manufacturers 

listed below. Do not mix products of different manufacturers in a single paint system 

unless authorized in writing by the finish coat paint manufacturer. 

C. Hazardous Content: Do not use paint or paint products containing lead, cadmium, zinc or 

strontium chromates or mercury. 

E. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer’s product identification will not be 

acceptable. 

2.2 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCTS- PAINTS AND STAINS 

A. Basis of design products are scheduled below. 



PAINTING

B. Paint systems for which no basis- of – design product has been selected are scheduled by 

paint type below with a list of acceptable products. 

C. Substitutions of products other than the basis of design product or from another manufacturer 

not listed where no basis of design product has been selected may be allowed if the Architect 

determines that the proposed products are of comparable tested quality to those products 

specified herein. Qualities as tested by appropriate industry methods include the following: 

Percent solids by volume. 

Square foot coverage at the scheduled dry film thickness (DFT) in mils. 

Quantitative material analysis: percent resin binder and percent titanium dioxide. 

Abrasion resistance. 

Flexibility. 

Washability. 

Accelerated weathering. 

Alkali and mildew resistance. 

Interior Paint Systems: Low odor and volume of volatile organic content (VOC) in grams per 

liter. 

2.3 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCTS- INTERIOR OPAQUE PAINT FINISHES 

A. Low VOC Opaque Latex Paint Finishes: 

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). Pristine Eco Spec (interior low-odor/ low-voc) and 

low-odor/ low-voc primer. 

B. Equivalent products as indicated below are acceptable. 

1. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). HealthSpec Low Odor (interior low odor/ low VOC). 

2. ICI Dulux (ICI).Latex Paints: ICI Lifemaster 2000 (interior low odor/low VOC). 

2.4 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCTS- TRANSPARENT PAINT FINISHES 

A. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). 

1. Interior Oil Stain: Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain. 

2. Clear Coating: Wood Classics Interior Polyurethane Varnish Gloss 

2.5 COLOR AND GLOSS 

A. Colors of finish coats are scheduled on the drawings. 

B. The tinting base for finish coats shall be only as recommended by paint manufacturer for the 

color tones selected. 

C. Proprietary Names Used in the Color Schedule: Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product 

names to designate colors is not intended to imply that products named are required to be 

used to the exclusion of matching colors available from other listed manufacturers. 



PAINTING

D. Gloss levels of finish coats are scheduled in Part 3 below. Gloss of finish coats is scheduled 

on the drawings. 

2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not 

specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; of commercial quality. 

B. Patching Materials: Latex filler. 

C. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting 

will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements of this section and the 

paint product manufacturer. 

B. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces 

receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 

C. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions 

within a particular area. 

D. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure 

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on 

characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 

E. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates 

primed by others. 

F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply 

finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 

Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 

Concrete: 12 percent. 

Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 

Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 

G. Measure pH of the substrate surfaces. Do not apply finishes unless alkalinity level is below 

the maximum allowed by the paint product manufacturer. 


A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting 

fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is 

impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied 

protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of 

substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease 

before cleaning. 

2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process 



PAINTING

will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 

3. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using 

workers skilled in the trades involved. 

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's 

written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 

C. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced 

cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and 

release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used 

to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 

1. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. 

2. Allow cast-in-place concrete, portland cement and gypsum plaster, veneer plaster and 

other field cured substrates at least 30 days to cure before coating. 

3. Determine alkalinity of substrates by performing appropriate tests. If alkalinity exceeds 

manufacturer’s recommendation for the primer correct this condition before application. 

D. Existing Natural Finish Wood Ceiling and Trims: Sand raised grain or splintered surfaces 

using 120 grit sandpaper. Remove remnants of previous finish. 

E. New Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral 

spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 

1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or 

other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and 

imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when 

dried. 

2. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, 

faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and 

paneling. 

3. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 

4. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall 

construction occurs on backside. 

5. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish 

or sealer immediately on delivery. 

F. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; 

remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or 

mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's 

(SSPC) recommendations. 

1. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according 

to requirements of SSPC-SP 6. 

2. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat 

before priming. 

3. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. 



PAINTING

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up 

with the same primer as the shop coat. 

G. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or 

high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching 

primer immediately following cleaning. 

H. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after 

repair. 

I. Interior Zinc-coated Surfaces: Preparation: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash 

with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. 

3.2 MATERIALS PREPARATION 

A. Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of 

foreign materials and residue. 

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required 

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface 

film and strain material before using. 

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 

B. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when 

multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the 

finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each 

separate coat. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and 

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions 

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 

B. Extent of Painting 

1. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, 

grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, 

to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed 

surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently 

fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 

3. Paint interior surfaces of unlined ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible 

through registers or grilles. 

4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed 

surfaces. 

5. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment 

before installing equipment. 



PAINTING

6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 

7. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 

C. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

D. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or 

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent 

surface deterioration. 

E. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application 

method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by 

the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to 

manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 

F. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional 

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to 

ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness 

equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 

G. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat 

surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under 

moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the 

undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 

H. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other 

applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate 

size for the surface or item being painted. 

Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the 

manufacturer for the material and texture required. 

Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the 

manufacturer for the material and texture required. 

I. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's 

recommended spreading rate. {Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as 

recommended by the manufacturer.} 

J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended 

by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not 

been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction 

spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or 

other defects due to insufficient sealing. 

K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, 

opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, 

holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be 

acceptable. 

L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of 

even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, 

orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 

M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, 

refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 



PAINTING


A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often 

as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded 

paint materials from the site. 

B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint 

by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 


A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. 

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective 

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS 

A. Gypsum Board: Acrylic-Enamel Finish. 

1. Primer: Latex-based, low VOC, low odor, interior primer applied at spreading rate 

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 

1.2 mils. 

2. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), low VOC, low odor, 

acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the 

manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils 

B. New Woodwork and Hardboard: Acrylic-Enamel Finish. 

1. Undercoat: Low VOC, low odor, acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as 

recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate 


1.2 mils. 

2. First and Second Coats: Low VOC, low odor, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at 

spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness 

of not less than 2.6 mils. 

C. New Natural-Finish Woodwork: Waterborne, Satin-Varnish Finish: Wipe wood filler before 

applying stain. 

1. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

2. Stain: One application of Basis- of- Design oil stain. 

3. First and Second Finish Coats: Polyurethane varnish applied at spreading rate 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

D. Refinishing of Existing Natural-Finished Ceiling and Trims. 



PAINTING

1. Prepare surfaces as described above. 

2. Conditioner: Apply pre-stain conditioner: Minwax Water Based Pre-Stain Wood 

Conditioner or equal. Follow up with a light sanding pass using the 120 grit paper. 

3. Stain: Apply a wipe off water based stain: Minwax ® Water Based Wood Stain- white 

base. 

4. Topcoat: Apply low sheen polycrylic topcoat: Polycrylic Protective Finish Semi-Gloss 

Qt 64444 

E. Ferrous Metal: Acrylic-Enamel Finish 

1. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, low VOC, low odor, epoxy-metal primer, as 

recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate 


1.5 mils 



of not less than 2.5 mils 

F. Zinc-Coated Metal: Acrylic-Enamel Finish 

1. 2 coats over a primer. 

2. Primer: Low VOC, low odor, galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate 


1.2 mils 



of not less than 2.5 mils 




PAINTING

SECTION 102123 - CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK 



A. Overhead cubicle curtain and track. 


A. Section 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS: Suspended ceiling system to support 

track. 


A. Track: Support vertical test load of 50 lbs without visible deflection of track or damage to 

supports. 

B. Track Size: Safely support moving loads. 

C. Track and Mounting: Sufficiently rigid to resist visible deflection and without permanent set. 


A. Shop Drawings: Indicate a reflected ceiling plan view of curtain track, hangers and suspension 

points, attachment details, schedule of curtain sizes. 

1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Submit under provisions of Section 017000. 


2.1 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCT – CUBICLE CURTAIN 

A. Product indicated on the drawings is a product of Maharam. 

1. Model and color: Sentiment 511430 Privacy Curtain manufactured by. Color Sunlight. 

2. Width: 72 inches. 

B. Subject to the requirements of this Section products of one of the following manufacturer’s may 

also be acceptable. 

C. Curtain Material. Trevira polyester with 3/8 inch post consumer content. 

2.2 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCT – CURTAIN TRACK 

A.. 

Product scheduled on drawings is a product of InPro Corporation. 

1. Optitrac Cubicle Tracking System. 

B. Provide the Basis- Of- Design Product or a similar product of one of the following 

manufacturers subject to the requirements of this section. 

1. O.B. Masco / Kirsch 

2. A. R. Nelson Company (Arnco). 

3. Salsbury Industries. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 102123 - 1 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK

C. Materials 

1. Curtain Track: Extruded aluminum sections; one piece per cubicle track run; 

2. Accessories: Curtain track end stop, Tees, and Y's: To fit track section. 

3. Curtain Carriers: Nylon roller to accurately fit track; designed to eliminate bind 

when curtain is pulled; fitted to curtain to prevent accidental curtain removal. 

4. Provide curtain pull wand. 

D. Fabrication: Fabricate track bend with minimum 12 inch radius, without deforming track 

section, or impeding movement of carriers. 


3.1 EXAMINATION - GENERAL 

A. Verify that surfaces and above ceiling supports are ready to receive work. 

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, with track in alignment, straight and in 

smooth curves. Adjust for smooth operation. 

B. Install curtain track secure and rigid, true to ceiling line. 

C. Remove burrs and wipe clean all cut ends. 

D. Install end cap and stop device. 



CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 102123 - 2 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK

SECTION 102600 - WALL PROTECTION AND CORNER GUARDS 



A. Impact resistant wall coverings, and door frame protection. 

B. Wall Guards, Corner Guards, Chair Rails. 


A. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board Systems: Concealed in-wall plates for attachment of work of 

this section. 


A. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 

B. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide impact resistant vinyl sheets conforming with the 

NFPA Class A fire rating. Surface burning characteristics, as determined by UL-723 for sheet 

material installed with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive shall be flame spread of 10 or 

less and smoke development of 250 or less. 


A. Submit Product Data under provisions of Section 013300. Indicate physical dimensions, 

features, wall mounting brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, and rough-in 

measurements. 

B. Samples: Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit 

indicated. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size 

indicated below. 

1. Wall and Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, 

top caps, and field splices. 

2. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches square. 


A. Coordinate work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor 

devices. 


A. Furnish under provisions of Section 017700. 

B. Provide three percent of each color, pattern, and type of wall covering. Furnish full width 

material in one roll increments but not less than one full roll of each type, pattern, and color. 



WALL PROTECTION & 

CORNER GUARDS

C. Package and label each roll by manufacturer, color and pattern, and destination room number; 

store where directed. 


2.1 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCTS - IMPACT RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS, AND DOOR 

FRAME PROTECTION. 

A. Impact resistant products: Are scheduled on drawings. 

B. Equal products by Koroguard and IPC, meeting the design intent of color, pattern, texture, and 

size may be acceptable. 

1. Thickness: 0.040 inch. 

C. Accessories: Provide accessories to provide for a complete installation including top cap where 

wainscot top edge is not terminated with a rail, formed inside corners and vertical trim, and for 

butt seams. Provide accessories in matching color to wall covering. 

2.2 BASIS- OF- DESIGN PRODUCTS - CORNER GUARDS & END GUARDS 

A. Products indicated on the drawings are Acrovyn as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. 

Subject to the requirements of this Section products of one of the following manufacturer’s may 

also be acceptable. 

1. Balco, Inc. 

2. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. 

3. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International Corporation. 

B. Corner Guard: Surface mounted. Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over 

continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to 

match wall condition; heights as indicated on the drawings. Provide matching top and bottom 

closure caps. 

1. Minimum Requirements: 

a. Impact resistance of 350 ft. lbs. psi conforming to ASTM D 256. 

b. Flame spread requirement of 25 for Class I rating in accordance with tunnel test 

ASTM E 84. 

C. Chair Rail: Surface mounted meeting minimum requirements for corner guards. 

2.2 ADHESIVES 

A. Recommended by manufacturer. Provide low odor low volatile organic compound adhesives for 

all site applied adhesive. 

2.3 FABRICATION 

A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. 

B. Pre-drill holes for attachment. 

C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. 




CORNER GUARDS

PART 3 

EXECUTION 


A. Verify site conditions and the rough-in components are correctly sized and located. 

B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready for prime painting, and conform to requirements of the 

wall covering manufacturer. 

C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply 

coverings unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 

1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 

D. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a 

rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft. 


A. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. 

B. Wash impervious surfaces with trisodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. 

C. Remove electrical, telephone, and wall plates and covers. 


A. Install wall protection and door frame protection and adhesives in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions, for each type of substrate (ie concrete, gypsum board, metal door 

frame, etc) 

B. Apply adhesives immediately prior to application of wall covering. Let contact adhesive set 

tack free. 

C. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. 

D. Apply wall covering in full sheets to avoid having seams. 

E. Do not seam within 4 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. 

F. Install wall protection before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached to or 

spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of 

resilient base. 

G. Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe 

clean with dry cloth. 

H. Install wall guard, corner guard, and chair rail components in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean only with products and by methods recommended by product manufacturer 





CORNER GUARDS

SECTION 102800 - TOILET AND CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES 



A. Contractor supplied and installed accessories. 

B. Owner supplied, contractor installed accessories. 


A. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sheet metal blocking in partition walls for 

concealed support of accessories. 

B. Division 15- Mechanical: Pipe protection at accessible lavatories. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, 

profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of 

accessory specified. 

B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation 

instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. 

C. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 

Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 


A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and 

for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 

1. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged 

solely by Architect, may be provided. 

a. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with 

Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive 

explanatory data to Architect for review. 


A. Americans with Disabilities Act: Products and installation specified in this Section shall 

conform to the requirements indicated in the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility 

Guidelines (ADAAG) including but not necessarily limited to: 

1. Mounting Heights: ADAAG chapter 4.27. 

2. Accessory operation and controls: ADAAG paragraph 4.1.6(1)(a). 

3. Surface mounted accessory projection into the path of travel: ADAAG chapter 4.4. 

4. Grab bar size and mounting: ADAAG chapter 4.26. 

5. Mirrors: ADAAG paragraph 4.19.6. 


A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required 

for access by disabled persons in accordance with ADAAG. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 102800 - 1 TOILET AND CUSTODIAL 

ACCESSORIES

B. Deliver concealed backing plates for insertion into partition construction as required to prevent 

delaying the Work. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other 

rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in 

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements 

of the Contract Documents. 

B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing 

to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period 

indicated. 

1. Other warranty periods are available from some manufacturers. Modify warranty period 

below to suit products selected. 

2. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS- TOILET ACCESSORIES 

A. Products scheduled below are products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

B. Products by the following manufacturers may be acceptable subject to the requirements of this 

section and similar appearance in the judgment of the Architect. 

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 

2. American Specialties, Inc. 

3. Bradley Corporation. 

4. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 

5. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum 

nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 . 

C. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel 

plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. 

D. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with 

silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD- 

M-411. 

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft 

resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 

G. Mounting plates and brackets: Manufacturer’s standard for grab bar installation 



ACCESSORIES



A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate 

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and 

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

B. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to 

method in ASTM F 446. 


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function 

properly. Replace damaged or defective items. 

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. 

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 

3.3 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE As scheduled on the drawings. 




ACCESSORIES

SECTION 104416 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. The work includes providing portable fire extinguishers to afford 100% complete fire protection 

coverage throughout the indicated areas. The design, equipment, materials, installation, and 

workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of 

NFPA 10, except as modified herein. 

B. The fire extinguisher installation shall include all materials, accessories, and equipment 

necessary to provide a system complete and ready for use. Design and installation of the 

system shall be with full consideration physical obstructions, furniture, and equipment. 

Portable fire extinguishers shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or 

approved by FM Approvals (FM). In the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, 

as though the word “shall” had been substituted for “should” wherever it appears. Reference 

to the “authority having jurisdiction” shall be interpreted to mean the Building Department 

and Fire Department. Reference to the “Building Department” on the drawings and herein 

shall be interpreted to mean the City and County of Honolulu Department of Planning and 

Permitting; reference to the “Fire Department” shall be interpreted to mean the Honolulu Fire 

Department. “Provide” shall mean “furnish and install” when used herein. The work shall 

begin at the points indicated. 

1.2 CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS 

A. The latest publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are 

referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 

1. FM Global: 

FM AG 

(Update Online) Approval Guide 

2. National Fire Protection Association: 

NFPA 10 

(2010) Portable Fire Extinguishers 

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 

UL FPED 

(2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory 

B. Installation of all work in this section shall be made in accordance with State Department of 

Health Regulations, the National Fire Protection Association, the International Building Code, 

and the Uniform Fire Code. 

C. All applicable codes, regulations and ordinances of public bodies having jurisdiction are 

considered a part of these specifications. All work installed and materials provided must 

comply with the current edition of such codes, regulations, and ordinances. 

1.3 CONTRACT DRAWINGS 

A. Contract drawings are essentially diagrammatic, indicating general layout and approximate 

locations toward establishing the scope for a uniform estimating basis for all bidders. They 

are not intended to be detailed construction working drawings. Reasonable modifications to 

indicated locations and arrangement to suit job conditions shall not constitute basis for 

requesting additional funds from the Owner. 

B. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and 

proper relation of his or her work to the structure and to the work of all trades. The 

Contractor shall visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself or herself with all 



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


details of the work and notify the Architect-Engineer of any discrepancy before performing 

any work. 

A. General: Partial submittals will not be acceptable. The Architect-Engineer will review and 

approve all submittals. Contractor shall check the submittals and shop drawings and certify 

that they are correct and in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications. Submit 

6 copies for approval. 

B. Manufacturer's Published Data: 

1. As soon as practicable and before installation of any materials or equipment is begun, the 

Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment together with names 

and addresses of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and trade names to the Architect- 

Engineer for approval. 

2. Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item the 

Contractor proposes to furnish. 

3. Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer's published rating. Any materials 

and equipment that are not in accordance with these specifications may be rejected. 

4. UL FPED or FM AG sheets showing the manufacturer and specific model of fire 

extinguisher the Contractor proposes to furnish. 

1.5 OMISSIONS 

A. It is the intent of the plans and specifications to provide a complete installation. Should there be 

omissions, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Architect-Engineer to such omissions 

15 days in advance of the date of bid opening so that the necessary corrections can be made. 


A. Furnish new equipment, materials and accessories bearing the manufacturer's identification. 

Coordinate deliveries to avoid interference or construction delays. Protect products during 

delivery, storage, installation and the remainder of the contract period after installation. 

1.7 GUARANTEE AND CERTIFICATE 

A. Contractor and Installer shall guarantee and certify in writing all work in this section for a 

period of one year. Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to any part of premises 

during equipment installation work under this section. 

B. The entire fire extinguisher installation described hereinafter shall be guaranteed as a complete 

working unit for a period of one year. In the event of failure due to faulty workmanship or 

materials during this period, all said failures shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the 

Architect-Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner for labor and material. 

C. The above guarantee shall not be interpreted as voiding, limiting, or reducing any equipment 

manufacturer's warranty or any guarantee permitted by law. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Asbestos-containing materials or equipment shall not be used under this section. The 

Contractor shall insure that all materials and equipment incorporated in the project are asbestosfree. 



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

B. All materials shall be new, of equal or better quality of materials specified. For ease of 

maintenance and parts replacement, select equipment from a single manufacturer as much as 

possible. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Portable fire extinguishers: Provide UL rated 3A:40B:C, nominal 6 lb, multipurpose dry 

chemical fire extinguisher with red powder coated steel cylinder. Provide Potter Roemer 

3006 or approved equal. Provide with completed inspection tags. 

B. Mounting bracket: Provide heavy gauge, polyester coated, steel mounting brackets for 

surface mounted fire extinguishers. Potter Roemer or approved equal. 


3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct 

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. Do not proceed until 

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 


A. Install portable fire extinguisher with operating instructions facing outward. 

B. Install fire extinguisher 27 inches maximum above finished floor measured to the bottom of 

the fire extinguisher cylinder and 48 inches maximum above finished floor measured to the 

top of the operating handle. 




FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

SECTION 134900 - RADIATION PROTECTION 



A. Lead sheet, strip, and plate. 

B. Lead glass. 

C. Lead-lined building materials and products including the following: 

1. Wood doors. 

2. Hollow metal Door and observation-window frames. 

3. Gypsum Wallboard. 

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Referenced Document: Physicist’s Report, attached. 

B. Section 087100 "Door Hardware". 

C. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for metal framing and furring for lead-lined gypsum board 

and for finishing materials, accessories, and trim applied to lead-lined gypsum board. 

D. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field finishing doors and frames. 


A. Lead Equivalence: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation (reduction of 

radiation passing through) as the material in question under the specified conditions. 

1. Lead equivalence specified for materials used in diagnostic x-ray rooms is as 

measured at 100 kV unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Provide materials and workmanship, including joints and fasteners, that maintain continuity 

of radiation protection at all points and in all directions equivalent to materials specified in 

thicknesses and locations indicated. 

1. Materials, thicknesses, and configurations indicated are based on radiation protection 

design prepared by Owner's radiation health physicist. See attached referenced 

physicist’s report. 

B. Lead-Lined Assemblies: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead thickness in doors, door 

frames, window frames, penetration shielding, joint strips, film transfer cabinets, and other 

items located in lead-lined assemblies not less than that indicated for assemblies in which 

they are installed. 

C. Lead Glazing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead equivalence not less than that 

indicated for assembly in which glazing is installed. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 134900-1 RADIATION PROTECTION



B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of radiation-protected areas. Indicate lead thickness or lead 

equivalence of components. Show components and installation conditions not fully 

dimensioned or detailed in product data. 

1. Show ducts, pipes, conduit, and other objects that penetrate radiation protection; 

include details of penetrations. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 

D. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of observation windows, doors and frames prepared by 

or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and 

openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

B. Field quality-control reports. 

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of radiation protection product from single source 

from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Comply with Section 081113 "Hollow Metal 

Doors and Frames" and Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors". 

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review methods and procedures related to radiation protection including, but not 

limited to, the following: 

a. Sequence and schedule of radiation protection work in relation to other work. 

b. Supplementary lead shielding at duct, pipe, and conduit penetrations of 

radiation protection. 

c. Methods of attaching other construction and equipment to lead-lined finishes. 

d. Notification procedures for work that requires modifying radiation protection. 



e. Requirements for field quality control. 


A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Panels: Neatly stack panels flat to prevent deformation. 

B. Lead-Lined Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with requirements in Section 081113 "Hollow 

Metal Doors and Frames" for delivery, storage, and handling. 

C. Lead-Lined Steel Doors and Frames: Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped or crated 

to provide protection during delivery and storage. Inspect for damage on delivery. Minor 

damage may be repaired provided the refinished repair matches new work and is approved 

by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. 

D. Lead-Lined Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in Section 081416 "Flush Wood 

Doors" for delivery, storage, and handling. 

E. Lead-Lined Wood Doors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and 

requirements in WDMA I.S.1-A. 

1. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic 

sheeting. 

2. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install radiation protection until spaces are 

enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC 

system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at 

occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before 

fabrication. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Wood Doors: If any door becomes defective after installation, door manufacturer agrees to 

bear the reasonable expense of repairs, rework, machining, finishing, removing and 

rehanging such repairs. 

1. Period: Lifetime of the original installation. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Lead Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM B 749, alloy UNS No. L51121 (chemical-copper lead). 

B. Lead Glass: Lead-barium, polished float glass containing not less than 60 percent heavy 

metal oxides, including not less than 48 percent lead oxide by weight. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited 

to, the following: 



a. Amerope Enterprises, Inc. 

b. McGrory Glass, Inc. 

c. Schott North America, Inc. 

2. Safety Glass: Fully tempered float glass. 

a. Lead-barium, polished float glass; thickness as indicated. 

C. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch- thick gypsum board complying with Section 092900 

"Gypsum Board," of width and length required for support spacing and to prevent cracking 

during handling, and with a single sheet of lead laminated to the back of the board. 

1. Provide lead sheet lining the full width of board and length necessary to extend from 

floor to 84 inches above floor. 

2. Provide 3-inchwide lead strips for wrapping metal stud flanges. 

3. Provide 2-inchwide lead strips for backing joints. 

4. Provide 5/16-inch lead disks for covering screw heads. 

5. Provide lead-headed nails for fastening gypsum board, accessories, and trim to wood 

members. 

D. Accessories and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard fasteners and accessories as 

required for installation, maintaining same lead equivalence as rest of system. 

E. Asphalt Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

F. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226. 

2.2 LEAD-LINED STEEL HOLLOW-METAL DOOR FRAMES 

A. General: Steel door frames complying with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861, except 0.0667 

inch thick, and lined with lead sheet of thickness not less than that required for doors and 

walls where frames are used. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited 

to, the following: 

a. Aaccurate Radiation Shielding, Inc. 

b. A & L Shielding Inc. 

c. Deronde Products. 

d. El Dorado Metals, Inc. 

e. Fluke Biomedical; Radiation Management Services. 

f. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 



g. Mayco Industries; a Metalico company. 

h. NELCO, Inc. 

i. New Shield. 

j. Radiation Protection Products, Inc. 

k. Ray-Bar Engineering Corp. 

2. Provide additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately carry the weight 

of lead-lined doors. Install reinforcements and supports before installing lead lining. 

3. Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the head, 

lapping the stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware. 

Fabricate lead lining wide enough to maintain an effective lap with lead of adjacent 

shielding. 

4. Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and 

pretreating. 

2.3 LEAD-LINED WOOD DOORS 

A. Wood Door Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain 

of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 

B. General: Flush solid-core wood doors with lead lining, thickness not less than that required 

for partition in which door is installed. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 

the following: 

a. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Div. 

b. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 

c. NELCO, Inc. 

d. Vancouver Door Company. 

e. VT Industries Inc. 

2. Door Construction: 

a. Veneer face, five ply, bonded structural composite lumber core. 

b. Lead Lining: One or more continuous sheets of lead extending from top to 

bottom and edge to edge, constructed either in the core or between the core and 

faces, at manufacturer's option. 

3. Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 

a. Grade: Premium. 

4. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option, for opaque finish. 



5. Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used in door. Lap lining 

of cutouts with door lining. 

6. Provide lead-lined astragals for pairs of doors. 

7. Factory fit doors to suit frame openings indicated with 1/16-inch clearance at heads 

and jambs and minimum clearance at bottom. Factory machine doors for hardware 

not surface applied. 

2.4 LEAD-LINED OBSERVATION-WINDOW FRAMES 

A. General: Fabricate from 0.043-inch- thick, formed-steel sheet or 0.064-inch- thick aluminum 

extrusions with mitered corners, welded or bolted with concealed fasteners. 

1. Line with lead sheet formed to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and 

across head and sill, lapping the stops, and fabricated wide enough to maintain an 

effective lap with lead of adjoining assemblies. 

2. Construct so lead lining overlaps glazing material perimeter by at least 3/8 inch and 

provide removable stops. 

3. Form sill with an opening for sound transmission. Offset sound passage to make 

opening lightproof and to maintain required lead equivalence at all points and in all 

directions. 

2.5 DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FABRICATION 

A. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive templated mortised 

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the 

Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door 

Hardware." 



A. Examine substrates in areas to receive radiation protection, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting 

performance of radiation protection. 


C. Concrete Surfaces: Proceed with installation only after surfaces are clean, dry, and free of 

depressions and sharp projections that could damage or penetrate lead sheet. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED GYPSUM 

A. Install with long edge parallel to supports and lead lining facing supports. Provide blocking 

at end joints. 

B. Fastening to Metal Supports: Use steel drill screws spaced as recommended in writing by 

gypsum board manufacturer. Install lead strips covering face of framing and wrap around 

flange to cover points of screws. 



1. Where possible, install lead-lined gypsum board before installing gypsum board on 

other side of partition, and do not fold lead strips back over inside of flange until after 

lead-lined gypsum board is applied. 

2. Apply lead disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws securing 

trim. 

C. Fastening to Metal Supports: Use steel drill screws spaced as recommended in writing by 

gypsum board manufacturer. Apply lead disks over screw heads and recess flush with 

surface of board. 

1. Install lead strips, 1-1/2 inches wide minimum and same thickness as lead lining, to 

face of supports and blocking where joints occur. Secure lead strips with construction 

adhesive. Provide shims at intermediate supports. 

2. Apply lead disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws securing 

trim. 

D. Fastening to Wood Supports: Use lead-headed nails spaced as recommended in writing by 

gypsum board manufacturer. Drill pilot holes to prevent deforming nails or distorting board. 

Drive nail heads slightly below exposed surface. 

1. Install lead strips, 1-1/2 inches wide minimum and same thickness as lead lining, to 

face of supports and blocking where joints occur. Secure lead strips with construction 

adhesive. Provide shims at intermediate supports. 

2. Fasten accessories and trim to wood supports with lead-headed nails as specified 

above for fastening gypsum board. 

E. Two-Layer System: Apply a facing sheet of gypsum board vertically over base sheet using 

laminating adhesive recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer. Offset joints 

in finish layer from joints in base layer and fasten at top and bottom of sheet to support finish 

panel until adhesive has set. 

1. Locate fasteners above ceiling or behind wall base and cover fasteners with lead disks 

recessed flush with surface of board. 

F. Openings: Extend lead-lined gypsum board into frames of openings, lapping lead lining with 

lead frames or frame linings at least 1 inch. Arrange board around openings so neither 

horizontal nor vertical joints occur at corners of openings. 

G. Install control and expansion joints where indicated, with appropriate trim accessories. 

Install lead strip on face of framing, extending across joint, and lap with lead lining of 

gypsum board. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES 

A. Install lead-lined wood doors according to Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors." 

B. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with door 




C. Frames: Comply with HMMA 840 unless otherwise indicated. Except for frames located in 

existing walls or partitions, place frames before constructing walls. Set frames accurately in 

position, plumb, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. 

1. Provide three anchors per jamb, located adjacent to hinge on hinge jamb and at 

corresponding heights on strike jamb. 

2. In masonry construction, use wire or T-strap anchors and apply a coat of asphalt 

mastic or paint to lead lining where lead will come in contact with masonry or grout. 

3. In metal stud construction, use wall anchors attached to studs with screws. 

D. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch. 

E. Lead Lining of Frames: Line inside of frames with lead of thickness not less than that 

required in doors and walls where frames are used. Form lead to match frame contour, 

continuous in each jamb and across the head, lapping the stops. Form lead shields around 

areas prepared to receive hardware. Lap lining over lining in walls at least 1 inch. 

F. Install doors in frames level and plumb, aligned with frames and with uniform clearance at 

each edge. 

G. Line astragals with lead sheet. 

H. Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons, and plates to provide effective shielding at cutouts and 

penetrations of frames and doors. See Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for other 

installation requirements. 

I. Touch up damaged finishes with compatible coating after sanding smooth. 

J. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. Check and readjust 

operating hardware items, leaving doors and frames undamaged and in proper operating 

condition. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED OBSERVATION WINDOWS 

A. Install observation windows according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

1. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in frames where lead will come 

in contact with masonry or grout. 

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, and anchored securely in place to 

structural support. 

C. Install leaded side of frame on radiation side of wall. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in 

walls at least 1 inch. 

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with 


3.5 INSTALLATION OF PENETRATING ITEMS 

A. At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields to maintain continuity of protection. 



B. Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields, and other protection in thickness not less than that 

required in assembly being penetrated. 

C. Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating fasteners unless 

indicated on Drawings. 

D. Outlet Boxes and Conduit: Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining at 

least 1 inch. Wrap conduit with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 inches from box. 

E. Duct Openings: Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for distance 

from partition/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening dimension. Lap lead sheet 

with adjacent lead lining at least 1 inch. 

F. Piping: Unless otherwise indicated, wrap piping with lead sheet for a distance of not less 

than 10 inches from point of penetration. 


A. A radiation protection survey of the finished room shall be performed by Owner’s qualified 

medical physicist within six months after installation of the x-ray equipment. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that inspection reports 

indicate does not comply with specified requirements. 


A. Lock radiation-protected rooms once doors and locks are installed and limit access to only 

those persons performing work in the rooms. 




SECTION 211313 – AUTOMATIC WET-PIPE FIRE SPRINKLERS 


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. The work includes modification of an existing automatic wet pipe sprinkler system to afford 

100% complete fire protection coverage throughout the indicated areas. The design, equipment, 

materials, installation, and workmanship of the sprinkler system shall be in strict accordance 

with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13, except as modified herein. 

B. The sprinkler system shall include all materials, accessories, and equipment necessary to 

provide a system complete and ready for use. Design and installation of the system shall be 

with full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork, and all other 

construction and equipment to afford complete coverage. Devices and equipment for fire 

protection service shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or approved by 

FM Approvals (FM). In the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publications 

referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the 

word “shall” had been substituted for “should” wherever it appears. Reference to the 

“authority having jurisdiction” shall be interpreted to mean the Building Department and Fire 

Department. Reference to the “Building Department” on the drawings and herein shall be 

interpreted to mean the City and County of Honolulu Department of Planning and Permitting; 

reference to the “Fire Department” shall be interpreted to mean the Honolulu Fire 

Department. “Provide” shall mean “furnish and install” when used herein. The work shall 

begin at the points indicated. 

1.2 CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS 

A. The latest publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are 

referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 

1. ASTM International: 

A 53 

Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded 

and Seamless 

A 135 

A 795 

Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe 

Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded 

and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use 

2. FM Global: 

FM AG 

(Update Online) Approval Guide 

3. National Fire Protection Association: 

NFPA 13 

(2010) Installation of Sprinkler Systems 

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc: 

UL FPED 

(2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory 

UL FRD 

(2012) Fire Resistance Directory 

B. Installation of all work in this section shall be made in accordance with State Department of 

Health Regulations, the National Fire Protection Association, the International Building Code, 

and the Uniform Fire Code. 

C. All applicable codes, regulations and ordinances of public bodies having jurisdiction are 

considered a part of these specifications. All work installed and materials provided must 

comply with the current edition of such codes, regulations, and ordinances. 




AUTOMATIC WET-PIPE 

FIRE SPRINKLERS


locations toward establishing the scope for a uniform estimating basis for all bidders. They 

are not intended to be detailed construction working drawings. 

B. Piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted. Reasonable modifications to indicated 

locations and arrangement to suit job conditions shall not constitute basis for requesting 

additional funds from the Owner. 

C. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and 

proper relation of his or her work to the structure and to the work of all trades. The 

Contractor shall visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself or herself with all 

details of the work and notify the Architect-Engineer of any discrepancy before performing 

any work. 


A. Manufacturer's Published Data: 

1. As soon as practicable and before installation of any materials or equipment is begun, the 

Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment together with names 

and addresses of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and trade names to the Architect- 

Engineer for approval. 

2. Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item the 

Contractor proposes to furnish. 

3. Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer's published rating. Any materials 

and equipment that are not in accordance with these specifications may be rejected. 

B. Certificates of Compliance: 

1. Contractor's material and test certificates for aboveground piping per NFPA 13. 

2. Pipe and fittings. 

C. Record Drawings: Upon completion of work, submit accurate as-built drawings to the 

Architect-Engineer. Show exact locations and sizes, as actually installed, of the fire sprinkler 

systems on these record “as-built” drawings. 

1.5 OMISSIONS 

A. It is the intent of the plans and specifications to provide a complete installation. Should there be 

omissions, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Architect-Engineer to such omissions 

15 days in advance of the date of bid opening so that the necessary corrections can be made. 




delivery, storage, installation and the remainder of the contract period after installation. 

B. Pipe and fittings shall be stored on pallets or blocks a minimum 2 inches above the ground to 

prevent foreign material from entering piping prior to installation. Pipe ends shall be capped 

to prevent dirt, water, or other residue from entering. 





FIRE SPRINKLERS

A. Contractor and Installer shall guarantee and certify in writing all work in this section for a 

period of one year. Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to any part of premises 

during equipment installation work under this section. 

B. The entire fire protection installation described hereinafter shall be guaranteed as a complete 

working unit for a period of one year. In the event of failure due to faulty workmanship or 

materials during this period, all said failures shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the 

Architect-Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner for labor and material. 

C. The one-year guarantee shall start at the end of 30 consecutive days of trouble-free operation 

after acceptance by the Owner. 

D. The above guarantee shall not be interpreted as voiding, limiting, or reducing any equipment 



2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Asbestos-containing materials or equipment shall not be used under this section. The 

Contractor shall insure that all materials and equipment incorporated in the project are asbestosfree. 

B. All materials shall be new, of equal or better quality of materials specified. For ease of 

maintenance and parts replacement, select equipment from a single manufacturer as much as 

possible. 

C. All devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL listed or FM approved. 

2.2 DESIGN OF SPRINKLER SYSTEM 

A. Hazard Classification shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and as indicated on contract 

drawings. 

B. Location and spacing of sprinklers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. Sprinklers shall be 

spaced uniformly on branch lines. 

C. Provide a design which is complete in all regards including, but not necessarily limited to: 

1. Overhead wet pipe automatic sprinkler system including piping and sprinkler heads in 

accordance with NFPA 13. 

2. Testing 

D. Arrangement: Conceal piping in areas with finished ceilings. 

E. Sprinkler spacing and pipe sizes shall follow existing installation. Contractor shall submit 

hydraulic calculations if greater sprinkler spacing or smaller pipe sizes are installed. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES 

A. Fire Sprinklers: 

1. Provide automatic closed head sprinklers as indicated on contract drawings. New 

sprinklers shall not be equipped with O-ring seals. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FM 

approved. 




FIRE SPRINKLERS

2. Provide a metal cabinet with spare sprinkler heads, 3 sprinkler stoppers, and one sprinkler 

head wrench in the fire sprinkler riser room. The quantity and types of spare sprinkler 

heads shall be provided as specified in NFPA 13. Label spare cabinet with location(s) 

fire sprinklers are installed. 

B. Valve Tamper Switches: Provide switches for existing OS&Y gate valves with circuit opener 

for automatic transmittal of a supervisory signal to the fire alarm control panel. Connect to 

building fire alarm system unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. 

C. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper 

installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect-Engineer. 

2.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS 

A. Pipe: Provide in accordance with NFPA 13, except that all piping shall be steel. Pipe sizes 

less than 2 1/2" in diameter shall be Schedule 40. Pipe sizes 2 1/2" and larger shall be 

Schedule 10 or 40. Plastic pipe and copper tubing shall not be permitted. 

B. Fittings: Fittings shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type, UL listed or FM approved 

for use in sprinkler systems. Fittings for pipe sizes 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 

threaded. Make changes in pipe sizes through standard tapered reducing pipe fittings. Use of 

bushings will not be permitted. Press-fit fittings, snap-fit fittings, U-bolt style mechanical 

tees, and plain-end fittings that utilize steel gripping devices to bite into pipe when pressure is 

applied will not be permitted. Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be 

polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe thread tape or pipe cement; apply on only on male 

threads. Welding shall be performed in the shop; field welding will not be permitted. 

C. Pipe Hangers: Provide hangers, supports, inserts, earthquake sway bracing, branch line 

restraint, and associated items to properly support fire sprinkler system piping in accordance 

with pertinent provisions of NFPA 13. Listed clamps shall be used to secure hanger, 

earthquake sway bracing, and restraint assemblies to metal building structural members, such 

as beams, trusses, and purlins; through bolts or other methods which require drilling or other 

means of removing portions of the metal structural element will not be permitted. Provide 

retaining straps for all beam clamps. Provide means to restrain the upward movement of 

piping at the last hanger, such as surge clips, on all branch lines and armovers for all sprinkler 

systems. Provide means to restrain the lateral movement of piping at the last hanger, such as 

sway bracing, on all branch lines and armovers for all sprinkler systems. Provide additional 

hangers to support the concentrated loads in piping between hangers, such as for flanged 

valves. 

D. Sway Bracing and Branch Line Restraints: Provide accordance with NFPA 13. 

E. Drain Piping: Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13. 

F. Pipe Sleeves: Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. 

Secure sleeves in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of 

sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. For 

pipe sizes 3 inches and smaller, provide pipe sleeves with a nominal diameter 2 inches larger 

than the pipe. For pipe sizes 4 inches and larger, provide pipe sleeves with a nominal 

diameter 4 inches larger than the diameter of the pipe. Firmly pack space with insulation and 

caulk at both ends of sleeve with a flexible, waterproof cement. For penetrations through fire 

rated walls, floor/ceiling, or roof assemblies, provide a UL listed through-penetration fire stop 

assembly for each penetration. Coring through concrete walls, floors, or roofs will be 




FIRE SPRINKLERS

permitted where coring will not weaken the structural strength of the wall, floor, or roof 

being cored; cores shall be smooth and shall not spall concrete. 

G. Escutcheon Plates: Provide approved one piece or split hinge type plates for piping passing 

through floors, walls, and ceilings in both exposed and concealed areas. Provide chromium 

plated metal plates where pipe passes through finished ceilings. Provide other plates of steel 

or cast iron with aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place with set screws or 

other approved positive means. 


3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct 

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. Do not proceed until 

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT 

A. The Contractor shall impair only sections of the sprinkler system where work is involved and 

the remainder of the system shall be kept in service. Prior to impairing the water supply to 

the existing sprinkler system, the Contractor shall comply with all provisions of Chapter 16, 

NFPA 1 2006 Edition and notify the Building Manager to receive instructions on any 

additional fire safety precautions that must be observed during the sprinkler system 

impairment. The Contractor is responsible for following these precautions during the entire 

impairment. When the system is restored to normal working order, the Contractor shall 

verify that all control valves are fully open. The maximum duration of sprinkler system 

impairment for areas impacted by this work shall be 8 hours. 


A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work 

of those trades for interface with the work of this section. 

B. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the approved design drawings and the 

requirements of the Fire Department, Building Department, and applicable governmental 

agencies. 

C. Equipment, material, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 

except as modified herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers. Keep 

the interior of new piping and existing piping affected by the Contractor's operations 

thoroughly clean of water and foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation 

by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close 

open ends of piping and fittings so that water and foreign matter will not enter the pipes or 

fittings. Inspect piping before placing into position. Piping shall be inspected, tested, and 

approved before covering or concealing. Seal both ends of penetrations through fire rated 

walls, floor/ceiling assemblies, and roof assemblies to maintain fire resistive integrity with 

UL listed through-penetration fire stop assembly. Sprinkler piping shall be supported from 

the building structure; sprinkler piping shall not be supported from sprinkler piping. 

D. Contractor shall center sprinkler heads in ceiling tiles as indicated on contract drawings. 

E. Provide earthquake sway bracing and branch line restraint in accordance with NFPA 13. 




FIRE SPRINKLERS

3.4 FIELD TESTING OF FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 

A. Preliminary Testing and Inspections: Field testing and inspections shall be witnessed by the 

Architect-Engineer. The fire sprinkler special inspector, if required by the Building 

Department, shall also witness field testing and inspections. Testing shall be performed in 

accordance with NFPA 13 and this specification. Testing shall be considered successful 

when accepted by the Architect-Engineer. Contractor shall schedule dates and time for 

inspections with the Architect-Engineer one week in advance. Inability of the Contractor to 

perform the scheduled test or inspection when the Architect-Engineer arrives at the job site 

shall constitute failure of the test or inspection. Contractor shall furnish appliances, 

equipment, instruments, connecting devices, two-way radios, and personnel for tests. Fire 

Sprinkler Contractor shall be present for all testing and inspections. 

1. Welded piping outlet inspection: Welded piping outlet shall be inspected for 

conformance with NFPA 13. The Architect-Engineer will check each welded outlet. 

Contractor shall schedule welded outlet inspection before hanging piping. Piping hung 

before being inspected by the Fire Sprinkler Special Inspector shall be removed by the 

Contractor to permit inspection. Piping found to be in non-conformance with NFPA 13 

shall be immediately removed from the job site. 

2. Perform in-service leak testing for new system piping installed by the Contractor. Piping 

above suspended ceilings shall be tested before installation of ceilings. Furnish test 

report to Architect-Engineer. In addition, provide hydrostatic testing of new sprinkler 

piping in the Existing Shell Space at 200 psig for a period of not less than 2 hours. 

3. Sprinkler system operational testing: Fire Sprinkler Installer and Fire Alarm Contractor 

shall be present and conduct all testing. Test alarms and other devices. Test existing 

waterflow and tamper switches servicing the areas of work. Tests on equipment shall be 

performed and include visual equipment checks to insure compliance. 

4. When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit signed and dated 

certificates, similar to those specified in NFPA 13 with a request for formal inspection 

and tests. 

B. Formal Inspection and Tests: The Fire Department and Building Department shall witness 

formal tests and approve the systems before they are accepted. The General Contractor shall 

submit the request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to the date the formal 

inspection is to take place. Experienced technicians regularly employed by the fire sprinkler 

installing contractors shall be present for the entire duration of the inspection. At this 

inspection, the installing contractor shall repeat any or all of the required tests as directed. 

Correct defects in the work provided by the installing contractors and perform additional tests 

until it has been demonstrated that systems comply with all contract requirements. 

Contractor shall furnish appliances, equipment, instruments, connecting devices, 2-way 

radios, and personnel for tests. 





FIRE SPRINKLERS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 

SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Provide complete interior water, plumbing and sanitary sewer systems. "Provide" shall mean 

"furnish and install" when used herein. Connect to utility systems at the 5 feet building line 

and as shown on drawings. 

B. Connect to the plumbing system, all fixtures and equipment which may be furnished by the 

State under another section of these specifications. 

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS 

A. General mechanical work as specified in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

B. Exterior excavation and backfill specified in Division 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION. 

C. Concrete work specified in Division 03 CONCRETE. 

D. Painting work specified in Division 09 FINISHES. 

E. Electrical work specified in Division 26 ELECTRICAL. 

F. Pipe insulation specified in Section 230700 HVAC INSULATION for all piping specified in 

this section. 

G. Seismic restraints for PLUMBING system piping and equipment specified in Section 220548 

MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Section 

230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: 

B. Shop Drawings: At minimum, plan view and isometric piping diagrams of plumbing system 

piping and equipment including connection points to the site utilities. Inverts of buried 

piping shall be shown on the shop drawings. 

C. Color Samples: None 

D. Product Data: 

1. Spare Parts 

2. Equipment 

3. Plumbing Fixtures 

4. Pipe and Fittings 

5. Valves 

6. Specialties 

7. Piping Identification 

8. Valve Identification 



PLUMBING

E. Schedule: Maintenance Service Contract 

F. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: 

1. Chlorination Test Results 

2. Plumbing Inspection Completed 

G. As-Built Drawings 

H. Operations and Maintenance Manuals 

1. Plumbing Fixtures 

2. Equipment 

I. Guarantee and Certificate 


A. Obtain and pay for all fees, permits, licenses, assessments, connection charges and 

inspections required for this work. 

B. Accessible fixtures, other than those specified herein, require pre-bid approval to ensure 

compliance with the Commission on Persons with Disabilities of the State of Hawaii. No 

substitutions will be considered after the bid opening. Equal products are acceptable in lieu 

of those specified hereinafter by specific manufacturer and model number. 

1. Valves: Nibco, Crane, Walworth, Dezurik, or Stockham. 

2. Fixtures & Equipment: American Standard, Kohler or Eljer. 

3. Drainage System Specialties: Josam, Zurn or Smith. 

4. Flush Valves: Sloan or Delany. 

5. Pipe Supports: Elcen, Tolco, Grinnell, Fee and Mason or Unistrut. 

6. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just, or Moen. 

7. Fixture Trim: American Standard, Delta, Symmons, Sloan, Chicago, Elkay, Kohler or 

T&S. 

C. Comply with the recommendations and requirements of the Codes and Standards listed 

hereinafter in addition to detailed requirements of this specification. In the event of 

conflicting requirements, this specification shall prevail. 

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 

PUBLICATIONS: 

A53-96 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, 

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 

A74-96 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

A616-96 Standard Specification for Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars 

for Concrete Reinforcement 

B88-96 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube 

B306-96 Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) 

C564-95 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

C150-97 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 

D1785-91 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 

120 

D2661-91 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic 

Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe 

D2665-91b 

Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe 

and Fittings 

D2466-90a Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings (Schedule 40) 



PLUMBING

D2467-90 Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) 

Plastic Pipe and Fittings 

D2564-91 Solvent Cements For Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe 

and Fittings 

D4101-94 Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials 

F656-89a 

Primers For Use In Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl 

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings 

F1412-94 Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings For Corrosive Waste Drainage 

Systems 

2. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE PUBLICATIONS (ANSI): 

B16.18-84 

Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings 

B16.22-95 

Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure 

Fittings 

B16.23-92 

Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV 

B16.26-88 

Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 

B31.9-96 

Building Services Piping. (Same as ASME B31.9-96) 

C2-97 National Electrical Safety Code 

3. CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI) PUBLICATION: 

301-97 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm 

Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications 

310-97 Coupling For Use In Connection With Hubless Cast Iron Soil 

Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent 

Piping Applications 

Pamphlet 100 Installation Suggestion for "No-Hub" Pipe and Fittings 

4. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI) STANDARDS: 

WH-201-92 Water Hammer Arrester Standard 

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. Submit shop drawings and as-built drawings for the plumbing systems that conform to the 

general requirements in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals for all plumbing system equipment that 

conform to the general requirements in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 


A. Submit one year guarantee for all plumbing work in accordance with the general 

requirements in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. See general requirements for materials and equipment in Section 230300 GENERAL 

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Requirements of manufacturer's equipment that is a component of a system provided under 



PLUMBING

this work are included with the system's specifications hereinafter. Provide capacities and 

characteristics of the equipment shall be as indicated. See electrical drawings for all power 

wiring and disconnecting devices to all equipment requiring electrical power furnished under 

this Section. 

2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

A. Accessible fixtures, other than those specified herein, require pre-bid approval to ensure 

compliance with the Commission on Persons with Disabilities of the State of Hawaii. 

Provide chrome plated brass angle stops, tube risers, chrome plated brass P-traps, trap arms, 

adapters, escutcheons and cover plates. Provide connecting fittings, china bolt caps, wall 

support brackets as required. Provide flow restrictors or other approved flow control devices 

to limit flow for all lavatory faucets to maximum 0.5 gpm and showers and sink faucets to a 

maximum of 2.5 gpm. Urinals shall be limited to maximum 1.0 gallons per flush. Toilets 

shall be limited to maximum 1.6 gallons per flush. All strainers shall be provided with holes 

not larger than 1/4-inch diameter. Wall mounted fixtures shall include floor mounted wall 

carriers for that fixture. Wall carriers included in the following specifications are for single 

fixtures. For back-to-back fixture conditions, provide carriers to accommodate each fixture's 

rough-in requirements and revise model numbers in accordance with the manufacturer's 


1. Accessible Water Closet - Wall Mounted - Flush Valve Style - A-WC: Wall mounted, 

elongated bowl, flush valve, siphon jet action, vitreous china, white. Provide American 

Standard "Afwall Flowise" No. 3351.128, Zurn Z5615 HET Series or approved equal. Total 

height from finish floor to top of seat shall not be less than 17-inch, nor higher than 19-inch. 

Provide Zurn No. Z6000PL-HET or approved equal flush valve, 1.28 gallon per flush, 1-1/2- 

inch exposed top spud, chrome plated, 1-inch screwdriver angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, 

integral vacuum breaker, spud coupling, wall and spud flanges. Force to activate flush valve 

shall be less than 5 lb. Total height from finish floor to flush valve handle shall not exceed 

44 inches. 

Flush control shall be located on the open side of the water closet. 

Provide Olsonite No. 95, Church No. 9500C, Kohler No. K-4666C or approved equal 1-inch 

thick maximum, heavy duty solid white plastic open front seat with check hinge. 

2. Accessible Lavatory - Wall Hung - Cold Water Only - A-LAV: 20-1/2-inch x 18-1/4- 

inch nominal overall dimensions, 4-inch centers, vitreous china, front overflow, faucet 

ledge, contoured back and side splash shields, white. Provide American Standard 

"Lucerne" No. 0355.012, Kohler "Kingston" No. K-2005, Eljer 051-3544 or approved 

equal. Depth of lavatory bowl shall not exceed 6-1/2 inches. Provide soap dispenser 

hole. 

Provide Smith No. 700, Josam No. 17100 or approved equal floor mounted concealed 

arm wall carrier. 

Faucet shall be single handle, 4” centerset, lever handle, cartridge type, Delta 500-WF, 

Kohler, American Standard or approved equal. 

Provide Plumberex Handy-Shield, Truebro or approved equal closed cell foam or vinyl 

insulated safety covers for supplies and drain, including the trap. 

3. Accessible Sink - Single Compartment - A-SK: Single compartment, solid surface, 

undermount. Provide Corian 830 or approved equal. Depth of sink shall not exceed 6- 

1/2 inches. 



PLUMBING

2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS 

Provide Chicago 1100 or approved equal, dual lever faucet with swing gooseneck spout, 

2.5 gpm aerator, 4” wrist blade handles, cartridge type. Provide chrome plated brass 

basket strainer, chrome plated drain fittings, 1-1/2-inch tailpiece and trap. Provide 

chrome plated angle supplies with loose key stops. Force to activate faucet shall be less 

than 5 lb. 

Provide Plumberex Handy-Shield, Truebro or approved equal closed cell foam or vinyl 

insulated safety covers for supplies and drain, including the trap. 

A. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping Below Grade: Service weight cast-iron soil pipe and 

fittings, conforming to ASTM A74, "Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and 

Fittings," no-hub cast iron soil pipe conforming to CISPI 301, "Standard Specification for 

Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent 

Piping Applications," with cast iron mechanical couplings, stainless steel bolts and nuts, and 

neoprene gaskets or heavy duty stainless bands with 4 or more adjusting screws. Provide MG 

coupling, Husky Series 4000 Anaheim Foundry Company or approved equal. 

B. Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Above Grade: Service weight cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, 

conforming to ASTM A74, "Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings," nohub 

cast iron soil pipe conforming to CISPI 301, "Standard Specification for Hubless Cast 

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping 

Applications," with stainless steel bands and neoprene gaskets. 

C. Potable Water Piping: Type "L" hard-drawn copper tube, conforming to ASTM B88, 

"Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube," with soldered (95-5) joint 

wrought copper pressure fittings conforming to ANSI 16.22. Use long radius elbows 

wherever possible. Use Type "K" hard-drawn copper tube with brazing alloy on joints and 

pipes below grade. 

2.5 VALVES 

A. Ball Valves 3 Inches and Smaller: 600 psi W.O.G., bronze, two piece body, 316 stainless 

steel ball, reinforced TFE seat and seals, full port, threaded ends, 316 stainless steel stem, 

lever handle with integral stop. Provide NIBCO T-585-70-66 or approved equal. 

B. Check Valves 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: 125-lb. S.W.P., bronze body and trim, swing 

check valve, bronze disc, bronze hinge pin, Buna-N resilient seat, threaded ends. Provide 

NIBCO T-413 or approved equal. 

C. Check Valves 2 Inches and Larger: 125-lb. S.W.P., double door check valve, steel or 

cast iron body, aluminum bronze doors, stainless steel spring and pins, Buna-N resilient 

seat, non-slam closure, lug body style. Provide APCO 9000-L, NIBCO or approved 

equal. 

D. Plug Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: 150-lb. S.W.P., bronze body and plug, screwed ends. 

Provide Dezurik Figure 120, Val-matic or approved equal. 

2.6 PLUMBING SYSTEM SPECIALTIES 

A. Cleanouts: 

1. Cleanout - CO: Provide Smith No. 4470, Josam or approved equal, bronze 

countersunk plug. 



PLUMBING

2. Cleanout to Grade - COTG: Provide Smith No. 4250, Josam or approved equal, cast 

iron body and scoriated top, installed with concrete collar, flush with grade. 

3. Floor Cleanout - FCO: Provide Smith No. 4105, Josam or approved equal cast iron 

cleanout with round heavy duty scoriated nickel-bronze top, ABS plug and flashing 

flange. 

4. Wall Cleanout - WCO: Provide Smith No. 4472, Josam or approved equal with 

polished stainless steel access plate and screw. 

B. Vent Flashing: Four pounds per square foot sheet lead or factory fabricated flashing with 

rubber gaskets designed specifically for sheet metal roofing systems. 

C. P-Traps Installed Below Floor: Deep-seal cast-iron p-trap. 

D. Water Hammer Arresters: Provide Smith Series 5000, Josam or approved equal. Provide 

on water supplies and locate as close as practical to each faucet, control valve or flush 

valve except hose faucets. Air chambers shall consist of a 12-inch length of pipe of the 

same diameter as the branch supply, capped on one end. Commercial type arresters, 

tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH-201, "Water Hammer Arresters," shall be 

provided where indicated. Installation of these arresters shall be accessible and include 

access panels when concealed. Size of the arresters shall conform to the PDI symbols 

and shall be selected in accordance with the recommendations of PDI: 

PDI Symbol 

Fixture Unit Rating 

A 1-11 

B 12-32 

C 33-60 

D 61-113 

E. Air Gap Fitting For Standpipe: Provide Smith No. 3951, Josam or approved equal, cast 

iron body, threaded outlet with set screw on inlet. 

F. Access Panels - AP: Provide Milcor, Karp or approved equal access doors with Allen 

wrench lock and concealed hinges; style K for plaster walls, style A for acoustical tile 

surfaces, style M for masonry and other surfaces. 8-inch x 8-inch minimum size in walls 

and partitions for single items (e.g. WHA), 12-inch x 12-inch for more than one item (e.g. 

two adjacent valves) and either 12-inch x 12-inch or 24-inch x 24-inch for ceiling access 

and as indicated. For access panels in fire rated walls and ceilings, provide fire rated 

access panels to match or exceed the rating of the wall or ceiling. Unless otherwise 

noted, provide access panels with primer painted surfaces and field painted to match the 

color of the adjacent surface. 

2.7 INSULATION 

A. See Section 230700 HVAC INSULATION. 



A. Determine the exact route of each pipe and check for interferences with the building 

structure, foundation, electrical work and other work in the area. Make offsets and 

changes in direction required to maintain proper head room and pitch or to accommodate 

the structure and the work of other trades. Furnish other trades with information to 



PLUMBING

properly locate and size openings in the structure required for this work. Furnish anchor 

bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports required for this work. Coordinate and schedule 

plumbing work with Contractor to allow construction to proceed without delays. Install 

rough-in piping for fixtures, equipment and specialties according to the schedule when 

the structure is ready (e.g. hose bibbs located in CMU walls before walls are grouted). 

3.2 INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide guard or insulation around high-temperature equipment and materials to protect 

personnel. When exposed to weather, provide a weather protected enclosure around 

electrical equipment, controls and other items that are not satisfactorily protected. All 

required demolition including saw cutting and chipping of concrete and masonry to 

remove or install fixtures and piping shall be provided as well as patching, repair and 

painting at no additional cost to the State. 


A. Cut all holes necessary for installation of work under this Section. 

B. Patching of all holes, etc., will be done under other sections of specification. Patch any 

holes cut unnecessarily. 

3.4 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT 

A. Install all control devices, specialties, valves and related items to provide easy access for 

operation, inspection, repair and maintenance. If these items are concealed behind walls 

or ceilings of non-removable type construction, provide access panels of proper size for 

easy access at no additional cost to the State. 

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Install equipment, piping and appurtenances in accordance with the requirements of 

Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. Provide equipment 

accessories necessary for proper operation and support. 

3.6 FIXTURE INSTALLATION 

A. Set fixtures in an approved workmanlike manner. Point up all edges against building 

structure with white grout. Provide adequate wall carriers or supports for all wallmounted 

fixtures. Provide water supplies for all fixtures; Brasscraft or equivalent, 

compression joint type with chromium plated brass escutcheon and cover tube, loose-key 

angle stop valve and drawn copper tube riser even if details are not shown on the plans. 

Provide chromium plated brass P-trap, waste fittings, wax rings, gaskets, fasteners and 

escutcheon as required for all fixtures even if not detailed on the drawings. Exposed 

metal including pipe shall be polished chromium plated. Provide a 1/4-inch x 6-inch x 

32-inch steel plate for support of wall-hung lavatories if carriers are not specified. Secure 

plate to studs and bolt to fixtures. Point-of-connections indicated are suggested locations. 

Contractor may, at his option, relocate the point-of-connection (POC) to a more 

convenient location if the existing piping is deemed to be inaccessible. All extra piping, 

fittings and valves for relocated POC's shall be provided at no additional cost to the State. 

Sinks with multiple compartments and trough sinks, provide multiple faucets, angle 

supplies and stops to match the number of faucet locations specified or indicated at no 

additional cost to the State. 



PLUMBING

3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Conform to the requirements of the current Uniform Plumbing Code as adopted by the 

City and County of Honolulu. Inspect all pipe inside and outside. Remove interior 

obstructions and ream out pipe ends. Tool markings on polished fittings are not 

acceptable. Cut pipe accurately so that it can be worked into place without springing or 

forcing. Install pipes parallel to the wall of the structure and plumb. Make changes in 

direction with fittings. Bushings are not permitted. Install valves with stems above 

horizontal. Provide proper support and adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, 

slope and anchorage. Provide dielectric unions where copper tubing connects to steel 

pipe. Wrap pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch thick felt, secure with tape, where it contacts 

other materials. Have piping tested, inspected and approved before it is furred in, buried 

or otherwise hidden. Provide standard weight galvanized steel pipe sleeves where pipes 

pass through structure, sufficiently large to provide 1/4-inch minimum clearance around 

pipe. Caulk watertight around pipes passing through sleeves. Wrap pipe with 

polyethylene tape where it passes through sleeve and when it contacts concrete or 

masonry. Grout with fireproof material around all pipe penetrations through slabs and 

walls full length of penetrations. Where pipes pass through fire walls or floors, seal both 

ends of sleeve with Underwriters Laboratories listed thermal barrier material to maintain 

fire rating. Provide chrome-plated brass escutcheons, set tight on the pipe and to the wall 

where pipes are exposed in finished areas. Provide clamping collar or membrane flange 

where pipe or drains penetrate waterproof membrane. Perform all welding using 

qualified welders in accordance with American National Standards Institute's Code B31.9 

and American Welding Society Standard B3.0. Insulate piping specified in accordance 

with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.8 PIPING SYSTEM SUPPORTS 

A. Pipe Supports: For above ground piping, see details on drawings. Support copper pipe at 

maximum spacing of 4 feet for pipes 1-1/2-inch and smaller, 7 feet for pipes 2-inch 

through 4-inch. 

B. Pipe Hangers: Steel clevis hanger with adjustable hanger rod; 3/8-inch for pipe 2-inch and 

smaller. 2-inch for pipe 2-1/2-inch through 3-1/2-inch and 5/8-inch for pipe 4-inch and 

larger. For copper pipes, provide copper hangers, plastic coated steel or other commonly 

used protective surfaces to prevent contact of dissimilar materials used for the piping and 

hangers. Groups of lines shall be supported as detailed on drawings. Provide trapeze type 

hangers for groups of pipes routed at the same elevation. Hanger rods shall not be supported 

from other pipe and conduit hangers or supports unless specifically designed for this 

application. 

C. Supplemental Steel: Provide supplemental structural steel piping supports as required to 

support piping from structure. Supplemental structural and supporting steel shall be hotdipped 

after fabrication and, if exposed, painted with a final coat to match adjacent area. 

3.9 DRAINAGE, WASTE AND VENT PIPE SYSTEMS 

A. Coordinate point of connection locations and material compatibility with the site utilities 

contractor's work and schedule. Slope drain lines at 1/4-inch per foot unless otherwise 

indicated. Install hub cast-iron pipe in accordance with CISPI & Fittings Handbook 1990. 



PLUMBING

Install no-hub cast-iron pipe in accordance with CISPI pamphlet 301. Provide cast-iron and 

neoprene gasketed hub coupling below grade. Above grade MG stainless steel clamps and 

cast-iron no-hub couplings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions. On roof vents and where other drains occur above the ground floor, provide 

clamping device with drain. Provide a four-pound lead flashing sheet extending eight (8) 

inches out around drain body for flat roof areas and secure with clamp device or factory 

fabricated flashing with rubber gasket designed for sheet metal roofs. Coordinate point of 

connections, locations and materials, with site utilities. 

3.10 WATER PIPING SYSTEM 

A. Coordinate point of connection locations and material compatibility with the site utilities 

contractor's work and schedule. Secure each water line where it penetrates partitions to serve 

fixtures, and similar items. Wrap all lines passing through concrete with polyethylene tape. 

Install unions or flanges at all valves, equipment and system specialties. Install dielectric 

unions at connections of copper and ferrous pipes. Coordinate point of connections, locations 

and materials, with site utilities. 

3.11 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS 

A. Copper pipe shall be insulated from direct contact with ferrous piping connections by 

approved insulating (dielectric) unions or couplings or flanges. 


A. Test plumbing systems in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Perform tests in the 

presence of, and to the satisfaction of inspectors having jurisdiction over the work. Ask for 

final inspection by the Engineer after all tests, adjustments and balancing have been 

performed. 

1. Test drainage systems in accordance with Section 318 of the Plumbing Code. 

2. Hydrostatically test the domestic water piping system at 100 psi. Inspect the entire 

system while under pressure and correct all deficiencies. 

3. Test equipment to demonstrate its operations and compliance with the specification. 

B. All drainage piping systems which show signs of obstructed flow, no flow or slow flow shall 

be thoroughly snaked until all obstructions are cleared and water drains freely. 

3.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION 

A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment for tests and any required retests and pay for all cost of 

repairing any damage resulting from such tests. Contractor shall repair and adjust systems 

until they are approved. Tests shall be performed in presence of, and to satisfaction of, 

inspector of official agency involved. 

B. Defective Work: If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be 

replaced and inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new 

material. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be accepted. 



PLUMBING

C. Protection to Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment: Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or 

plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected 

against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical injury. Upon completion of all work, 

fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, repainted as required, 

adjusted, and operated. 

D. Removal and Capping of existing plumbing lines as required is included in this Section to 

isolate existing pipes. 

E. Chlorination: Domestic water lines shall be sterilized with chlorine before acceptance of 

work. Sterilize water system for 24 hours with 100 ppm chlorine introduced into the lines in 

an approved manner. Operate all valves during contact period. Flush system until chlorine is 

less than 0.2 ppm. All valves in lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several 

times during contact period. Certificate shall be furnished to Engineer evidencing proper 

performance of sterilization. 

3.14 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Clean up work areas and fixtures: Adjust system for proper operation, ready for use. Touch 

up with matching paint all damaged factory finishes. Provide valve tags, and a list which 

includes the type of valve tag, size, location, and area served. Clean diaphragms for the flush 

valves per the manufacturer's recommendations. Bleed all air from lines. 

3.15 PAINTING AND IDENTIFYING OF PIPING 

A. General: 

1. All non-factory finished (i.e. finish painted) items furnished under this section are to 

be painted including exposed piping, insulation and fittings. See Section 099000 

PAINTING. Do not paint over name plates or other identifying labels. 

2. Paint exposed black iron work including pipe, fittings, iron body valves, pipe 

hangers, etc., with two coats of zinc rich paint and finish coat to match adjacent 

surfaces. 

B. Identification of Piping: Provide piping identification for all above ground plumbing 

system piping in accordance with the requirements of Section 230300 GENERAL 


C. Identification of Valves: Provide valve tags for all plumbing system valves in 

accordance with the requirements of Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

D. Identification of Equipment: Provide equipment tags in accordance with the requirements 

of Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. Plumbing fixtures 

and underground equipment do not require equipment tags. 

3.16 INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Provide instructions to State personnel for plumbing system operation in accordance with 

the requirements of Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

Upon completion of the work and at a time designated, the services of one or more 

qualified personnel shall be provided by the Contractor for a period of not less than eight 

(8) hours to instruct the representatives of the State in the operation and maintenance of 

the air conditioning system. These field instructions shall cover all the items contained in 

the bound instructions. 



PLUMBING

3.17 ONE YEAR MAINTENANCE SERVICE CONTRACT 

A. Provide maintenance service for all plumbing system components as specified in and in 

accordance with the requirements and schedule of Section 230300 GENERAL 


3.18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Shall be provided as specified in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 




PLUMBING

SECTION 220548 - MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the sound, 

vibration and seismic control equipment for the air conditioning, ventilation and plumbing 

systems complete, including but not limited to the following: 

1. Vibration isolators 

2. Flexible connections for piping 

3. Flexible duct connections 

4. Seismic control equipment 

5. Manufacturer's literature, shop drawings and record drawings. 


A. Mechanical work as specified in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS unless specified otherwise in other sections of Division 23 HEATING, 

VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING. 

B. Ductwork specified in Section 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES. 

C. Plumbing systems specified in Section 220000 PLUMBING. 

D. Air handling, fan coil units and exhaust fans specified in SECTION 237323 AIR 

HANDLING EQUIPMENT. 

E. Chilled water and condenser water piping specified in SECTION 232113 CHILLED WATER 

PIPING. 


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The 

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 

1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC) 

AISC S342L 

Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for 

Structural Steel Buildings 

2. AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI) 

ARI 575 

Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment pace 


ASTM A 36/A 36M Carbon Structural Steel 

ASTM A 123 

Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel 

Products 

ASTM A 653/A 653M Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 

Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process 

ASTM D 471 

Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids 

ASTM D 2240 

Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness 

ASTM E 84 

Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 

4. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS) 

AWS D1.1 

Structural Welding Code Steel 

5. SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL 

ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA) 



MECHANICAL SOUND, 

VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL

SMACNA APIDC 

SMACNA SRM 

Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct 

Construction 

Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical 

Systems 


A. Decibels dB: Measure of sound level. Decibels are referenced to either 20 uPa for sound 

pressure levels or one pW for sound power levels. dBA is the overall "A" weighted sound 

level. 

B. Machinery: The vibration or noise producing equipment that must be isolated. 

C. Manufacturer: The fabricator or supplier of vibration-isolation or seismic-protection materials 

and equipment. For mechanical equipment and machinery the term machinery manufacturer 

will be used. 

D. Micropascal uPa: 10 to the minus 6 power newtons per square meter. 

E. Picowatt pW: 10 to the minus 12 power watts. 

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Machinery Vibration Criteria: Provide vibration isolators for mechanical and electrical 

machinery and associated piping and ductwork as indicated, to minimize transmission of 

vibrations and structure borne noise to the building structure or spaces or from the building 

structure to the machinery. Provide vibration isolator type and static deflection in accordance 

with the following: 

TABLE 1A 

Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection (MSD, inches) 

Equipment Type MSD 

_____________________________________________________________________ 

Fan Coil Units 

Ceiling Suspended H 1.0 

NOTES: (1) 

Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule Designations (Hyphenated designations are 

combinations of the following:) 

H - Suspension Spring isolators (suspended equipment and piping). Where required, 

provide with adjustable preloading devices. 

NM - Neoprene mounts. 

NP - Neoprene isolation pads. 

SX - Freestanding spring isolators with adjustable cushioned vertical stops and 

cushioned horizontal stops (floor-mounted equipment). 





B. Basic Criteria: For each piece of machinery in the human work environment, do not exceed 

the maximum airborne sound levels 84 dB A-weighted scale, continuous or intermittent, or 

140 dB peak sound pressure-level, impact or impulse, noise. 

C. Seismic Protection Criteria: Use a Horizontal Force Factor minimum 60 percent of the 

equipment weight considered passing through the equipment center of gravity in any 

horizontal direction. Unless vibration isolation is required to protect equipment against 

unacceptable structure transmitted noise or vibration, protect the structure or equipment from 

earthquakes by rigid structurally sound attachment to the load-supporting structure. Protect 

each piece of vibration-isolated equipment with protected spring isolators or separate seismic 

restraint devices. Determine by calculations the number and size of seismic restraints needed 

for each equipment, duct or pipe. Verify seismic restraint vendor's calculations by a 

registered professional engineer. Provide seismic snubbers and protected spring isolators 

rated in three principle axes. Verify ratings by independent laboratory testing. 

D. Welding: AWS D1.1. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Division 23 

HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING. 

B. Manufacturer's Catalog Data: 

1. Isolators 

2. Flexible connectors 

3. Flexible duct connectors 

4. Pipe guides 

5. Machinery manufacturer's sound data 

C. Spring Isolator Data: For each type and size of spring isolator, submit the spring outside 

diameter, deflection, operating spring height, unloaded spring height, solid spring height, the 

ratio of the outside diameter to the operating spring height, the load to deflection ratio of the 

springs, and weight and sizes of structural steel members. 

D. Machinery Manufacturer's Sound Data: For each piece of indicated machinery to be vibration 

isolated, the calculated sound power test data or sound pressure test data as levels in dB in the 

eight octave bands between 63 and 8,000 Hz. Refer sound power levels to one pW and sound 

pressure levels to 20 uPa. Submit the overall "A" weighted scale sound pressure level in dB. 

Submit the standard test procedure used to obtain the sound power or pressure data for the 

applicable vibration isolation equipment size. 

E. Machinery: For each item of machinery, compare spring static deflections with the specified 

minimum static deflection, to show that the calculated spring static deflections are not less 

than the minimum static deflections specified. Rated spring static deflections are not 

acceptable in lieu of calculated spring static deflections. When seismic protection is required, 

substantiating calculations are required. 

F. Machinery Over 300 Pounds: For machinery items over 300 pounds, provide calculations for 

shear, pull-up, primary overturning, and secondary overturning. 

G. Instructions: 

1. Vibration and noise isolation components 

2. Seismic protection components 





H. Seismic Protection Rating: Submit in three principal axes certified by an independent 

laboratory or analyzed by an independent licensed structural engineer. 


A. Vibration Isolator Procurement: For each piece of machinery to be isolated from vibration, 

supply the vibration isolators and other associated materials and equipment as a coordinated 

package by a single manufacturer or by the machinery manufacturer. Select isolators that 

provide uniform deflection even when machinery weight is not evenly distributed. This 

requirement does not include the flexible connectors or the hangers for the associated piping 

and ductwork. 

B. Unitized Machinery Assemblies: Mounting of unitized assemblies directly on vibration 

isolation springs is acceptable if machinery manufacturer certifies that the end supports of the 

assemblies have been designed for such installation. 


2.1 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL PARTS 

A. ASTM A 123, ASTM A 653 hot-dipped galvanized, or equivalent manufacturer standard 

coatings. Where steel parts are exposed to the weather, provide galvanized coating of at least 

2 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface. Coat springs with neoprene. 

2.2 NEOPRENE 

A. ASTM D 471 and ASTM D 2240, Grade Durometer 40, 50, or 60, and oil resistant. 

2.3 SUSPENSION ISOLATORS 

A. Provide hangers with suspension isolators encased in open steel brackets. Isolate hanger rods 

from isolator steel brackets with neoprene-lined opening. 

1. Suspension Spring Isolators: Provide hangers with springs and molded double deflection 

neoprene elements in series. Provide isolators with adjustable spring-preloading devices 

where required to maintain constant pipe elevations during installation and when pipe 

operational loads are transferred to the springs. Neoprene elements shall have a 

minimum deflection of 0.35 inches. Provide springs with outside coil diameters at least 

0.8 of the operating height. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to 

complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection. 

Spring isolators shall be as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., M.W. Sausse, 

Amberbooth, Caldyn or approved equal. 

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR PIPING 

A. Straight or elbow flexible connectors rated for temperatures, pressures, and fluids to be 

conveyed. Provide flexible connectors with the strength 4 times operating pressure at highest 

system operating temperature. Provide elbow flexible connectors with a permanently set 

angle. 

1. Elastomeric Flexible Connectors: Flexible neoprene connectors with Hypalon cover shall 

be provided in all water piping connections to pumps and air handling units where pipe is 

greater than 2-inch nominal diameter. Connectors shall be of neoprene, single sphere, 

with ductile iron Class 150 flanged connections. Flanged assemblies shall be equipped 

with limit bolt to restrict maximum travel and resist pressure thrusts. Connectors shall 

have a minimum rating of 225 psi at 170 degrees F operating temperature. All materials 





shall be suitable for use in chilled water systems and outdoor environments. Connectors 

shall be Mason Industries, Inc., Type MFNC, Mercer Rubber or approved equal. 

2. Flexible Hoses: Metallic braided bronze hoses shall be provided in all chilled water 

piping to the pumps, air handling units and fan coil units where pipe is 2-inch or less 

nominal diameter. Hoses shall be Mercer BBF, Mason Industries, Inc. or equal. Provide 

soldered or threaded ends. Lengths shall be 6 times the nominal diameter with a 

maximum of 36 inches. Hoses shall be installed on equipment side of shut-off valves and 

horizontally wherever possible. 

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS 

A. Provide flexible duct connectors fabricated in accordance with SMACNA DCS. 

2.6 SEISMIC PROTECTION COMPONENTS FOR PIPING AND DUCTWORK 

A. Provide in accordance with SMACNA SRM and the National Uniform Seismic Installation 

Guidelines (NUSIG). 



A. Vibration and Noise Isolation Components: Install vibration and noise isolation materials 

and equipment as indicated and in accordance with machinery manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Suspension Vibration Isolators: Provide suspension isolation hangers for suspended 

equipment as indicated and as specified. 

C. Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors: Install flexible connectors in accordance with the 

manufacturer's instructions. When liquid pulsation dampening is required, flexible 

connectors with spherical configuration may be used. Provide restraints for pipe connectors 

at pumps to prevent connector failure upon pump startup. 

D. Machinery: Provide vibration isolators, flexible connectors in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations. Machinery with spring isolators or protected spring 

isolators shall rock or move freely within limits of stops or seismic snubber restraints. 

1. Stability: Isolators shall be stable during starting and stopping of machinery without 

traverse and eccentric movement of machinery that would damage or adversely affect the 

machinery or attachments. 

2. Lateral Motion: The installed vibration isolation system for each piece of floor or ceiling 

mounted machinery shall have a maximum lateral motion under machinery start up and 

shut down conditions of not more than 1/4 inch. Restrain motions in excess by approved 

spring mountings. 

3. Unbalanced Machinery: Provide foundation suspension systems specifically designed to 

resist horizontal forces for machinery with large unbalanced horizontal forces. Vibration 

isolator systems shall conform to the machinery manufacturer's recommendations. 

E. Piping and High Pressure Ductwork: Provide vibration isolation for piping and high pressure 

ductwork with over 6 inches water column. The isolator deflections shall be equal to or 

greater than the static deflection of the vibration isolators provided for the connected 

machinery as follows: 

1. High Pressure Ductwork: For a distance of 50 feet from fans, exhausters and blowers. 

2. Piping Connected to Vibration Isolated Machinery: For a distance of 50 feet or 50 pipe 

diameters, whichever is greater. 





3. Chilled Water Piping: For risers from pumps and for the first 20 feet of the branch 

connection of the main supply and return piping at each floor. 

F. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: 

1. Pipe Hangers: Provide eye-bolts or swivel joints for pipe hangers to permit pipe thermal 

or mechanical movement without angular misalignment of hanger vibration isolator. 

2. Pipe Risers: Provide pipe riser supports with bearing plates and two layers of 1/4 inch 

thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded to not more than 50 psi. Separate isolation 

pads with 1/4 inch steel plate. Weld pipe riser clamps at anchor points to the pipe and to 

pairs of vertical acoustical pipe anchor mountings which shall be rigidly fastened to the 

steel framing. 

3. Supports at Base of Pipe Risers: Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be 

two layers of 1/2 inch thick heavy-duty neoprene pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel 

plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than 500 psi. Weld 

the stanchion between the pipe and isolation support to the pipe and weld or bolt to the 

isolation support. Bolt isolation support to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and 

washers. Where supplementary steel is required to support piping, provide a maximum 

deflection of 0.08 inches at the mid-span of this steel under the load. Rigidly support 

piping from the supplementary steel with the supplementary steel isolated from the 

building structure with isolators. 

G. High Pressure Ductwork Hanger and Support Installation: Provide ductwork with vibration 

isolation hangers and supports where required or indicated. Connect ductwork to equipment 

with flexible duct connectors. Segment ductwork with flexible duct connectors. 

1. Duct Risers: Provide duct riser supports within shafts with suitable bearing plates and 

two layers of 1/4 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded to not more than 50 

psi. Separate isolation pads with 1/4 inch steel plate. 

2. Supports at Base of Duct Risers: For duct isolation supports at the base of risers, provide 

two layers of 1/2 inch thick heavy-duty neoprene pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel 

plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than 500 psi. Weld 

the stanchion between the duct and isolation support to the pipe, and weld or bolt to the 

isolation support. Bolt isolation support to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and 

washers. Where supplementary steel is required to support ducts, provide a maximum 

deflection of 1/4 inch at the midspan of this steel under the supported load. Rigidly 

support duct from the supplementary steel and the supplementary steel isolators. 

H. Equipment Room Sound Isolation: Do not allow direct contact between pipe or ducts and 

walls, floor slabs, roofs, ceilings or partitions of equipment rooms. 

1. Pipe Penetrations: Provide galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeves and tightly pack annular 

space between sleeves and pipe with insulation having a flame spread rating not more 

than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with 

ASTM E 84, maximum effective temperature 1000 degrees F, bulk density 6 pounds/cu. 

ft. minimum. Provide uninsulated pipe with a one inch thick mineral fiber sleeve the full 

length of the penetration and seal each end with an interior non-hardening compound. 

Provide sealant and mineral-fiber sleeve of a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a 

smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 

2. Duct Penetrations: Pack openings around ducts with mineral fiber insulation the full 

length of the penetration having a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke 

developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. At each 

end of duct opening provide sealing collars and seal with an interior non-hardening 

compound. 





I. Seismic Restraints for Piping and Ductwork: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with 

SMACNA SRM and the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG). 

J. Systems Not To Be Vibration Isolated: Do not provide vibration isolation for electrical 

raceways and conduits or for fire protection (see Division 21 Section 211313 AUTOMATIC 

WET-PIPE FIRE SPRINKLERS), storm, sanitary, and domestic water piping systems which 

do not include pumps or other vibrating, rotating, or pulsating equipment including control 

and pressure reducing valves. 


A. Notify State 14 days prior to machinery testing. 

1. Field Inspections: Prior to initial operation, inspect the vibration isolators for 

conformance to drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's data and instructions. 

Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, 

foundations, and walls. Check connector alignment before and after filling of system and 

during operation. Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in accordance 

with manufacturer's recommendations. 

2. Spring Isolator Inspection: After installation of spring isolators or protected spring 

isolators, and seismic restraint devices, the machinery shall rock freely on its spring 

isolators within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices. Eliminate or correct 

interferences. 






SECTION 226300 – MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the medical gas 

system complete, including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Medical gas piping and fittings. 

2. Valves. 


4. Inspection, test, certification and guarantee. 


A. General mechanical work as specified in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

B. Painting work specified in Section 090000 PAINTING. 

C. Electrical work specified in Division 26 ELECTRICAL. 




B. Shop Drawings: At minimum, plan view and isometric piping diagrams of medical gas 

system piping and equipment including connection points to the site utilities. 

C. Color Samples: None 

D. Product Data: 

1. Pipe and Fittings 

2. Valves 

E. Schedule: None. 


1. Medical Gas System Installer ASSE 6010 Qualifications 

2. Medical Gas Testing and Certification Completed 

G. As-Built Drawings: 

H. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: None 

I. Guarantee and Certificate 



inspections required for this work. 

B. Comply with the recommendations and requirements of the codes and standards listed 



MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

hereinafter in addition to detailed requirements of this specification. In the event of 

conflicting requirements, this specification shall prevail. 

1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE PUBLICATIONS (ANSI): 

ANSI/AWS A 5.8 Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding 

2. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASTM): 

ASME B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch 

ASME B 16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure 

Fittings 

ASME B 16.50 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze-Joint Pressure Fittings 

3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE): 

ASSE 6010 

Professional Qualification Standard for Medical Gas Systems 

Installers 


PUBLICATIONS: 

ASTM B 819 

Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical 

Gas Systems 

5. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA): 

NFPA 99 

Health Care Facilities 

C. Installation of all work in the Section shall be made in accordance with State Department of 

Health Regulations, National Fire Protection Association, and the Uniform Plumbing Code. 

Medical gas system components and installation shall conform to NFPA 99 – Health Care 

Facilities. 

D. All applicable codes, regulations and ordinances of public bodies having jurisdiction are 

considered a part of these specifications; all work installed and materials provided must 

comply with the current edition of such codes, regulations and ordinances. 

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. Submit shop drawings and as-built drawings for the medical gas systems that conform to the 

general requirements Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals for all medical gas system equipment that 

conform to the general requirements in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 


A. Submit 1-year guarantee for all medical gas work in accordance with the general 

requirements in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. See general requirements for materials and equipment in Section 230300 GENERAL 


2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS 



MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

A. Oxygen, Medical Air and Vacuum Piping: Hard drawn, seamless copper tube, Type “L”, 

ASTM B819 with brazed joints, wrought copper pressure fittings, ASTM B 16.22. Positive 

pressure medical gas piping shall be cleaned for oxygen service. 

2.3 VALVES 

A. Service valves with lockable handles: Valves shall be three piece, bronze-bodied, onequarter 

turn ball type capable of being disassembled in line for servicing the O-ring and 

seating surface. Valves shall include full port chrome plated ball, brass stem and shall have 

Teflon seat with adjustable packing gland with Teflon stem seal. Provide factory installed 

copper tubing extensions to prevent valve seat damage during brazing. The valves shall be 

suitable for cold non-shock gas working pressure of not less than 400 psi or full vacuum of 

29” Hg. Valves shall be cleaned for oxygen service. Valves shall be installed in accordance 

with NFPA 99 in restricted areas as indicated, have provisions to lock or latch the handle in 

the open position, and shall be identified with the name or symbol of the specific medical gas 

or vacuum, the room or area served, and a caution not to close or open the valve except in 

emergency. Provide Amico or approved equal. 



A. Determine the exact route of each pipe and check for interferences with the building 

structure, foundation, electrical work and other work in the area. Make offsets and changes 

in direction required to maintain proper head room and pitch or to accommodate the structure 

and the work of other trades. Furnish other trades with information to properly locate and 

size openings in the structure required for this work. Furnish anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts 

and supports required for this work. Coordinate and schedule medical gas work with 

Contractor to allow construction to proceed without delays. Install rough-in piping for 

fixtures, and equipment according to the schedule when the structure is ready. 

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Medical gas system installers shall meet the requirements of ASSE 6010, Professional 

Qualification Standard for Medical Gas System Installers. Provide competent supervision. 

Furnish new equipment, fixtures, materials and accessories bearing the manufacturer's 

identification and conforming to recognized commercial standards. All required demolition 

including saw cutting, coring and chipping of concrete and masonry to remove or install 

fixtures and piping shall be provided as well as patching, repair and painting at no additional 

cost to the Owner. Contractor shall ensure reinforcement for concrete is not damaged during 

saw cutting or coring of existing walls or slab. Any damage shall be repaired at no additional 

cost to the Owner. Provide all extra materials and labor for a complete operable system at no 

extra cost to the Owner. 

3.3 MEDICAL-SURGICAL VACUUM SYSTEMS 

A. Medical-surgical vacuum piping shall be cleaned, installed, and tested as specified in NFPA 

99 for Level 1 piped vacuum systems. 

3.4 POSITIVE PRESSURE MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS 



MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

A. Positive pressure medical gas piping shall be cleaned, installed, and tested as specified in 

NFPA 99 for Level 1 piped gas systems. 

3.5 JOINTS 

A. Installation of pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with NFPA 99. Mitering of joints for 

elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be 

made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended. 

1. Threaded: Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming 

to ANSI B1.20.1. Pipe threads shall be made up by applying polytetrafluoroethylene tape 

or other thread sealant suitable for oxygen service on male threads only. Threaded joints 

are limited to connection of pressure/vacuum gauges, alarm devices, check valves and 

source equipment where allowed by NFPA 99. 

2. Unions: Unions shall not be permitted in the distribution piping system for piped gas 

systems. 

3. Flared and compression type fittings: Flared and compression type fittings shall not be 

permitted in the distribution piping system for piped gas systems. 

4. Brazed: Joints in copper tube shall be brazed using wrought copper capillary fittings 

conforming to ASME B16.22 or ASME B16.50. Cast fittings shall not be used for 

brazed joints. Joints shall be made with silver brazing alloy or a similar high melting 

point alloy of not lower than 1000 degrees F. Brazing filler materials shall comply with 

ANSI/AWS A5.8. Flux shall not be used except where copper is joined to bronze or 

brass as permitted by NFPA 99. An oil free, dry nitrogen gas purge shall be provided to 

prevent oxide formation inside the copper tubing when joints are silver brazed. 

3.6 PIPING SYSTEM SUPPORTS 

A. Pipe Supports: For above ground piping, strap to permanent structure or support with pipe 

hangers unless indicated otherwise. Maximum support spacing for copper pipe shall be as 

follows: 

¼” nominal 5 ft 

½” nominal 6 ft 

¾” nominal 7 ft 

1” nominal 8 ft 

1 ¼” nominal 9 ft 

1 ½” nominal and larger 10 ft 

B. Pipe Hangers: Steel clevis hanger with adjustable hanger rod; 3/8" for pipe 2" and smaller. 

1/2" for pipe 2-1/2" through 3-1/2"and 5/8" for pipe 4” and larger. Groups of lines shall be 

supported as detailed on drawings. Provide insulating tape between copper piping and steel 

hangers. 

C. Trapeze Hangers: Support multiple pipe runs on Unistrut or Empco trapeze type hangers 

with galvanized finish. Provide insulating tape between copper piping and steel hangers. 

3.7 BRANCH TAKE-OFFS 

A. Runouts from horizontal piping shall be taken off above the centerline of the main or branch 

pipe in accordance with NFPA 99. 

3.8 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING 



MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

A. Identify all piping by stenciling or using tapes with pressure sensitive adhesives with the 

name, color code and if at non-standard operating pressure, the pressure of the gas contained. 

Direction of flow arrows is to be included on each label or tape. Location for pipe labels or 

tapes shall be as follows: 

1. At intervals of not more than 20 feet. 

2. At least once in or above every room. 

3. On both sides of walls or partitions penetrated by the piping. 

4. At least once in every story height traversed by risers. 

3.9 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES 

A. Identify all valves by stenciling or using tapes with pressure sensitive adhesives. Valves shall 

be labeled with the name of the gas controlled, the room controlled by the valve, and a 

caution statement, “Do not close the valve except in an emergency”. When valves are 

installed in systems with non-standard operating pressures, the valve identification shall also 

include the non-standard pressure. 

3.10 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION 

A. Medical Gas and Vacuum Piping: Medical gas and vacuum piping systems shall be cleaned, 

pressure tested, cross-connection tested, purged, and final tested in accordance with NFPA 

99. After completion of work, an independent party technically competent and experienced 

in testing of medical gas piping systems shall accomplish certification testing of competed 

system in accordance with NFPA 99. 

3.11 DEFECTIVE WORK 

A. If inspection or test shows defects such defective work or material shall be replaced or 

repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be 

made with new materials. 

3.12 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Clean up work areas and fixtures. 

3.13 TRAINING 

A. Instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of the systems. Review the 

maintenance manuals with the Owner. Submit a list of manufacturer's warranties for the 

equipment furnished. 




MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 

SECTION 23 03 00 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 



A. These general mechanical requirements apply to all sections of Division 23 HEATING, 

VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specifications, unless specified 

otherwise in the individual sections. 

B. "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install." 


A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment and perform all work 

and services necessary for complete and properly operated mechanical systems, as shown on 

the drawings and as specified, in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents and 

completely coordinate his work with that of all other trades. 

B. The Contractor shall completely examine the Contract Documents and shall report to the 

Contracting Officer any error, inconsistency or omission he discovers. Bidders are cautioned 

to review the Technical Specifications carefully and thoroughly. The submittal of a bid shall 

be considered an acceptance of the specifications as published. Protests concerning the 

Technical Specifications lodged after bid opening shall not be considered. 

C. The Contractor shall visit the site and examine the conditions affecting his work before 

submitting his proposal. The submission of the proposal shall be considered evidence that 

the Contractor has visited the site and no extra payments will be allowed to the Contractor on 

account of extra work made necessary by his failure to visit the site. 

D. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, hangers, supports, details, appurtenances 

and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete mechanical system 

where work required is not specifically indicated. 

E. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together. Provide work specified or stated in one 

or the other document as though mentioned in both documents. 

F. Substitution of another manufacturer's product for materials or equipment specified and for 

items with "approved equal" after the brand name requires approval in accordance with the 

GENERAL CONDITIONS. Substitutions will not be considered unless specifically approved 

by the State as an exception. The State reserves the right to make the decision unilaterally. 

Equal products are acceptable in lieu of those specified hereinafter by specific manufacturer and 

model number if approved. 

G. The Contractor shall warrant that all materials and equipment, furnished under this Contract, 

will be new and that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, in 

conformance with the Contract Documents for a guarantee period of two years. 



GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS

H. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, a minimum of one (1) copy of all Drawings, 

Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders and other modifications, 

in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall be 

made available to the Contracting Officer upon request. 

I. The Contractor, at all times, shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste 

materials or rubbish caused by his operations. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor 

shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the project, as well as all his 

tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials and shall clean all new 

equipment, materials, items and accessories. 

J. The Contractor shall give the Contracting Officer timely notice of its readiness for testing any 

work, including the scheduling of agencies with the jurisdiction over the work, test 

equipment and personnel, and all other data arrangements for the State to observe the testing. 

The Contractor shall bear all cost of such tests. 

K. Workmanship and Materials: 

1. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent mechanical workers 

skilled in their trades and thoroughly familiar with the work involved shall be employed. 

The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who will be 

constantly in charge of the work, until the project is completed and accepted. 

2. Reference to standards are intended to be the latest revision of the standard specified. 

3. Unless otherwise specified later in this section, each article of its kind shall be the 

standard product of a single manufacturer. 

4. Whenever the words “or approved equal” or other words of similar intent or meaning are 

used, implying that judgment is to be exercised, it is understood that it is the judgment of 

the Contracting Officer. 

5. The State shall have the right to accept or reject any material, equipment and/or 

workmanship and determine when the Contractor has complied with the requirements 

specified in this section. 

6. All manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers. 

Equipment shall be clearly marked or stamped with the manufacturer’s name and rating. 

Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored and adequately 

protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Damaged 

or defective items, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be replaced. 

L. The Contracting Officer shall have the right to accept or reject materials, equipment and/or 

workmanship and determine when the Contractor has complied with the contract documents. 



locations toward establishing the scope for uniform estimating basis for all bidders. They are 

not intended to be detailed construction working drawings. Equipment, ductwork and piping 

arrangements shall fit into space allotted and shall allow adequate clearances for servicing and 

maintenance. Reasonable modifications to indicated locations and arrangement to suit job 

conditions shall not constitute basis for requesting additional funds from the State. 




REQUIREMENTS

B. Because of the small scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and 

accessories which may be required. Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish 

conditions affecting his work and arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, 

valves, ductwork, piping, supports, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. 

C. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and 

proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades. The 

Contractor shall visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the 

work and working conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the Contracting 

Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 

B. Additional submittal requirements are specified in each mechanical section with the general 

requirements for submittals specified in this section and apply to all mechanical sections. 

C. Within 20 days after award of contract and before installation of any materials or equipment 

is begun, Contractor shall submit to the State for approval a complete list of materials and 

equipment together with names and addresses of manufacturers and local Hawaii based 

manufacturer's representatives, catalog numbers, and trade names; and, annotated descriptive 

data showing the specific model, type, and size of each item the Contractor proposes to 

furnish. No consideration shall be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. Prepare 

working drawings on sheets not smaller than 24 inches by 36 inches, and include data 

essential to the proper installation of the system. Do not commence work until the design of 

the system and the various components have been approved. 

D. Approval of materials and equipment will be based on manufacturer's published rating. Any 

materials and equipment which are not in accordance with these specifications may be 

rejected. Contractor shall not order materials and equipment without the submittal first being 

approved. Ordering of material and equipment without prior approval may be rejected by the 

State. 

E. Prior to start of any field work, required copies of to scale shop drawings of equipment, 

ductwork, piping and controls shall be submitted for review. No work shall be started 

without approval from the State. Where apparatus and equipment have been indicated on the 

contract drawings, dimensions have been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated. 

The shop drawings shall show the details of construction and installation of the particular 

equipment being furnished. The shop drawings shall be fully dimensioned to show the 

equipment, materials and connections fit the space provided. 

1. Contractor shall check the submittals and shop drawings and certify they are correct and 

in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications. 

2. Review of shop drawings by the State's representatives is confined to arrangement of 

equipment and fixtures only and does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for 

proper fit, performance and construction. Any deviation from the Contract drawings and 

specifications shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings. Since manufacturing methods 

vary, reasonable variations from the Contract Documents are acceptable; however, 

performance and material requirements indicated are the minimum acceptable and the 

State retains the right to judge the equality of any variation. 




REQUIREMENTS

F. Unless otherwise specified here or under Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, 

submit eight (8) copies of each submittal required for approval: 

1. Substitution Requests: Substitute materials or equipment may be used if qualified by 

written permission from the State. Submit a list of the substitutions with qualifying data 

for approval prior to bidding in accordance with Section 016000 PRODUCT 

REQUIREMENTS. 

2. Shop Drawings: Submit prints of dimensioned shop drawings, indicating equipment 

layout, piping, hangers, equipment bases, support details, wiring diagrams for control, 

and locations and sizes of pipe sleeves and duct openings. Drawings shall indicate 

adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment 

devices and components. Coordinate drawings with other trades to avoid interferences. 

Drawings shall be minimum 24 inches by 36 inches in size, except as specified 

elsewhere. Provide one (1) set of reproducible transparencies and six (6) sets of bond 

prints. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of 

a complete installation or proper performance. No work shall commence until shop 

drawings are approved by the Contracting Officer. 

a. The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval, and submit all Shop 

Drawings required by the Contract Documents. 

b. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer in 

writing of any deviations in the Shop Drawings from the requirements of the 

Contract Documents. 

c. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, the Contractor certifies that he has 

determined and verified all field measurements and obstructions, field construction 

criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, that he has checked and 

coordinated each Shop Drawing with the requirements of the work and of the 

Contract Documents and that all equipment fits within designated spaces. 

3. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: 

a. Submit certification from the manufacturer attesting that materials and equipment 

to be furnished for this project comply with the requirements of this specification 

and of the reference publications. Preprinted certifications will not be acceptable; 

certifications shall be in the original. The certification shall not contain statements 

that could be interpreted to imply that the product does not meet all requirements 

specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the same end use and result as materials 

formulated in accordance with the referenced publication," "equal or exceed the 

service and performance of the specified material." The certification shall simply 

state that the product conforms to the requirements specified. 

b. Standards Compliance: When materials or equipment are specified to conform to 

the standards of organizations such as the American National Standards Institute 

(ANSI), Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), Air Movement and 

Control Association (AMCA), American Society for Testing and Materials 

(ASTM), Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FMERC or FM), 

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection 

Association (NFPA), and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such 

conformance shall be submitted to the State for approval. If an organization uses a 

label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing 

will be acceptable evidence, unless otherwise specified in the individual sections. 

In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor may submit a certificate from an 

independent testing organization, which is competent to perform acceptable test 

and is approved by the State. The certificate shall state that the item has been 

tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and the item 

conforms to the specified organization's standard. For materials and equipment 

whose compliance with organizational standards of specifications is not regulated 

by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, a 




REQUIREMENTS

certificate of compliance from the manufacturer shall be submitted for approval. 

The certificate shall identify the manufacturer, the product and the referenced 

standard and shall simply state that the manufacturer certifies that the product 

conforms to all requirements of the project specification and of the referenced 

standards listed. 

4. Product Data: Submit data of equipment showing manufacturer's name, trade name, 

catalog model or number, project specification and paragraph reference, material 

specifications, performance data, certified dimensions and motor sizes. Performance data 

shall meet the criteria and standards specified in the technical sections for the model 

being furnished. Submit eight (8) complete sets. Equipment and material shall not be 

ordered without prior approval of the submittal from the State. 

5. Reports: Submit as required by individual technical sections. 

6. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit bound copies of the Operating and 

Maintenance Manual on all equipment and the system as a whole. 

7. Equipment Listing: Submit schedules of mechanical equipment which include a 

complete list of materials and equipment together with names and addresses of 

manufacturers and the Hawaii based authorized representative, catalog numbers, and 

trade names. 

8. Maintenance Service Contract: Submit Maintenance Service Contract as required in 

paragraph 3.08. 

9. As-Built Drawings: Submit As-Built drawings as required in Section 017700 

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 

1.5 LAWS, REGULATIONS AND CODES 

A. The following shall govern where applicable; the Uniform Building Code as amended by the 

City and County of Honolulu Code, State of Hawaii Department of Health Regulations, the 

Uniform Fire Code as amended by the City and County of Honolulu Code, National Fire 

Protection Association Standards, the Uniform Plumbing Code as amended by the City and 

County of Honolulu Code, OSHA Rules and Regulations and all other codes and standards 

referenced in these specifications and as adopted by City and County of Honolulu. Where 

requirements differ in these codes and standards, the more stringent shall apply. 

1.6 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS 


inspections required for this project. 

B. The Contractor shall apply and pay for all necessary inspections required by any public 

authority having jurisdiction. 

1.7 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS 

A. Equipment installed under this Division of the Specifications shall be installed according to 

the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in 

this section. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in 

accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the equipment being installed, 

printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer, prior 

to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the 

recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause or 

rejection of the equipment. 

B. Certain specified construction and details may not be regularly included in the manufacturer's 

catalogued product. The Contractor shall provide the material or equipment complete as 




REQUIREMENTS

specified. 

1.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Bound Instructions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish six (6) copies and (1) CD of an 

operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting manual for each item of equipment and the 

system as a whole. Furnish the manual bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent. 

Furnish one (1) complete manual prior to the time that equipment tests are performed and 

furnish the remaining manuals before the contract is completed. Inscribe the following 

identification on the cover; the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the 

name and location of the building, the name of the Contractor, the name of the Consultant, 

date, and the contract number. The manual shall include the names, addresses and telephone 

numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and of the local representative for each 

item of equipment. Also include a list of equipment by manufacturer, with the model number 

and serial number, tag number, quantity of each unit, location of unit, and area served. When 

standard manufacturer's brochures are used, adequately indicate (highlight, arrow, etc.) the 

project related information and delete (X or cross-out) the non-applicable information. 

Flysheet or divider sheet shall be placed before instructions covering each subject. The 

instruction sheets shall be approximately 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with large sheets of drawings 

folded in. The manual shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table 

of contents with the tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The 

instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The 

manual shall include: 

1. System layout showing equipment, ductwork, piping, controls, etc.; 

2. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each 

item of equipment; 

3. A control sequence describing startup, operation and shutdown; 

4. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment; 

5. The procedure for starting; 

6. The procedure for operating; 

7. Shutdown instructions; 

8. Maintenance instructions; 

9. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range and frequency; 

10. Manufacturer's bulletins, cuts and descriptive data; 

11. Safety precautions, test procedures; performance data; and 

12. Parts list. The parts lists for equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, 

recommended spare parts and the service organization which is reasonably convenient to 

the project site. 

The manual shall be complete in all respects for equipment, controls, accessories and 

associated appurtenances provided. 

1.9 SPARE-PARTS DATA 

A. After approval of materials and equipment and one month prior to the date of beneficial 

occupancy, the Contractor shall furnish a complete list of parts and supplies, with current 

source of supply. 




REQUIREMENTS

1.10 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT OR MATERIAL 

A. Design is based on equipment and material as described in drawings. Any changes in 

equipment, bases, piping, connections, controls, electrical equipment specified and required 

by the approved substitutions shall be made by Contractor at no additional cost to the State. 

Contractor shall ensure proper fit, clearances, compatibility with other trades (e.g. electrical, 

ceiling, etc.), compatibility with controls and communication with the controls system, 

operation and maintainability for any equipment or material that is substituted for that 

indicated. 

1.11 DISCREPANCIES 

A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to be cooperative. Any materials, equipment 

or system related to this division and exhibited on the Architectural, Electrical or Mechanical 

Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications are to be executed to the intent and 

meaning thereof, as if it were both mentioned in the Specifications and set forth on the 

Drawings. 

B. In case of differences between the Drawings and Specifications, the Specifications shall 

govern first, and then the Drawings. Large scale details shall take precedence over small 

scale Drawings as to the shape and details of construction. Specifications shall govern as to 

materials. 

C. Drawings and Specifications are intended to be fully cooperative and to agree, but should any 

discrepancy or apparent difference occur between Drawings and Specifications or should 

errors occur in the work of others affecting the work, the Contractor shall notify the 

Contracting Officer at once. If the Contractor proceeds with the work affected without 

instructions from the State, he is responsible for that change and shall correct any resultant 

damage, rework, extra work or defect at no additional cost to the State. All interpretations of 

Drawings and Specifications shall be clarified by the Contracting Officer. 

1.12 OMISSIONS 

A. It is the intent of the plans and specifications to provide a complete installation. Should there 

be omissions, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Contracting Officer to such 

omissions in fifteen (15) days advance of the date of bid opening so the necessary corrections 

can be made. 


A. The Contractor shall guarantee and certify in writing the following items: 

1. All equipment, piping, accessories and material furnished for a period of one (1) year 

commencing after 30 consecutive days of trouble-free operation from the date of final 

acceptance against all defects in material and workmanship. If any equipment, piping or 

material fails, does not operate satisfactorily or shows undue wear, the Contractor will be 

notified, and shall be required to correct the defect and damage to other work caused by 

such defect, immediately and at no additional cost to the State. If the above period of 

warranty does not coincide with the manufacturer's standard warranty period, the 

contractor shall include all costs for extending the warranty for the period specified above 

in his bid. 

2. All equipment, piping and materials to provide the results specified or shown. 




REQUIREMENTS

3. All equipment to be properly installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations and to be free of vibration or objectionable noise. 

4. All piping to be drip free and properly installed to be free of vibration, pounding or 

objectionable noise. 

B. The above guarantee shall not be interpreted as voiding, limiting or reducing any equipment 


C. The State shall have the right to require a written certificate, dated and signed by a 

responsible employee of the Contractor, evidencing the performance of any portion of the 

work, or any testing; as a condition precedent to the acceptance of any work or the result of 

any test. Whenever a regulatory agency performs inspections or tests of any portion of the 

work, a certificate shall be furnished by the Contractor showing the inspection or test was 

satisfactorily passed. 

D. Contractor shall provide a written guarantee that all work is as specified, and shall be bound 

to reinstall material or equipment defective due to workmanship or materials for a period of 

one (1) year commencing after 30 consecutive days of trouble-free operation from the date of 

final acceptance by the State. Contractor shall not be responsible, however, for defects 

proven to the State's satisfaction to be due to misuse, accident or negligence by other parties. 

E. Further, Contractor shall be held responsible for all damages to any part of the premises, 

building or contents caused by leaks or other defects in pipe, equipment or materials provided 

under this specification, of a period of one (1) year commencing after 30 consecutive days of 

trouble-free operation from the date of final acceptance of the installation by the Contracting 

Officer. 

F. Terms of this guarantee are in addition to other guarantee provisions of the specifications, and 

do not substitute for other more stringent terms, if any. 

G. In addition to the Guarantee on materials and workmanship, Installer shall provide a 

Maintenance Service Contract, Countersigned by the General Contractor, that will validate 

said guarantee. 

1.14 ELECTRICAL WORK 

A. All power wiring, including final hookup to all mechanical equipment will be provided under 

the Electrical Division of this Specification. Control devices for mechanical systems required 

that are energized from the power system (i.e. 100 volts and higher) shall be provided by the 

Mechanical Subcontractor. The power wiring, conduits and appurtenant work including 

connection to the mechanical equipment and control devices shall be provided by the 

Electrical Subcontractor. 

B. Electrical work under Electrical Division of the specifications is based on the electrical rating 

of equipment indicated on the Mechanical Drawings. Additional electrical work caused by 

any deviation under the requirements of the Mechanical Division drawings and specifications 

shall be paid for by the Mechanical Subcontractor. 

C. All control wiring for communication, signals and control power less than 100 volts are 

included under mechanical work and shall be in accordance with Division 26 ELECTRICAL 

requirements, except where specified otherwise in Division 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, 

AND AIR CONDITIONING. 

D. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish all starters, variable speed drives, control 




REQUIREMENTS

1.15 SAMPLES 

transformers, motor controllers, any disconnect devices specified as part of the mechanical 

equipment and any other electrically powered devices for installation by the Electrical 

Subcontractor. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall turn over these items to the Division 26 

ELECTRICAL Subcontractor at the site after receipt of notice from the Electrical 

Subcontractor that he is ready to install said items. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install 

these devices and provide the labor and materials to connect to the power system. 

A. When called for in the Technical Sections, furnish samples of materials which accurately 

represent if not identical to the materials to be used. Where samples are specified to 

demonstrate method of installation, furnish all materials, labor, ingredients and tools. 

Samples shall also be furnished when materials are proposed as substitutions for those 

specified. Materials used in the work shall be identical to samples that have been approved 

by the Contracting Officer. 

1.16 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 



delivery, storage, installation, and the remainder of the contract period after installation. 



A. As specified in all sections of Division 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR 

CONDITIONING. 

B. Materials and equipment shall be cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in 

production of such materials or equipment and shall be manufacturer's latest design that 

complies with the specification requirements. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items 

that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use at least 2 years in Hawaii prior to 

bid opening. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these 

items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the items 

need not be the products of the same manufacturer except where specified. Each item of 

equipment shall have the manufacturer's nameplate. Name of the distributing agent in lieu of 

the manufacturer's nameplate will not be acceptable. 

C. All materials shall be new, of equivalent or better quality than of materials specified. For 

ease of maintenance and parts replacement, select equipment from a single manufacturer as 

much as possible. Substitutions require approval. 

2.2 NAMEPLATES 

A. Each item of equipment shall have manufacturer's nameplate of corrosion resisting metal 

attached in a conspicuous location. Nameplate data shall include manufacturer's name, 

address, model number, serial number, capacity, rating and such other performance data as 

required to completely identify the item. In addition, the manufacturer shall provide a 

separate corrosion resisting metal tag or plastic, unless specified otherwise, to carry the 

equipment designation as shown on drawings. Except as otherwise specified nameplate 

lettering shall be stamped or engraved on the nameplate. Nameplates shall be fastened by 

means of corrosion resisting metal screws, rivets or wire, 14-gage. In addition, each piece of 




REQUIREMENTS

equipment shall be provided an identification tag in accordance with the paragraph entitled 

“Identification Tags for Mechanical Equipment and Devices”. 

2.3 TOOLS AND SUPPLIES 

A. Special tools and supplies shall be provided if required to maintain equipment provided for 

this project. The items shall be packaged or boxed to provide protection in storage, and shall 

be identified as to use. Tools and supplies shall be accompanied by information as to source 

of supply. 

2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED PAINT 

A. Ferrous surfaces of equipment shall have baked enamel finish painting as standard with the 

manufacturer. Special coating shall be applied when specified in the Technical Sections, and 

in such cases the coating used shall be certified in compliance with the Certificates paragraph 

in this section. 

B. All interior, exposed ferrous support materials shall have factory-applied protective coating. 

C. All exterior, exposed ferrous support materials shall have factory-applied protective prime 

coat as follows: 

1. Pre-Treatment: Commercial Blast Cleaning in accordance with Steel Structures Painting 

Council No. 6 (not less than 2 mils profile). 

2. Primer: Epoxy based or as recommended by the paint manufacturer and shall be 

asbestos-free, lead-free, cadmium-free, zinc-chromate-free and mercury-free. 

2 5 MOTORS 

A. Provide premium efficiency type motors designed for the supply voltages made available for 

this portion of the work, and with the following attributes: 

1. Sized to develop the required brake horsepower and to operate satisfactorily with a 

voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent; 

2. Conforming to NEMA motor standards; 

3. Dynamically balanced, and held to commercial tolerance; 

4. Selected so that, when ambient temperature reaches 120 degrees F for a period of two 

hours or more, the motor will operate satisfactorily without failure. 

5. With squirrel-cage type drip-proof enclosure, unless otherwise indicated, constant speed, 

across-the-line normal starting torque designed for quiet operation; 

6. Each motor of ample size to operate its unit at proper full load and speed continuously, 

without heating in any part more than 40 degrees C above the temperature of the 

surrounding atmosphere. 

7. Where TEFC motors are indicated or specified, the cast iron frame type shall be 

provided. 

B. Where motor is used with V-belt drive, equip with a sliding base and belt guard, and motor 

sheave. 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 230300-10 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS


3.1 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS 

A. The Contractor shall check all dimensions at the site and shall establish all lines and levels. 

The Contractor shall be responsible for correctness of all dimensions and fitting of 

equipment, ductwork, fixtures and piping into the available space. Should field 

measurements show conditions that require relocation of any work, such conditions shall be 

reported to the Contracting Officer in advance of installation, and the work shall proceed in 

accordance with his decisions. 

3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS 

A. Ducts, conduits (if provided by Division 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR 

CONDITIONING technical specifications) and pipe openings shall be closed with caps or 

plugs until connections are made. Equipment shall be securely covered for protection against 

physical or chemical damage. In areas exposed to weather, materials unused at the end of 

each day's work shall be stored in weather-protected locations. Damage to materials or 

equipment due to the Contractor's neglect shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of 

the Contracting Officer by, and at the expense of the Contractor 

3.3 LOCAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT 

A. The mechanical equipment suppliers that furnish equipment for this project shall have a local 

Hawaii sales and service office, staffed with factory trained representatives fully capable of 

providing instruction, routine maintenance and emergency maintenance service on all system 

components supplied for this project. If the maintenance service is provided by a separate 

company, that company shall be specifically trained by manufacturer and authorized to 

perform maintenance on the equipment furnished for this project. 

3.4 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Belts, pulley, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts 

located so that any person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or 

properly guarded. High temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger 

personnel or create a fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a 

type as specified in other mechanical sections. Items such as catwalks, ladders and guard 

rails shall be provided where required for safe operation and maintenance of equipment. 

3.5 PAINTING 

A. Unless specified in other mechanical specification sections, the Contractor shall be 

responsible for complete coverage in painting all exposed ferrous metal that has not been 

factory finish coated. 

3.6 PIPING IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identification of all new pipe lines shall be by means of colored, waterproof, all temperature, 

self-adhering labels and directional arrow. Refer to painting section for color coding of 

existing and new piping. 



REQUIREMENTS

B. At Contractor's option, each and every system may be identified by painting with contrasting 

colors, using 3/4" high minimum stencil letters. Painting shall be done by the Mechanical 

Contractor. 

C. All exposed pipes, whether insulated or not shall be identified. Labels may be omitted from 

piping where the use is obvious, due to its connection to equipment and where the appearance 

would be objectionable in finished rooms, as approved by direction. 

D. Identification labels shall be placed as follows: 

1. Near each valve and branch connection. 

2. Wherever piping merges or disappears from view from the floor of the room in which it 

is installed. 

3. Labels shall not be more than 50 feet apart. 

3.7 VALVE INDEX 

A. Valves shall be identified with brass tags where identification is required by other mechanical 

sections of these specifications. 

B. Attach tags with stainless steel chains or wires to valve body or stems. Attachment shall be 

permanent. 

C. Tag numbers shall match identification numbers shown on as-built drawings. 

D. Provide 1-1/2-inch diameter brass tags for all valves with identification numbers as indicated. 

Each tag shall have stamped service designation and valve number designation in 1/4-inch 

black-filled letters over 1/2-inch black-filled numbers. Tags shall be fastened to valves with 

brass jack chain. Chart of all valves shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall include: 

1. Valve I.D. number 

2. Location 

3. Purpose of system 

4. Normally open or normally closed 

3.8 IDENTIFICATION TAGS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES 

A. All mechanical equipment, panels, control devices such as temperature sensors, carbon 

dioxide sensors, pressure transmitters, pressure gauges and other devices shall be provided 

with an identification tag that indicates the name of the item. The name shall coincide with 

the Operations and Maintenance Manual and the as-built drawings. 

B. The tag shall be plastic nameplate, 1" x 3" minimum size, engraved laminated phenolic, white 

with black core. The tags shall be fastened to the equipment or device with metal screws or 

fastened with a brass jack chain if it cannot be mounted with screws. 

3.9 FIELD INSTRUCTION 

A. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated, the services of one or more qualified 

personnel shall be provided by the Contractor for a period of not less than 40 hours to train 

and provide technical assistance to the State’s representatives in the operation and 

maintenance of the air conditioning and ventilation system. These field instructions shall 

cover all the items contained in the bound instructions. Submit course outline, instructor’s 

name and an on-site training schedule. The training shall be as follows: 

1. Provide overview and provide as-built plans, diagrams, operating and technical manuals 

for the entire air conditioning and ventilation system. 



REQUIREMENTS

2. Identify, locate and explain the function of control devices at individual pieces of air 

conditioning units. 

3. Identify, locate and explain the operation and access of the control panels for each piece 

of equipment. Explain the sequence of operation and the control setpoints and how to 

change setpoints. 


A. In addition to the guarantee on materials and workmanship, the installer shall submit copies 

of the Maintenance Service Contract, countersigned by the Contractor, that will validate the 

guarantee. 

B. The maintenance service shall extend for a period of one (1) year commencing after 30 

consecutive days of trouble-free operation after the Project Acceptance Date or the equipment 

acceptance date, if earlier than the Project Acceptance Date, and shall include all labor, 

materials, equipment and parts necessary to service the complete system, in accordance with 

the attached Schedule of Maintenance Service so as to assure proper operation and function 

of the system. All costs for the periodic maintenance, including emergency calls, shall be 

borne by the Contractor. The maintenance period and guarantee period shall run concurrently 

(same start and stop dates). Should the contractor default in maintenance servicing, the 

service contract shall restart and continue until completion and the warranty shall be extended 

to match the new service period. 

C. Trouble-free operation is defined as a non-disabling condition of a non-recurring failure or 

disruption and the following: 

1. The system shall be free of all discrepancies, contamination and debris which requires 

correction in excess of those described for the monthly service which is included in the 

Schedule of Maintenance. 

2. The system is maintaining operational conditions and other parameters as measured 

during acceptance tests. 

D. Periodic basis shall mean a minimum of once every month unless specifically noted 

otherwise. Where the Manufacturer's Service Manual requires a shorter period, the shorter 

period shall apply. Where there are more than one service periods shown, all services shall 

be provided. For example, if a monthly and annual service are indicated, the annual service 

shall be performed in addition to the monthly service scheduled for that month. 

E. For each system provided by this contract, the Installer shall include a listing of the following 

items along with the Maintenance Service Contract: 

1. Name of the servicing contractor. 

2. System acceptance date. 

3. Service contract expiration date. 

4. Monthly inspection schedule for the maintenance period. 

5. Itemized listing of the equipment covered under the service contract, including a 

description of the equipment identified, its model and serial numbers and manufacturer's 

name(s). 

F. The Maintenance Service Contract shall be submitted along with the Operations and 

Maintenance Manual on/or before the Project Acceptance Date. 

Distribution of submittal: 

1copy: 

Contractor 



REQUIREMENTS

1 copy: DAGS Windward District 

1 copy: DAGS Quality Control Branch 

2 copies: DAGS Central Services Division 

2 copies: User (District Office and School) 

G. The Contractor shall keep a separate log recording all maintenance calls to the project at 

Contractor's office. Log shall include at least the following information. 

1. Name of person making service call. 

2. Date of call. 

3. Time in and out from project. 

4. Nature of call. 

5. Equipment readings and maintenance performed. 

6. The type and cost (labor, materials, parts and equipment) of repair work performed on the 

unit, if any. 

7. Documents and other data pertaining to the maintenance performed. 

It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain the report/checklist by recording the 

above noted date after each scheduled maintenance and emergency repairs, and have the 

checklist available for inspection at the building site. The report shall be sufficiently detailed 

to properly reflect the past maintenance history of the equipment. 

Reports shall be prepared on contractor - furnished standardized forms and signed by the 

Building’s maintenance representative. A copy of the report shall be submitted to the 

Building’s maintenance representative within 2 working days after each visit. This submittal 

is in addition to the normal submittal requirements of the contract. 

In addition, the Contractor shall submit written reports of maintenance performed within 

seven (7) days to the Contracting Officer. (See Service Maintenance Report form attached) 

H. Work Schedule: All maintenance work shall be performed between the hours of 7:30 a.m. to 

4:00 p.m., on normal working days, Monday through Friday, excluding State holidays. 

The contractor shall notify the Building’s maintenance representative at least 4 working days 

prior to the service work date. 

I. Trouble Calls: 

1. Emergency service and repairs required between regular service calls shall be rendered 

within 24 hours after the Contractor is notified, non-work days excluded. 

2. The Contractor shall call the Contracting Officer and DAGS Central Services Division 

(Phone No. 831-7935) the next working day after being notified of the problem and 

report the status of repairs. 

J. All costs for periodic maintenance services and for emergency calls shall be included in the 

lump sum bid price. 

K. Maintenance Schedule: As described on attachments following this section: 

Attachment A - Schedule of Maintenance Service - Air Conditioning and Ventilation System 

and Attachment B –Direct Digital Controls. 



REQUIREMENTS

L. The Maintenance Service Contract does not include repairs resulting from vandalism, 

negligent use or misuse of equipment. 

3.11 CLEANUP AND WORK PRACTICES 

A. The Contractor shall keep the job site free of debris, litter, discarded parts, etc. and shall clean 

all oil drippings during the daily progress of work. The Contractor shall remove all tools, 

parts and equipment from the service areas upon completion of the work. 

B. The Contractor shall exercise caution during the progress of his maintenance and repair work 

to prevent damage to the ceilings, roofing and other building structure. The Contractor shall 

restore all damages, caused by his negligence, to its original condition at his own expense. 



REQUIREMENTS

SERVICE MAINTENANCE REPORT 

DATE:______________________________SHEET NO.______________________________________ 

1. Name of Facility and Location: ____________________________________________________ 

2. Submitted By: _________________________________________________________________ 

3. Date of Service Call: ____________________________________________________________ 

4. Name of Person(s) Making Call: ___________________________________________________ 

5. Time In, Time Out at Site: ________________________________________________________ 

6. Person(s) Contacted: ____________________________________________________________ 

7. Nature of Service Call: (Routine Maintenance or Emergency, Explain) 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

8. Equipment Readings and Maintenance Performed: (List all items serviced: identify - 8a, 8b, 8c, . . 

. ,etc.): 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

ATTACHMENT A 



REQUIREMENTS

SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM 

All services performed by the Contractor shall include applicable items listed but shall not be limited to 

the following maintenance tasks: 

A. AIR HANDLING AND FAN COIL UNITS 

Monthly Service 

1. Clean and clear all drip pans and flush all related condensate drain lines with nitrogen. 

(Note: Contractor may be liable for water damage due to clogged drains.) Install pan 

tablets if necessary to control algae growth. 

2. Change all disposable air filters at least once a month; use FARR 30/30 or equal. 

3. Wash permanent type filters with an approved detergent and spray coat with an approved 

filter treatment solution. Replace deteriorated permanent type filters which cannot be 

cleaned. 

4. Lubricate and oil all fan and motor bearings and connections of dampers and vanes. 

5. Check all drives for wear; adjust belt tension. Replace belt as required. 

6. Operate equipment to check for proper operation, unusual noise and vibration; adjust or 

repair all equipment and controls as required; clean-up all equipment. 

7. Check time clock for proper operation and time settings. 

8. Check operation of AFC drives as applicable. 

9. Certify performance of monthly service and correct and report all discrepancies. 

Annual Service 

1. Adjust alignment of bearings and sheaves; lubricate fan and motor bearings. Replace 

worn or noisy bearings or sheaves. 

2. Clean cooling coils of dirt accumulation using nitrogen, high pressure air/water, steam or 

chemical coil cleaner solution. 

3. Check pressure and temperature differential across cooling coils and log readings. Clean 

strainers, check vents and drains on chilled water coils. 

4. Clean supply and return air grilles, registers and diffusers and fresh air intake grilles and 

dampers and repair or replace deteriorated bird screens. 

5. Clean and adjust water valve, clean strainer (chilled water) and clean all fan wheels and 

interior and exterior of equipment housings. 

6. Check and calibrate all electric and electronic temperature controls. 

7. Verify operation of water detector where installed. 

8. Certify performance of annual service and correct and report all discrepancies. 

B. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 


1. Check ductwork for leakage, damage, and corrosion. 

2. Check duct and devices for noise and vibration. 

3. Check ductwork for loose connections and damage. 

4. Certify performance of monthly maintenance service and correct and report all 

discrepancies. 

Semi-Annual Service 



REQUIREMENTS

1. Clean all air devices. 

2. Re-balance and test complete system including adjustment of fan speeds and 

measurement of cooling coil performance to restore to the operating conditions from the 

test and balance report submitted during construction. Submit test and balance report 

after completion. 

3. Paint damaged or weathered ductwork. 

4. Certify performance of monthly maintenance service and correct and report all 


C. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING 


1. Clean and clear all drip pans and flush all related condensate drain lines with nitrogen. 

(Note: Contractor may be liable for water damage due to clogged drains.) Install pan 

tablets if necessary to control algae growth 

2. Check all condensate drain piping and fittings for leaks. 

3. Check condition of insulation; re-insulate as necessary. 

4. Drain dirt leg. 

5. Certify performance of monthly maintenance service and that all discrepancies are 

reported and corrected. 

D. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (FOR PACKAGED EQUIPMENT WITH INTERNAL 

CONTROLS) 

Quarterly Service 

1. Check control devices for proper operation, sticking stems and calibration; repair or 

replace weak or broken springs and all other parts. 

2. Check automatic dampers for tightness in closing, bent blades and defective linkage; 

lubricate connections for free movement and repair as required. 

3. Adjust thermostat to maintain 75 degrees F room temperature or operation set points as 

desired. 

4. Certify performance of quarterly maintenance service and that all discrepancies are 

reported and corrected. 

. 



REQUIREMENTS

ATTACHMENT B 

SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS 

All services performed by the Contractor shall include applicable items listed but shall not be limited to 

the following maintenance tasks: 

Quarterly Service 

1. Check circuits and operation of all temperature controls and sequencing system for air 

conditioning system, including dampers and valves in accordance with the sequence of 

operation. 

2. Check control devices for proper operation, sticking stems and calibration; repair or 

replace weak or broken springs and all other parts. 

3. Check automatic dampers for tightness in closing, bent blades and defective linkage; 

lubricate connections for free movement and repair as required. 

4. Adjust temperature setpoint to maintain 75 degrees F room temperature or operation set 

points as desired. 

5. Check setpoints of all adjustable setpoint parameters. 

6. Printout points list with the recorded readings for each point taken at the time of the 

service visit. Compare readings to previous quarter's data and report any abnormal or 

unexpected changes. 

7. Certify performance of annual maintenance service and correct and report all 


Annual Service 

1. Check calibration of all field devices and recalibrate where required. 

2. Update any software that has been revised with a more current version if a new release 

has been made since the initial construction. Check system is meeting sequence of 

operation. Reprogram as required to meet specified sequence of operation. 

3. Provide all services of quarterly service. 

4. Certify performance of annual maintenance service and correct and report all 





REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The work includes testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of new air conditioning system, 

including equipment and ducts, which are located within the building. 





B. Ductwork for air conditioning and ventilation specified in Section 233300 AIR DUCT 

ACCESSORIES. 

C. Air conditioning and ventilation system controls specified in Section 230923 DIRECT- 

DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. 

D. Air handling units and fans specified in Section 237323 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT. 


A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and Section 

230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

B. Certificates: 

1. Independent TAB agency personnel qualifications 

2. Design review report 

3. Pre-field TAB engineering report 

4. Advanced notice TAB field work 

5. Check out list 

C. Independent TAB Agency Personnel Qualifications: For agency proposed for approval, 

submit information certifying that: The TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not 

affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract; the work to be 

perform by the TAB agency shall be limited to testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC air 

and water systems to satisfy the requirements of this specification section. Submit the 

following, for the agency, to the Engineer for approval in compliance with paragraph entitled 

"TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements." 

1. Independent AABC or NEBB certified TAB agency: 

a. TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current 

certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of current 

certification. 

b. TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB TAB supervisor 

certificate and expiration date of current certification. 

c. TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team field leader 

meets the qualification requirements. 

d. TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each field 

technician meets the qualification requirements. 

e. Current certificates: Registrations and certifications shall be current, and valid for 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 230593-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 

BALANCING FOR HVAC

the duration of this contract. Certifications which expire prior to completion of the 

TAB work, shall be renewed in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in 

registration or certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current 

registration or current certification shall not perform TAB work on this contract. 

f. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if each 

new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications and each is 

approved by the Engineer. 

D. Design Review Report: Submit typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the 

HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the duct 

leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section. Provide a complete 

explanation including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency. State that 

no deficiencies are evident if that is the case. 

E. Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report: Submit report containing the following information: 

1. Step-by-step TAB procedure: 

a. Strategy: Describe the method of approach to the TAB field work from start to 

finish. Include in this description a complete methodology for accomplishing the 

TAB field work session. 

b. Procedural steps: Delineate fully the intended procedural steps to be taken by the 

TAB field team to accomplish the required TAB work of each air distribution 

system and each water distribution system. Include intended procedural steps for 

TAB work for subsystems and system components. 

2. Pre-field data: Submit AABC or NEBB or SMACNA HVACTAB data report forms with 

the following pre-field information filled in: 

a. Design data obtained from system drawings, specifications, and approved 

submittals. 

b. Notations detailing additional data to be obtained from the contract site by the TAB 

field team. 

c. Designate the actual data to be measured in the TAB field work. 

d. Provide a list of the types of instruments, and the measuring range of each, which 

are anticipated to be used for measuring in the TAB field work. By means of a 

keying scheme, specify on each TAB data report form submitted, which 

instruments will be used for measuring each item of TAB data. If the selection of 

which instrument to use, is to be made in the field, specify from which instruments 

the choice will be made. The instrument key number shall be placed in the blank 

space where the measured data would be entered. 

3. Prerequisite HVAC work checkout list: A list of inspections and work items which are to 

be completed by the Contractor, and submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to the 

TAB team coming to the contract site. At a minimum, a list of the applicable inspections 

and work items listed in the NEBB TABES, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures" 

under paragraphs entitled "Air Distribution System Inspection" and "Hydronic 

Distribution System Inspection." Also, list as prerequisite work items, the deficiencies 

pointed out by the TAB subcontractor in his design review report. 

F. Advanced Notices: Submit "Advanced Notice for TAB Field Work" in writing. 

G. Completed Check Out Lists: Submit "Prerequisite HVAC Work Checkout List" and certify 

in writing that each item has been checked and is operating as designed. 

H. Field Test Reports: 

1. Certified TAB report 

2. Field Test Reports: Submit certified reports in the specified format including the above 



BALANCING FOR HVAC


data. 

a. Certified TAB Reports: 

(1) Report format: Bind the report with a waterproof front and back cover. 

Include a table of contents identifying by page number the location of each 

report. Report forms and report data shall be typewritten. Handwritten 

report forms or report data are not acceptable. 

(2) Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished 

on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and outdoor 

dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb temperature 

range within which the TAB data was recorded. 

(3) Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the tab 

data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, 

calibration date, and calibration expiration date. 

(4) Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated 

signature of the TAB supervisor. 

3. TAB Submittal and Work Schedule: Compliance with the following schedule is the 

Contractor's responsibility. 

a. TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to start of field check, 

accomplish TAB field work; submit certified TAB report; and conduct field check. 

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The 

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 

1. ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC) 

AABC MN-1 

Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air 

Conditioning Systems 

2. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 

ANSI S1.4 (ASA 47) 

ANSI S1.11 (ASA 65) 

Sound Level Meters 

Octave- Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and 

Digital Filters 

3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING, AND AIR- 

CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. (ASHRAE) 

ASHRAE HA 

Handbook, HVAC Applications 

4. NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) 

NEBB TABES 

Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems 

5. SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL 

ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA) 

SMACNA HVACTAB HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 


A. Modifications of References: Accomplish work in accordance with referenced publications 

of AABC or NEBB except as modified by this section. In the references referred to herein, 

consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory, as though the word 

"shall" had been substituted for the words "should" or "could" or "may" wherever they 

appear. 

B. TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements: 

1. Independent AABC or NEBB Certified TAB Agency: 

a. Provide services of a TAB agency certified by AABC or NEBB to perform and 

manage TAB work on HVAC air systems. This TAB agency shall not be affiliated 

with any company participating in any other phase of this contract, including 



BALANCING FOR HVAC

design, furnishing equipment, or construction. 

2. TAB Team Personnel: The TAB team approved to accomplish work on this contract 

shall be full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel shall do TAB work 

on this contract. 

a. TAB Team Supervisor: Supervisor shall be qualified by AABC or NEBB as a 

TAB supervisor or a TAB engineer. 

b. TAB Team Field Leader: Leader shall have satisfactorily performed full-time 

supervision of TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately 

preceding this contract's bid opening date. 

c. TAB Team Field Technician: Technician shall have satisfactorily assisted a TAB 

team field leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than one 

year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date. 

C. Responsibilities: The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the 

requirements of this section. The following delineation of specific work responsibilities is 

specified to facilitate execution of the various work efforts by personnel from separate 

organizations. This breakdown of specific duties is specified to facilitate adherence to the 

schedule. 

1. Contractor: 

a. TAB personnel: Ensure that the TAB work is accomplished by a group meeting 

the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "TAB Personnel Qualification 

Requirements”. 

b. Pre-TAB meeting: Attend the meeting with the TAB Supervisor, and ensure that a 

representative is present for the sheetmetal contractor, mechanical contractor, and 

electrical contractor. 

c. HVAC documentation: Furnish one complete set of the following HVAC-related 

documentation to the TAB Agency: 

(1) Contract drawings and specifications 

(2) Approved submittal data for equipment 

(3) Construction work schedule 

(4) Up-to-date revisions and change orders for the previously listed items 

Submittal and work schedules: Ensure that the schedule for submittals and work 

required by this section are met. 

d. Coordination of supporting personnel: Provide the technical personnel, such as 

factory representatives or HVAC controls installer required by the TAB field team 

to support the TAB field measurement work. Provide equipment mechanics to 

operate HVAC equipment to enable TAB field team to accomplish the TAB field 

measurement work. Ensure these support personnel are present at the times 

required by the TAB team, and cause no delay in the TAB field work. Conversely, 

ensure that the HVAC controls installer has required support from the TAB team 

field leader to complete the controls check out. 

e. Deficiencies: Ensure that equipment defects, installation deficiencies, and design 

deficiencies reported by the TAB team field leader are brought to the attention of 

the Contracting Officer. Ensure that design deficiencies reported by the TAB field 

leader, or the TAB team supervisor, are transmitted to the Contracting Officer 

within 4 calendar days from date of receipt from the TAB agency. 

f. Prerequisite HVAC work: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC 

equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at the project site 

to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching for and eliminating 

malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system installations, and verifying all 

adjustable devices are functioning as designed. Prior to the TAB field team's 

arrival, ensure completion of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the 

TAB team supervisor's pre-field engineering report. List as prerequisite work 



BALANCING FOR HVAC

items, the deficiencies, pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design 

review report. Ensure that the TAB Agency gets a copy of the prerequisite HVAC 

work checklist specified in the paragraph entitled "Submittals." Do not allow the 

TAB team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed. 

(1) HVAC system installations are fully complete. 

(2) HVAC prerequisite checkout work lists have been completed, submitted, and 

approved. 

(3) HVAC system filters are clean for TAB field work. 

g. Advance notice: Furnish to the Engineer with advance written notice for each 

event, the commencement of the field work and for the commencement of the TAB 

field work. 

2. TAB Agency: Provide the services of a TAB team which complies with the requirements 

of paragraph entitled "TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements." 

a. TAB Team Supervisor: 

(1) Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work 

effort, including preliminary and technical TAB procedures and TAB team 

field work. 

(2) Pre-TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor. 

(3) Design review report: Review project specifications and accompanying 

drawings to verify that the air systems and water systems are designed in 

such a way that the TAB Team Field Leader can accomplish the work in 

compliance with the requirements of this section. Verify the presence and 

location of permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, 

including gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit 

setters, balancing valves, and manual volume dampers. 

(4) Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required from the 

Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory representatives for 

temperature controls or for complex equipment. Inform the Contractor in 

writing of the support personnel needed and when they are needed. Furnish 

the notice as soon as the need is anticipated, either with the design review 

report, or the pre-field engineering report or during the TAB field work. 

(5) Pre-field engineering report: Utilizing the following HVAC-related 

documentation; contract drawings and specifications, approved submittal 

data for equipment, up-to-date revisions and change orders; prepare this 

report. 

(6) Prerequisite HVAC work checklist: Ensure the Contractor gets a copy of 

this checklist at the same time as the pre-field engineering report is 

submitted. 

(7) Technical Assistance for TAB Work: Provide immediate technical 

assistance to the TAB field team for the TAB work. 

(8) Certified TAB report: Certify the TAB report. This certification includes 

the following work: 

(a) Review: Review the TAB field data report. From this field report, 

(b) 

prepare the certified TAB report. 

Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to the TAB 

plan prescribed by the pre-field engineering report and verify 

adherence to the procedures specified in this section. 

(9) Design deficiencies: Submit in writing as soon as possible, to the Contractor 

and the Engineer, each design deficiency reported by the TAB field team. 

Provide, in this submittal, a complete explanation including supporting 

documentation detailing the deficiency. 

(10) TAB Field Check: The TAB team supervisor shall attend and supervise 

TAB field check. 



BALANCING FOR HVAC

. TAB Team Field Leader 

(1) Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work 

specified in Part 3, "Execution." 

(2) Full time: Be present at the contract site when TAB field work is being 

performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day TAB team work 

accomplishments are in compliance with this section. 

(3) Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract site 

until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC Checklist, with all work items 

certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches the office of 

the TAB Agency. 

D. Re-Tab Meeting: Meet with the State's TAB representative and the designing engineer of the 

HVAC systems to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the TAB work 

requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this meeting. Requirements to be 

discussed include required submittals, work schedule, and field quality control. 


Not Used 


3.1 TAB PROCEDURES 

A. TAB Field Work: Test, adjust, and balance the listed HVAC systems to the state of operation 

indicated on and specified in the contract design documents. Air and water systems shall be 

proportionately balanced and reported in the TAB report. Provide instruments and 

consumables required to accomplish the TAB work. Conduct TAB work on the listed HVAC 

systems in conformance with the AABC MN-1, or NEBB TABES, except as modified by this 

section: 

1. Maintenance and calibration of instruments. 

2. Accuracy of measurements. 

3. Preliminary procedures: Test ports required for testing by the TAB engineer shall be 

located in the field by the TAB engineer during TAB field work. It shall be the 

responsibility of the sheetmetal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by 

the TAB engineer. 

4. Air distribution systems TAB work: Air handling units, fan coil units and fans including 

coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, 

and outside air. 

5. Water distribution systems TAB work: Chilled water, condenser water, reheat water, heat 

recovery water systems including chillers, condensers, cooling towers, pumps, coils, 

system balance valves and flow measuring devices. 

B. TAB work on performance tests: 

1. Performance tests: In addition to the TAB proportionate balancing work on the air 

distribution systems, accomplish TAB work on the HVAC systems which directly 

transfer thermal energy. TAB the operational performance of the cooling systems. 

2. Ambient temperatures: On each tab report form used for recording data, record the 

outdoor and indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor 

ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded. 

That is, record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking. 

3.2 WORKMANSHIP 



BALANCING FOR HVAC

A. Conduct TAB work on specified HVAC systems until measured parameters are within plus or 

minus 10 percent of the design values, that is, the values specified or indicated on the contract 

documents. To minimize the possibility of noise at the air device, “coarse” balancing shall be 

performed at the duct branch and “fine” balancing shall be performed at the face of the air 

device. 

3.3 DEFICIENCIES 

A. Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of the equipment as 

designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in equipment design or installation prevent 

TAB work from being accomplished within the range of design values specified in the 

paragraph entitled "Workmanship," provide written notice as soon as possible to the 

Contractor and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended 

correction. Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the Contractor's. If a 

deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team supervisor for technical assistance. 

Responsibility for reporting design deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's. 

3.4 DATA FROM TAB FIELD WORK 

A. After completion of the TAB work, prepare a pre-final TAB report. Data required shall be 

furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting 

Officer, the TAB work and the TAB report shall be considered incomplete until the TAB 

work is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph entitled 

"Workmanship" of this section. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the pre-final TAB 

report shall be the final TAB report minus the TAB supervisor's review and certification. 

Obtain, at the contract site, the TAB supervisor's review and certification of the TAB report. 

Verbally notify the Engineer’s TAB representative that the field check of the certified TAB 

report data can commence; give this verbal notice 48 hours in advance of when the field 

checking shall commence. Do not schedule field check of the certified TAB report until the 

specified workmanship requirements have been met or written approval of the deviations 

from the requirements have been received from the Engineer. 

3.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR TAB FIELD WORK 

A. Field check: Test shall be made to demonstrate that capacities and general performance of air 

and water systems comply with the contract requirements. 

1. Recheck: During field check, the Contractor shall recheck, in the presence of the 

Engineer, random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion, sound level 

readings) recorded in the certified report. 

2. Areas of recheck: Points and areas of recheck shall be selected by the engineer. 

3. Procedures: Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work for 

forming basis of the certified report. 

4. Recheck selections: Selections for recheck will not exceed 25 percent of the total number 

of reported data entries tabulated in the report. 

5. Retests: If random tests reveals a measured quantity which is out-of-tolerance, the report 

is subject to disapproval at the Engineers discretion. In the event the report is 

disapproved, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new certified 

reports submitted, and a new field check conducted at no additional cost to the 

Government. 

B. Approval prerequisite: Compliance with the field checking requirements of this section is a 

prerequisite to the final approval of the certified TAB report submitted. 



BALANCING FOR HVAC

3.6 MARKING OF SETTINGS 

A. Permanently mark the settings of HVAC adjustment devices including valves, splitters, and 

dampers so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. The permanent markings 

shall indicate the settings on the adjustment devices which result in the data reported on the 

submitted certified TAB report. 

3.7 MARKING OF TEST PORTS 

A. The TAB team shall permanently and legibly mark and identify the location points of the 

duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, these markings shall be made on the 

exterior side of the duct insulation. The location of test ports shall be shown on the as-built 

mechanical drawings with dimensions given where the test port is covered by exterior 

insulation. 




BALANCING FOR HVAC

SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the insulation for 

air conditioning, ventilation, plumbing and generator auxiliary systems complete, including 

but not limited to the following: 

1. Sheetmetal duct insulation. 

2. Pipe Insulation. 

3. Equipment Insulation 


5. Inspection, test and guarantee. 





B. Ductwork specified in Section 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES. 

C. Plumbing systems specified in Section 220000 PLUMBING. 

D. Air handling, fan coil units and exhaust fans specified in Section 237323 AIR HANDLING 

EQUIPMENT. 

E. Chilled water piping specified in SECTION 232113 CHILLED WATER PIPING. 


A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

B. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: 

1. Submit certificates of conformance for performance and characteristics specified, the 

listed standards and in accordance with Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS for the following: 

a. Duct Insulation 

b. Pipe Insulation 

C. Product Data: Submit product data for the following: 

1. Duct insulation. 

2. Pipe insulation. 

3. Equipment insulation that is not factory installed. 

4. Insulation accessories including vapor barrier, tape, and other items. 

D. Listing: List of materials showing name and addresses of manufacturers; manufacturer’s 

local supplier’s name, address and phone number; catalog numbers and trade names. 

E. Guarantee and Certificate: Submit one year guarantee and certificate in accordance with 

Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 



HVAC INSULATION



A. General: 

1. Provide materials complying with NFPA Bulletin 90-A, as determined by UL method 

NFPA 225-ASTM E84 or UL 181, with flame spread rating 25 and under and smoke 

developed rating 50 and under. 

2. Where vapor barriers are used, provide intact and continuous throughout. 

2.2 DUCT INSULATION 

A. All new interior air conditioning ducts and plenums shall be insulated. 

1. Insulate all supply, return, exhaust, transfer and outside air ducts with 1-1/2-inch thick, 

1.5 pounds per cubic foot density, FRK faced duct wrap. Provide Owens-Corning 

Fiberglass commercial grade faced duct wrap insulation Type 150, Certainteed, Schuller 

or approved equal. 

2. Duct wrap insulation shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification HH-I- 

558B, Form B, Type I, Class 6, B-4 and NFPA 90 with the reinforced foil-Kraft vapor 

barrier facing conforming to Federal Specification HH-I-100B, Type II. 

2.3 PIPE INSULATION 

A. All above grade indoor chilled water, domestic hot water and hot water return piping shall be 

insulated with Schuller Micro-Lok 650 with Vapor Barrier Jacket, Fiberglas heavy density 

pipe insulation with self-sealing, All Service Jacket (ASJ); Schuller; Certainteed or approved 

equal, having minimum density of 3.5 lb. cu. ft. and a maximum "K" factor of 0.22 Btu-in/hr- 

SF-degrees-F at 50 degrees F mean. Thickness of insulation shall be as follows: 

Thickness Pipe Size 

1 inch Up to 2 inches 

1-1/2 inches 2-1/2 inches and over 

B. The insulation shall be applied over clean, dry pipe with all joints firmly butted together. 

Longitudinal laps shall be sealed with Schuller vapor barrier adhesive, Foster or approved 

equal. Butt joints shall be wrapped with a 4-inch strip of the vapor barrier jacket cemented 

with vapor barrier adhesive. Each 3 ft. section of insulation and each butt strip shall be 

additionally secured with 3/4-inch wide Schuller No. 357 white tape, Foster or approved 

equal. 

C. Valve fitting for pipe sizes smaller than 4-inch shall be insulated with Schuller No. 301 

Insulating Cement, Foster or approved equal applied in one coat to a thickness equal to the 

adjoining tape insulation. Fittings for pipe sizes 4-inch and larger shall be insulated with 

Micro-Lok insulation, Owens-Corning, Certainteed or approved equal securely wired in 

place, and finished with a leveling coat of Schuller No. 301 Insulating Cement, Foster or 

approved equal. All fittings regardless of pipe size shall be finished with PVC fitting covers 

and sealed to maintain vapor barrier. 

D. Clamps or hangers in contact with pipe shall be insulated separately in the same manner as 

fitting. The insulation shall be applied upward along the vertical hanger rod to a point not 

less than 6 inches and sealed off. 



HVAC INSULATION

E. Protect pipe insulation at all hanger and support points. Where 1 inch thick insulation is 

used, it shall be protected by 12 inches long galvanized metal shield. Where 1-1/2-inch 

insulation is used, 12-inches long section of calcium silicate preformed pipe insulation with a 

vapor barrier jacket or cellular glass with vapor barrier jacket shall be installed at the hanger 

point and protected with a 16 gauge galvanized metal shield on the outside of the jacket. 

F. Condensate drain piping and plumbing drain pipes receiving condensate from the air conditioning 

system shall be insulated with 3/4 inch thick flexible cellular insulation. 

G. Aboveground outdoor pipe insulation for chilled water, reheat water or domestic hot water 

shall be finished with mastic and reinforcing fabric as recommended by the insulation 

manufacturer, covered with aluminum jacket, 0.106-inch thick and banded with stainless steel 

bands. 

2.4 OTHER MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRING INSULATION 

A. Pipe hangers and supports for insulated pipes that contact the pipe surface directly shall be 

insulated with same insulation system as the pipe insulation. 

B. Strainers that are connected to insulated pipes. Insulate strainers with 1-1/2-inch thick cellular 

glass insulation. Finish insulation with ASJ vapor barrier. 

C. Expansion tank that are connected to insulated piping. Insulate tank with 1-1/2-inch thick 

cellular glass insulation. Finish insulation with ASJ vapor barrier. Provide removable panels 

to allow disassembly of strainer (e.g. covers for basket strainers) for routine maintenance 

without damaging the insulation and vapor barrier. 

D. Air separator tanks that are connected to insulated pipes. Insulate separator with 1-1/2-inch 

thick cellular glass insulation. Finish insulation with ASJ vapor barrier. 

E. Flow devices installed in insulated pipes. Insulate with same insulation system as adjacent 

pipe insulation. Provide removable insulation covers for test connections (e.g. connections to 

install portable flow meter) of the same material as the pipe insulation. 

F. Parts of air handling equipment that are not factory insulated such as mixing boxes, return air 

plenums, etc. Insulate with same duct insulation system as connecting ductwork. 

G. Equipment, pipes and related appurtenances that are indicated or specified to be insulated but 

were not factory insulated such as duct mounted reheat coils. 

H. Insulate all chilled water and reheat water pumps with 2-inch thick cellular glass insulation, 

formed into a removable boxed enclosure around the pump with screwed or bolted seams for 

removal and re-installation of the insulation. No cutting of the insulation or covering shall be 

required for removal and re-installation of the cover for inspection and maintenance. Provide 

water resistant, vapor barrier covering. Pump nameplate shall be visible and uncovered. 



HVAC INSULATION


3.1 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES AND CONFLICT IN WORK 

A. Contractor shall examine all drawings of proposed work and coordinate his work with other 

trades. Work conflicts shall be brought to attention of State and work rearranged or modified 

in accordance with his decision. 

B. If changes in indicated locations or arrangements of work are required, they shall be made by 

Contractor without additional charge to the State provided that these changes were ordered 

before work is installed and no extra material or labor are required. 

C. Should Contractor determine that extra material and labor will be required to accommodate 

any rearrangement, he shall first submit detailed estimate of cost for required changes and 

proceed with work only upon written authority of the Contracting Officer. 


A. Equipment shall be installed as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations and instructions. 

B. All necessary supports shall be provided for equipment, appurtenances and duct as required. 

This work shall include any additional steel purlins, brackets, seismic restraints or supports. 

3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND FABRICATION 

A. Ductwork, plenums, casings and accessories insulation: 

1. Provide rigid type duct insulation on mechanical room walls and where indicated; 

provide blanket type insulation in all other locations. Provide field-applied insulation to 

exterior of supply ducts, return ducts, outside air intake ducts, duct plenums, and casings 

of HVAC units. Ensure full range of motion of equipment actuators. Modify insulation 

to avoid obstruction with valve handles, damper handles and other such items. Install 

insulation with jackets drawn tight and cement down on longitudinal and end laps. Do 

not use scrap pieces where a full length section will fit. 

2. Rigid Insulation: Secure rigid insulation by impaling over pins or anchors located not 

more than 3 inches from joint edges of boards, spaced not more than 12 inches on center 

and secure with washers and clips. Spot weld anchor pins or attach with a waterproof 

adhesive especially designed for use on metal surfaces. Apply insulation with joints 

tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors. 

Each pin or anchor shall be capable of supporting a 20 pound load. Cut off protruding 

ends of pins, after clips are sealed with coating compound for inside work or 

manufacturer's recommended weatherproof coating for outside work, and reinforced with 

open weave glass membrane. 

3. Flexible Blanket Insulation: Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Secure 

insulation to ductwork with adhesive in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers. Staple laps 

of jacket with outward clinching staples on 4 inch centers. Provide pins, washers and 

clips at 18 inches on center and not more than 4 inches from duct edge for duct surfaces 

greater than 24 inches across except for top surfaces of horizontal ducts. For vertical 

ducts with surfaces less than 24 inches across, provide pins no more than 4 inches from 

duct edge at 18 inches on center. Carry insulation over standing seams and trapeze-type 

hangers. Install speed washers with pins and pin trimmed to washer. Sagging of flexible 

duct insulation shall not be permitted. Cut off protruding ends of pins after securing and 

sealing clips with coating compound for inside work. In cold air ducts, vapor seal joints 

and staple as specified. 



HVAC INSULATION

B. Pipe Insulation: Pipe Insulation (Except Cellular and Calcium Silicate Insulation): Place 

sections of insulation around pipe and joints tightly butted into place. Draw jacket tight and 

smooth. Secure jacket with fire resistant adhesive, factory-applied self-sealing lap, or 

stainless steel outward clinching staples spaced not over 4 inches on center and 1/2 inch 

minimum from edge of lap. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, not less than 3 

inches wide, of material identical to jacket material. Overlap longitudinal laps of jacket 

material not less than 1 1/2 inches. Adhesive used to secure butt strip shall be same as that 

used to secure jacket laps. Apply staples to both edges of butt strips. 

1. Vapor Barrier Jacket: When a vapor barrier jacket is required, as indicated in Table 1, on 

ends of sections of insulation that butt against flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and joints, 

provide a vapor barrier coating or manufacturer's weatherproof coating for outside 

service unless pipe is supplied with factory-applied self-seal lap. Apply vapor barrier 

coating at longitudinal and circumferential laps. Patch damaged jacket material by 

wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and cementing, stapling, and coating 

as specified for butt strips. Extend patch not less than 1 1/2 inches past the break in both 

directions. At penetrations by pressure gages and thermometers, fill voids with vapor 

barrier coating for outside service. Seal with a brush coat of the same coating. 

2. Roof: Where pipe penetrates, insulate piping to a point flush with top of flashing and 

seal with vapor barrier coating. Butt top of flashing and interior insulation tightly to 

exterior insulation. Extend exterior metal jacket 2 inches to fold down beyond end of 

insulation. Seal flashing and counterflashing underneath with vapor barrier coating. 

C. Flexible Cellular Insulation: Bond cuts, butt joints, ends, and longitudinal joints with 

adhesive. Miter 90-degree turns and elbows, tees, and valve insulation. Where pipes 

penetrate fire walls, provide mineral-fiber insulation inserts and sheet-metal sleeves. Insulate 

flanges, unions, valves, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

Apply two coats of finish as recommended by insulation manufacturers to flexible unicellular 

insulation in outside locations. Do not use vinyl lacquer finish or equivalent. Use metal 

jackets on cellular insulation located outside. 

3.4 PAINTING AND IDENTIFYING OF PIPING 

A. General: The following items furnished under this section are to be painted and identified 

under Section 099000 PAINTING. Do not paint over name plates or other identifying labels. 

1. Exposed pipe insulation. 

2. Exposed duct insulation. 

3. Exposed equipment insulation that is unfinished 


A. Pipes, equipment and ducts shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all 

foreign matter prior to field insulation. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, 

dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Pipe hangers and supports that were temporarily loosened 

to allow installation of the insulation, shall be repositioned and adjusted to carry the load 

without crushing the insulation. 




HVAC INSULATION

SECTION 230923 - DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of a new or addition 

to an existing direct digital control (DDC) system for the control of the heating, ventilating 

and air conditioning (HVAC) systems. The DDC system is a multi-loop, stand-alone and 

distributed digital control system as manufactured by a companies specializing in HVAC 

controls. The DDC system provides all hardware and software to control of all HVAC 

control functions including input, logic, processing and output functions. Input functions 

include analog and digital (binary, on/off, open/close) control signals to the microprocessor 

based digital controllers. 

B. Output is transmitted via interface ports to allow connection to other controllers, terminals, a 

portable computer or a central site computer. The interface equipment will not provide day to 

day control of the HVAC system but will allow the operator to enable and disable equipment, 

changed setpoints, change operating schedules, receive trends and alarms and allows loading 

and downloading of control programs. The system can communicate with graphic operator 

work station located in the building (direct connection to a communication LAN) or at a 

remote site (connected to the digital controller through a LAN, web connection or modems 

and a telephone line). 

C. Related Sections 

1. Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for general mechanical 

requirements. 

2. Division 26 ELECTRICAL for material and installation requirements for control wiring. 

3. Division 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING for air 

conditioning and ventilation equipment being controlled. 


A. NFPA 70 - \National Electric Code. 

B. ASHRAE 135-Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control 

Networks. 

C. UL 916-UL Standard for Safety; Energy Management Equipment 

D. ANSI C12.10-Standard for Electromechanical Watt-hour Meters. 

E. ANSI C57.13.2-Standard Conformance Test Procedures for Instrument Transformers 

F. SMACNA DCS-Duct Construction Standards 

G. ASME B16.5- Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS ½ Through NPS 24. 

H. ASTM A 126 

I. UL 506-UL Standard for Safety Specialty Transformers. 

J. UL 1449-UL Standard for Safety Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 

K. NFPA 90A 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 230923-1 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL 

SYSTEM FOR HVAC

L. UL 555S-UL Standard for Safety Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems 

M. ANSI B40.1- Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element 


A. BACnet: BACnet is a standard communication protocol under development by the American 

Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). The controller 

manufacturer shall have a company policy to support the implementation of BACnet. 

B. Digital Controller: A control module which is microprocessor based, programmable by the 

user, has integral I/O, and performs stand-alone operations. 

C. Direct Digital Control (DDC): A digital controller as defined in this document. The 

controller directly senses building environment and makes control decisions based on user 

defined, controller resident programs. The controller outputs control signals that directly 

operate valves, dampers, and motor controllers. No conventional control devices, pneumatic 

or electronic, such as receiver-controllers, thermostats, and logic units are present within or 

interface with a direct digital control loop. Actuators are electric or pneumatic, and the 

controller output is converted to the appropriate type of signal. 

D. DDC System: A system made up of one or more digital controllers. Required climate 

control and energy management functions for complete operation of an HVAC system are 

provided by DDC from digital controllers. No conventional control devices (pneumatic or 

electronic) such as receiver-controllers, thermostats, and logic units are used. Digital 

controllers in a system are linked in a communication network composed of one or more 

levels of local area networks (LAN). 

E. Distributed Control: The intent of distributed control is to install the controllers near the 

equipment being controlled, and to distribute the processing to each stand alone DDC panel. 

The control system is built up of stand-alone controllers, utilizing sensor inputs and control 

outputs. 

F. Dynamic Control: A process that optimizes operation of HVAC systems (air handler units, 

converters, chillers, and boilers) by increasing and decreasing setpoints or starting and 

stopping equipment in response to heating and cooling needs of downstream equipment. A 

requirement of dynamic control is knowing the heating/cooling demand status of downstream 

equipment, therefore dynamic control requires controllers connected in a communications 

network. 

G. Firmware: Firmware is software programmed into read only memory (ROM) and erasable 

programmable read only memory (EPROM) chips. Software may not be changed without 

physically altering the chip. 

H. Graphic Sequence of Operation: A drawing or graphic showing all interlocks and control 

loop sequences between the input and output points. Graphic sequence of operation is a 

graphical representation of the sequence of operation. The graphic sequence of operation will 

show all inputs, outputs, and logic blocks. 

I. Hand-Held Terminal: A hand-held terminal is a portable device, control system 

manufacturer-specific, which can be connected directly to a communications port on a digital 

controller and through which the digital controller can be interrogated and, in some cases, 

programmed. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

J. Input/Output (I/O): I/O refers to analog inputs (AI), digital inputs (DI), analog outputs (AO), 

and digital outputs (DO) in a digital controller. Inputs are from analog sensors (temperature, 

pressure, humidity, flow) and digital sensors (motor status, flow switches, switch position, 

and pulse output devices). Outputs operate modulating and on/off control devices. 

K. I/O Unit: An I/O unit provides additional point capacity to a digital controller and 

communicate with the stand-alone digital controller on LAN. An I/O unit is not stand-alone 

because the control program does not reside in the I/O units microprocessor. 

L. Integration: The ability of control system components to have interoperability between 

different manufacturers to connect together and provide coordinated control via real-time data 

exchange and control functions through a common communications data exchange protocol. 

Integration shall extend to the operator’s workstation software, which shall support user 

interaction with all control system components. Methods of integration include industry 

standard protocols such as: BACnet, ARCnet, LonMark/LonTalk, OLE for Process Control 

(OPC) or integrator interfaces between cooperating manufacturer’s systems. 

M. Local Area Network (LAN): 

1. A communications bus that interconnects digital controllers for peer-to-peer 

communications. Different levels of LANs are possible within a single DDC system. In 

this case a digital controller on a higher level LAN acts as a network controller to the 

controllers on the lower level LAN. The network controller, then, has at least two LAN 

communications ports. One port supports peer-to-peer communications with other digital 

controllers on the higher level LAN. The other port supports communications with the 

digital controllers on the lower level LAN. 

2. LANs permit sharing global information, make it possible to apply building wide control 

strategies such as peak demand limiting, permit dynamic control strategies, allow 

coordinated response to alarm conditions, and permit remote monitoring and 

programming of digital controllers. 

3. Facility-wide LAN refers to a commercially available local area network. These LANs 

allow the connection to an existing or new facility-wide LAN. 

N. Microprocessor: A microprocessor refers to the central processing unit (CPU) that contains 

all the registers and logic circuitry that make it possible for digital controllers to do 

computing. 

O. Open Protocol Bus (OPB): A pre-programmed communications integrator that allows 

devices from one manufacturer to communicate and interact with those of another. 

P. Open System Port (OSP): A user programmable communications port that provides the 

ability to develop custom communications processes to integrate other operating systems with 

the DDC System. 

Q. Output Signal Conversion: Output signal conversion refers to the changing of one kind of 

control output into a proportionally related signal appropriate for direct actuation of the 

controlled device. Signals are converted by a transducer which may be external to the digital 

controller originating the output. 

1. Examples in modulating control of pneumatic actuators are conversion of 4-20 ma signals 

into proportional 3-15 psig signals. 

2. An example of output signal conversion in on/off or open/close control is a contact 

closure originating in a digital controller which activates a solenoid air valve which 

passes main air, thereby forcing a damper to open fully. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

R. Optimum Start: Optimum start is a method of starting the HVAC equipment prior to 

occupancy time in order to have the building at setpoint at occupancy. Optimum start shall 

be based on the zone temperatures, zone setpoints, and outdoor temperature. Optimum start 

will bring the zone to setpoint at occupancy time. 

S. Peer-to-Peer: Peer-to-Peer refers to controllers connected on a communications LAN that act 

independently, as equals and communicate with each other to pass information which 

facilitates control. 

T. PID: PID refers to proportional, integral, and derivative control; the three types of action that 

are used in controlling modulating equipment. 

U. Resolution: Refers to the number of possible states an input value or output value can take 

and is a function of the digital controller I/O circuitry; the A/D converter for input and the 

D/A converter for output. Ten bit resolution has 1024 possible states and eight bit resolution 

has 256 possible states. 

V. Stand-Alone Control: Refers to the digital controller being able to perform required climate 

control, and energy management functions without connection to another digital controller or 

central site computer. Digital controller requirements for stand-alone control are a time 

clock, a microprocessor, microchip resident control programs, PID control, a communications 

port for interfacing with and programming the controller, firmware for interrogation and 

programming, and I/O for sensing and effecting control of its control environment. 

W. Terminal Control Unit (TCU): An off-the-shelf, stand-alone digital controller equipped for 

communication on a lower level local area network. TCUs may deviate from stand-alone 

only in receiving energy management and time information from a stand-alone digital 

controller. A TCU is commonly application specific and is used for distributed control of 

specific HVAC subsystems. A TCU communicates with the digital controllers. Typically, a 

TCU communicates on a lower level LAN. Examples where TCUs might be used to control 

of small air handling units (AHUs), variable air volume (VAV) boxes, fan coil units, and heat 

pumps. 

X. Year 2000 Compliant: Means computer controlled facility components that accurately 

process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and 

sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 

1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations. 




B. Manufacturer’s Catalog Data: 

1. DDC hardware 

2. DDC capabilities 

3. Input devices 

4. Output devices 

5. Surge and transient protection 

C. Equipment and software for which specification compliance data shall be submitted include 

but not limited to the following: 

1. DDC Hardware: 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

a. I/O; capable of supporting platinum RTD, precision thermistor, 4-20 ma, 0-10 

VDC 

b. Programs will reside in microprocessor; controllers are stand-alone 

c. Communications ports; all communications ports as specified 

d. Protected memory; minimum hours required by this specification 

e. Operating temperature limits 

2. DDC Capabilities: 

a. Communications; baud rate, communication ports, stand-alone 

b. Trending; capable of trending every point 

c. Alarming; capable of alarm generation as indicated 

d. Messages; as indicated 

e. Self diagnostics; identification of a failed module 

f. PID control; capable of PID control 

3. Workstation Software: N/A 

4. Input Devices: 

a. Transmitters; accuracy, 4-20 ma, 0-10 VDC 

b. Temperature sensors; accuracy, stability, 100 percent factory screening, platinum 

RTD or thermistor 

c. Humidity sensors; type of sensor, accuracy, range, and stability 

d. Pressure sensor; accuracy 

e. Flow or motor proof; type 

f. Sensor wells; type 

5. Output Devices: 

a. Dampers; types 

b. Valves; types 

c. Actuators. 

d. Control Relays 

6. External Surge and Transient Protection: 

a. Power line 

b. Communications links and/or devices (between buildings) 

7. BACnet Protocol Implementation Statement (PICS) for each controller and operator 

interface. 

D. Drawings: Submit the following drawings: 

1. Control system schematic 

2. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. 

3. Floor plans indicating field sensor and controller locations. 

E. Design Data: Submit test data demonstrating the following installed components will meet 

specification requirements. 

1. Temperature sensor accuracy: Submit manufacturer specification of temperature sensor 

accuracy. Literature shall make clear sensor accuracy as specified. 

2. Temperature sensor stability: Provide manufacturer specification of five year stability of 

RTDs and thermistors. Literature shall make clear sensor stability as specified. 

F. Schedules: 

1. List of shop drawings 

2. List of symbols and abbreviations used on shop drawings 

3. List of I/O points: For each input and output physically connected to a digital controller 

provide, on a controller by controller basis, provide the following: 

a. Point description: for example: mixed air temperature, supply fan start/stop, etc. 

b Point type: AO, AI, DO, or DI. 

c. Point range: 4-20 ma, 3-15 psi, platinum RTD resistance ohm, thermistor. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

d. Sensor range associated with point range: for example 0-100 degrees F, 0-2 inches 

of water. 

e. Software name(s) associated with point, if any. 

f. Terminal number to which point is connected. 

4. Equipment components list: Submit a listing of controllers and connected devices shown 

on control system schematic. List the following: 

a. Control system schematic component name 

b. Description 

c. Manufacturer of controller 

d. Controller’s name 

e. Equipment part numbers 

f. Cv for valves 

g. For actuators: 

(1) Motive force (such as pneumatic, or electric) 

(2) Normal position 

(3) Nominal operating range (such as 3-7 psi, 4-8 ma) 

5. AC power table: Submit a table listing each controller and the circuit breaker number, 

panel box number, and physical location of each controller’s source of AC power. 

G. Statements: 

1. Contractors’ qualifications: Submit statements required in Part 1, Quality Assurance, 

Qualifications. 

2. Training: Submit schedule, syllabus, and training materials in accordance with Part 3, 

EXECUTION. 

H. Records: Provide administrative and closeout submittals: 

1. Training course documentation: Training course documentation shall include a manual 

for each trainee plus two additional copies and two copies of audiovisual training aids, if 

used. Documentation shall include an agenda, defined objectives for each lesson and 

detailed description of the subject matter of each lesson. 

2. Service organization: Qualified service organization list that shall include the names and 

telephone numbers of organizations qualified to service the HVAC control systems 

3. Contractor certification: Provide certification that the installation of the control system is 

complete and the technical requirements of this section have been met. 

I. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 

1. Controls and HVAC System Operators Manual: Construct and provide a Control and 

HVAC Systems Operators Manual. This manual is designed to document the HVAC and 

control system. Construct this manual using a 3 ring binder with a minimum of the 

following 7 sections. Use tabs to divide each section. 

a. Section 1. Description of HVAC Systems: Provide a description of the HVAC 

system components and control system. Include sequences of operation and a 

complete points list. 

b. Section 2. Controls Drawings: Provide drawings as specified. 

c. Section 3. Control Program Listings: Provide listing of all control programs, 

including terminal equipment controller setup pages. 

d. Section 4. Current Operating Parameters: Provide printouts of input and output 

setup information, database setups. This section is intended to provide information 

such as point addresses, slopes and offsets for all points, database of points, etc. 

e. Section 5. Design Information: Provide tab, but leave this section blank. 

f. Section 6. Control Equipment Cut Sheets: Provide cut sheets of all controller 

hardware and accessories. Include temperature versus resistance charts for 

temperature sensors, and calibration charts for pressure transducers. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

g. Section 7. Control Program: Provide a fully operational control system disk (CD 

disk format preferred) identical to the original control program as installed. In 

addition, provide a restore - backup disk of the control program and backup copy of 

ACAD controls drawings on a 3.5 inch disk. It is understood that the software will 

be available to the base and used only for the buildings in this contract. 

2. DDC Manufacturer’s Hardware and Software Manuals 

3. Controls and HVAC System Operators Manual: 

a. Section 1. Installation and Technical Manuals for all digital controller hardware. 

b. Section 2. Installation and Technical Manuals for workstations. 

c. Section 3. Operators Manuals for all digital controllers. 

d. Section 4. Operators Manuals for workstations software. 

e. Section 5. Programming Manuals for all digital controllers. 

f. Section 6. Programming Manuals for workstation software. 

J. Guarantee and Certificate: Submit one year guarantee and certificate in accordance with 



A. General: 

1. The Direct Digital Control (DDC) System herein specified shall be fully integrated and 

installed as a complete package by the Direct Digital Control System Contractor. The 

System shall include all wiring, piping, installation supervision, calibration, adjustments, 

and checkout necessary for a complete and fully operational system. 

2. The Direct Digital Control System Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the 

engineering, programming, installation and service of Direct Digital Control systems of 

similar size and complexity. 

3. The DDC Contractor shall have a local facility Oahu. Emergency service shall be 

available on a 24-hour, 7-day-a-week basis. 

4. The DDC Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory 

and neat workmanlike manner acceptable to the State. 

B. Experience Record: 

1. The DDC Contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience with the complete 

installation of Direct Digital Control systems of similar size and technical complexity. 

The DDC Contractor shall provide a list of three comparable projects that have Direct 

Digital Control Systems with the features as specified for this project. These projects 

must be on-line and functional. 

2. The DDC Contractor shall employ specialists in the field of Direct Digital Control 

Systems including: Programming, Engineering, Field Supervision, and Installation. 

Specialists shall present factory training certification of the submitted equipment upon 

request. 

C. Governing Code Compliance: The DDC Contractor shall comply with all current governing 

codes, ordinances and regulations, including UL, NFPA, the local Building Code, NEC, and 

so forth. 

D. FCC Regulation: All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC 

Regulation, Part 15, Section 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference, 

and be so labeled. 

E. Standard Products: 

1. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in 

the manufacturing of such products, using similar materials, design and workmanship. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

The standard products shall have been in commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to 

bid opening. The 2 year use shall include applications of similarly sized equipment and 

materials used under similar circumstances. The 2 year experience must be satisfactorily 

completed by a product which has been sold on the commercial market through 

advertisements, manufacturer’s catalogs, or brochures. 

2. The equipment items shall be supported by a service organization. 

F. Nameplate and Tags: 

1. Nameplates bearing legends as shown and tags bearing device unique identifiers as 

shown shall be engraved or stamped. Nameplates shall be permanently attached to 

HVAC control panel doors. 

2. For each field mounted piece of equipment, not in a finished area, a plastic or metal tag 

with equipment name and point identifier shall be attached. 

G. Verification of Dimensions: The contractor shall become familiar with all details of the 

work, shall verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Contracting Officer of any 

discrepancy before performing the work. 

H. Drawings: Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, 

fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the 

mechanical, electrical, and finish conditions that could affect the work to be performed, and 

shall finish all work necessary to meet such conditions. 

I. Modification of References: The advisory provision in ASME B31.1 and NFPA 70 shall be 

considered mandatory. Substitute the work “shall” for “should” wherever it appears and 

interpret all references to the “authority having jurisdiction” and “owner” to mean the 

Contracting Officer. 

J. Storage: Stored products shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature 

variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants, within the storage condition limits published 

by the equipment manufacturer. 

1.6 WORK INCLUDED 

A. Installation of Direct Digital Control (DDC) System: 

1. The DDC Contractor shall furnish and install a complete Direct Digital Control (DDC) 

System for all mechanical systems and other facility systems as included in the project 

documents. The DDC system will provide the functional features as defined in Part 1 - 

General Requirements, Part 2 - Products, and Part 3 - Execution of these Specifications. 

The DDC Contractor shall provide a complete and operational system to perform all 

sequences of operations stated within Part 3 or shown on the control drawings. 

2. The work under this Section shall include all materials and labor to perform all work 

required for the installation of the DDC as specified. 

3. The drawings and specifications are complementary to one another - meaning that what is 

called for on one is to be considered called for in both. Where conflicts exists between 

the specifications and/or drawings, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 

4. The DDC Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of site conditions and for 

gathering all necessary field data for all items to be provided under this contract prior to 

submitting his or her bid. 

5. Where work specified under other Sections of this Specification connects to equipment or 

systems that are listed and described in this Section, the DDC Contractor shall provide 

proper connection(s) to such equipment including trade coordination. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC


A. Divisions: 

1. The DDC Contractor shall cooperate with other divisions performing work on this project 

as necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. The Contractor shall also 

consult the drawings and specifications of all trades to determine the nature and extent of 

others’ work. 

2. Contractors, Sub-contractors, Employees: It will be the duty of this Contractor to work in 

cooperation with other contractors, and with other sub-contractors and employees, 

rendering assistance and arranging his or her work so that the entire project. 

1.8 MANUALS 

A. All manuals shall be provided in hard copy format or on a single Compact Disk (CD) as part 

of an on-line documentation system through the operator workstation. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall 

comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall 

conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet. 

B. Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable 

control network. 

C. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop 

computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other 

commissioning and troubleshooting operations. 

D. Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork 

architecture. 

1. An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with 

each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data, 

status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable from each internetwork 

controller. 

2. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple 

controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test all 

cross-controller links required to execute control strategies indicated. An authorized 

operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address or 

by using a point-and-click interface. 

E. Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service. System 

shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated controller 

via the internetwork. 

F. System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with 

additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring. 

2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE 

A. Web Based System: DDC system shall be web-based and include a web server, workstation 

and controllers which communicate using the BACnet protocol. The web server or 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

workstation and control network backbone shall communicate using BACnet /IP addressing 

as specified in ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex J. 

B. First Tier Network: 

1. The first tier network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet TCP/IP, or 

ARCnet. PC Workstation LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” 

products available through normal PC vendor channels. 

2. The DDC system shall network multiple operator workstations, network controllers, 

system controllers, and application-specific controllers. The first tier network shall 

provide communications between operator workstations and first tier DDC (Direct 

Digital Control) controllers. 

3. The first tier network shall operate at a minimum communication speed of 2.5 M baud, 

with full peer-to-peer network communication. 

4. Network Controllers shall reside on the first tier. 

C. First Tier Network Protocol Integration: A complete Protocol Implementation Conformance 

Statement (PICS) shall be provided for all BACnet system devices. 

D. Second Tier Network: 

1. The second tier network is used to communicate between the first tier DDC controllers 

and field controllers. 

2. Second tier networks shall utilize either “Peer-to-Peer,” Master-Slave, or Supervised 

Token Passing communications. 

E. Second Tier Controller Protocol Integration: 

1. Hardwired: 

a. Analog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to another via 

hardwired connections. 

b. There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point to be 

integrated between the systems. 

c. Analog points will be 4-20 mA signals originating at the “from system” and being 

received by the “to system”. 

d. Digital points will be “dry contact” signals originating at the “from system” and 

being received by the “to system.” 

2. Direct Protocol: 

a. The DDC system shall include appropriate hardware equipment and software to 

allow data communications between the DDC system and 3rd party manufacturers 

control panels. The DDC shall receive, react to, and return information from 

multiple building systems, variable frequency drives, power monitoring systems, 

etc. 

b. All data required by the application shall be mapped into the First Tier Network 

DDC Controller’s database, and shall be transparent to the operator. 

c. Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-time 

interoperability with DDC software features such as: Control Software, Energy 

Management, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data 

and Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Dial-Up and Local Area Network 

Communications. 

d. Integration shall be via RS-232 or RS-485 technologies. 

e. The system operator shall have the ability to verify, and diagnose communication 

messages and point information between third-party controllers and the DDC 

system. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

2.3 DDC SYSTEM 

A. Provide a DDC system as a distributed control system. The system shall have stand- alone 

digital controllers, a communications network. 

B. Provide an operator programmable system, based on the user applications, to perform closedloop, 

modulating and/or on-off control of building equipment. Connect all digital controllers 

through the communication network to share common data and report to workstation 

computers. The workstation computers will be capable of being programmed to supervise the 

digital controllers. The control system shall be capable of down-loading and up-loading of 

programs between the workstation and the digital controllers. 

C. Provide the quantity of digital controllers indicated on the drawings that will perform 

required climate control, energy management, and alarm functions. The quantity of 

controllers shall be no less than the number shown on drawings. All material used shall be 

currently in production. 

1. Direct Digital Controllers: DDC hardware shall be UL 916 rated. 

a. Distributed Control: Apply digital controllers in a distributed control manner. 

b. Environmental Operating Limits: Provide digital controllers that operate in 

environmental conditions between 32 and 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 

c. Memory: 

(1) Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support required control and 

communication functions. 

(2) Memory Protection: Programs residing in memory shall be protected either 

by using EEPROM or by an uninterruptible power source (battery or 

uninterruptible power supply (UPS)). The backup power source shall have 

sufficient capacity to maintain volatile memory in event of an AC power 

failure. Where the uninterruptible power source is rechargeable (a 

rechargeable battery), provide sufficient capacity for a minimum of seventytwo 

hours back-up. The rechargeable power source shall be constantly 

charged by charging circuitry while the controller is operating under normal 

line power. Where a nonrechargeable power source is used, provide 

sufficient capacity for a minimum of two years accumulated power failure. 

Batteries shall be designed to allow replacement without soldering. 

d. Inputs: Provide input function integral to the direct digital controller. Provide 

input type as required by the DDC design. 

(1) Analog Inputs: Allowable input types are three wire 100 ohm or higher 

platinum RTD’s, stable 10,000 ohm thermistors, 0-10 VDC and 4 to 20 ma. 

Thermistor and direct RTD inputs must have appropriate conversion curves 

stored in controller software or firmware. Analog to digital (A/D) 

conversion shall be a minimum of 10 bit resolution. 

(2) Digital Inputs: Digital inputs shall sense open/close, on/off, or other two 

state indications. 

e. Outputs: Provide output function integral to the direct digital controller. Provide 

output type as required by the DDC design. Insure that the output of controllers are 

compatible with controlled devices. 

(1) Analog Outputs: Provide controllers with a minimum output resolution of 8 

bits. Output shall be 4 to 20 ma or 3 to 15 psi or 0-10 VDC. Each pneumatic 

output shall have feedback for monitoring of the actual pneumatic signal. 

Feedback shall be integral to the output function. 

(2) Digital Outputs: Provide contact closure with contacts rated at a minimum of 

1 ampere at 24 volts. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

f. PID Control: Provide controllers with proportional, proportional plus integral, and 

proportional plus integral plus derivative control capability. Terminal controllers 

are not required to have the derivative component. 

g. Communications Ports: 

(1) Controller-to-Controller LAN Communications Ports: Controllers in the 

building DDC system shall be connected in a communications network. 

Controllers shall have controller to controller communication ports to both 

peer controller (lower level controller). Network may consist of more than 

one level of local area network and one level may have multiple drops. 

Communications network shall permit sharing between controllers of sensor 

and control information, thereby allowing execution of dynamic control 

strategies and coordinated response to alarm conditions. 

(2) On-Site Interface Ports: Provide a RS-232, RS-485, or RJ-11, or RJ-45 

communications port for each digital controller that allows direct connection 

of a computer or hand held terminal and through which the controller may be 

fully interrogated. Controller access shall not be limited to access through 

another controller. On-site interface communication ports shall be in 

addition to the communications port(s) supporting controller to controller 

communications. Communication rate shall be 56K Baud minimum. Every 

controller on the highest level LAN shall have a communications port 

supporting direct connection of a computer; a hand held terminal port is not 

sufficient. By connecting a computer to this port, every controller in the 

direct digital control system shall be able to be fully interrogated and 

programmed. The following operations shall be available: downloading 

and uploading control programs, modifying programs and program data base, 

and retrieving or accepting trend reports, status reports, messages, and 

alarms. 

(3) Remote Work Station Interface Port: Provide one additional direct connect 

computer port in each DDC system for permanent connection of a remote 

operator’s workstation, unless the workstation is a node on the LAN. All 

operations possible by directly connecting a computer to a controller at the 

highest level LAN shall be available through this port. 

(4) Telecommunications Interface Port: Provide one additional 

telecommunications port in each DDC system permitting remote 

communications via telephone. All operations possible by directly 

connecting a computer to a controller at the highest level LAN shall be 

available through the telecommunications port. A telecommunications port 

provided on a digital controller shall be in addition to the port required for 

directly connecting a computer to the controller. Telecommunication baud 

rate shall be 96K minimum. 

h. Modem: Provide one modem per DDC system to communicate between the digital 

control system and the workstation. 

i. Digital Controller Cabinet: Each digital controller cabinet shall protect the 

controller from dust and be rated NEMA 1, unless specified otherwise. 

(1) Controller cabinets, or enclosures the controller’s is mounted in shall be 

provided with a lock. 

j. Main Power Switch: Each controller on the highest level LAN shall have a main 

power switch for isolation of the controller from AC power. The switch shall be 

protected from tampering within the DDC cabinet. 

k. DDC system shall be web-based and include controllers which communicate using 

the BACnet protocol. The control network backbone shall communicate using 

BACnet /IP addressing as specified in ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex J. 

l. Building Controllers: 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

(1) Building controllers shall conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) 

device profile as specified in ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and 

shall be listed as a certified B-BC in the BACnet Testing laboratories (BTL) 

Product Listing. 

(2) Digital Controller Networking Capabilities: The upper level digital 

controllers shall be capable of being networked with other similar upper level 

controllers. Upper level controllers shall also be capable of communicating 

over a network between buildings. 

(3) Internal Clock: Provide clock with each controller on the first tier local area 

network (LAN) and shall have its clock backed up by a battery or capacitor 

with sufficient capacity to maintain clock operation for a minimum of 72 

hours during a line power outage. 

m. Terminal Control Unit Controllers: 

(1) Advanced Application controllers shall conform to BACnet Building 

Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ASHRAE 135-2004, 

BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet 

Testing laboratories (BTL) Product Listing. 

(2) Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to 

BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile as specified 

in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a 

certified B-ASC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing. 

(3) TCU controllers shall be manufactured by the same company as the digital 

controllers. 

(4) TCU controllers shall automatically start-up on return of power after a 

failure, and previous operating parameters shall exist or shall be 

automatically downloaded from a digital controller on a higher level LAN. 

(5) TCU controllers do not require an internal clock, if they get time information 

from the digital controller. 

n. BACnet Communication: 

(1) Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO 

8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP 

addressing. 

(2) BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers 

as necessary to connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs. 

(3) Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) 

Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall 

reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data 

Link/Physical layer protocol. 

(4) Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP 

Data Link/Physical layer protocol. 

2. DDC Software: Software resides in the digital controllers and performs control 

sequences. 

a. Sequence of Control: Provide, in the digital controllers, software to execute the 

sequence of control. Provide sequences of control written in both text or graphic 

format. 

b. Database Modification: Provide software to modify the control program database. 

Database modification shall be accomplished through connected computer or hand 

held terminal or through a keypad integral to the controller. Database modification 

shall be accomplished without having to make changes directly in line-by-line 

programming. As a result of this requirement, when the control program is of the 

line-by-line type, database parameters in the following list that take real number 

values shall require assignment of variable names so parameters can be changed 

without modifying the line-by-line programming. Alternatively, block 

programming languages shall provide for modification of these database 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

parameters in fill-in-the-blank screens. The following shall be modifiable in this 

way: 

(1) Setpoints 

(2) Deadband limits and spans 

(3) Reset schedules 

(4) Switchover points 

(5) PID gains and time between control output changes 

(6) Time 

(7) Timed local override time 

(8) Occupancy schedules 

(9) Holidays 

(10) Alarm points, alarm limits, and alarm messages 

(11) Point definition database 

(12) Point enable, disable, and override 

(13) Trend points, trend intervals, trend reports 

(14) Analog input default values 

(15) Passwords 

(16) Communications parameters including network and telephone 

communications setups 

c. Differential: Where equipment is started and stopped or opened and closed in 

response to some analog input such as temperature, pressure, or humidity, include a 

differential for the control loop to prevent short cycling of equipment. 

d. Motor and Flow Status Delay: Provide an adjustable delay between when a motor 

is commanded on or off and when the control program looks to the motor or flow 

status input for confirmation of successful execution of the command. 

e. Runtime Accumulation: Provide resettable run time accumulation for each 

controlled electrical motor. 

f. Timed Local Override: Provide user definable adjustable run time for each push of 

a momentary contact timed local override. Pushes shall be cumulative with each 

push designating the same length of time. Provide a user definable limit on the 

number of contact closures summed, such as 6, before the contact closures are 

ignored. Timed local overrides are to be disabled during occupancy periods. 

g. Time Programs: Provide programs to automatically adjust for leap years, and make 

daylight savings time and standard time adjustments. 

h. Scheduling: 

(1) Each control output point shall be adjustable for selection of operation based 

on time of day, day of week, and day of year. Output points may be 

associated into groups. Each group may be associated with a different 

schedule. Changing the schedule of a group shall change the schedule of 

each point in the group. Points may be added to and deleted from groups. 

Groups may be created and deleted by the operator. 

(2) Provide capability that will allow current schedules to be viewed and 

modified in a seven day week format. When control program does not 

automatically compute holidays, provide capability to allow holiday 

schedules to be entered one full year at a time. 

i. Point Override: I/O and virtual points shall be able to be software overridden in the 

software and commanded to any possible value from the main building digital 

controller. 

j. Alarming: I/O points and virtual points shall be alarmable. Alarms may be 

enabled and disabled for every point. Alarm limits shall be adjustable on analog 

points. Controllers connected to an external communications device such as a 

printer, terminal, or computer, shall download alarm and alarm message when 

alarm occurs. Otherwise alarms will be stored and automatically downloaded when 

a communications link occurs. The following conditions shall generate alarms: 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

(1) Motor is commanded on or off but the motor status input indicates no change 

(2) Room temperature, humidity, or pressure strays outside selectable limits 

(3) An analog input takes a value indicating sensor failure 

(4) A module is “dead” to the LAN 

(5) A power outage occurs 

k. Messages: Messages shall be operator defined and assigned to alarm points. 

Messages shall be displayed when a point goes into alarm. 

l. Trending: DDC system shall have the capability to trend I/O and virtual points. 

Points may by associated into groups. A trend report may be set up for each group. 

The period between logging consecutive trend values shall range from one minute 

to 60 minutes at a minimum. Trend data type shall be selectable as either averages 

over the logging period or instantaneous values at the time of logging. The 

minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 30 per 

variable. When trend memory is full, the most recent data shall overwrite the 

oldest data. Trend data shall be capable of being uploaded to computer. Trend 

data shall be available on a real time basis; trend data shall appear either 

numerically or graphically on a connected computer’s screen as the data being 

processed from the DDC system data environment. Trend reports shall be capable 

of being uploaded to computer disc and archived. 

m. Status Display: Current status of I/O and virtual points shall be displayed on 

command. Points shall be associated into functional groups, such as all the I/O and 

virtual points associated with control of a single air handling unit, and displayed as 

a group, so the status of a single mechanical system can be readily checked. A 

group shall be selectable from a menu of groups having meaningful names; such as 

AHU-4, Second Floor, Chiller System, and other such names. 

n. Diagnostics: Each controller shall perform self-diagnostic routines and provide 

messages to an operator when errors are detected. DDC system shall be capable of 

recognizing a nonresponsive module on a LAN. The remaining, responsive 

modules on a LAN shall not operate in a degraded mode. 

o. Power Loss: In event of a power outage, each controller shall assume a disabled 

status and outputs shall go to an user definable state. Upon restoration of power, 

DDC system shall perform an orderly restart, with sequencing of outputs. 

p. Program Transfer: Provide software for download of control programs and 

database from a computer to controllers and upload of same to computer from 

controllers. Every digital controller in the DDC system shall be capable of being 

downloaded and uploaded to through a single controller on the highest level LAN. 

q. Password Protection: Provide at least three levels of password protection to the 

DDC system permitting different levels of access to the system. 

r. Energy Data Recording: Provide a resettable signal accumulation for each meter at 

the main building digital controller. 

(1) Calculate chilled water thermal energy in BTU/HR using chilled water 

supply temperature and flow and chilled water return temperature signals. 

(2) Record electrical energy in KWH and electrical demand in KW. 

s. Remote Communication: System shall automatically contact operator workstation 

or server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, 

system shall use a modem connection. 

t. Maintenance Management: System shall generate maintenance alarms when 

equipment exceeds adjustable runtime, equipment starts, or performance limits. 

u. Staggered Start: System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power 

outage. Operator shall be able to adjust computer restart order and time delay 

between equipment restarts. 

3. Operator Interface: 

a. Provide software installed to provide an interface for monitoring, troubleshooting, 

and making adjustments to the program or operating parameters of the DDC 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

system from a central location. Operator interface shall be a PC based workstation 

that resides on the high-speed network with the building controllers. Web server or 

workstation and controllers shall communicate using BACnet protocol. Web 

server or workstation and control network backbone shall communicate using ISO 

8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing as 

specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex J. 

b. Software: Workstation software shall be recommended and supported by the DDC 

system manufacturer and configured to operate according to the DDC system 

manufacturer’s specifications. Workstation software shall permit monitoring and 

troubleshooting of the DDC system. Workstation software permits modification of 

the controller database and control programs. Operations shall be menu selected. 

Menu selections shall be made with a mouse. 

(1) Menu System: Menu system shall allow an operator to select a particular 

function or access a particular screen through successive menu penetration. 

(2) Controller Data Base Modification: The workstation software shall be an 

interface for performing capabilities specified in paragraph entitled “DDC 

Software” and available through direct connection of a computer to a digital 

controller. Database modification shall require only that an operator “fill in 

the blank” for that parameter on a screen requesting the information in plain 

language. Database modifications shall be automatically downloaded to the 

appropriate controllers at operator request. 

(3) Program modification: For systems using a line-by-line programming 

language, provide an off-line text editor, similar to BASIC program editor, 

permitting modification of controller resident control programs. For systems 

using block programming languages provide a capability for linking blocks 

together to create new programs or modify existing programs. Program 

modifications shall be automatically downloaded to the appropriate 

controllers at operator request. 

c. Graphic-Based Software: The intent of graphic-based software is to provide an 

ergonomic interface to the DDC system that encourages effective and efficient 

interaction with the system. Graphic-based software shall provide graphical 

representation of the building, the buildings mechanical systems, and the DDC 

system. The current value and point name of every I/O point shall be shown on at 

least one graphic and in its appropriate physical location relative to building and 

mechanical systems. 

(1) Graphics shall closely follow the style of the control drawings in representing 

mechanical systems, sensors, controlled devices, and point names. 

(2) Graphic Title: Graphics shall have an identifying title visible when the 

graphic is being viewed. 

(3) Dynamic Update: When the workstation is on-line with the control system, 

point data shall update dynamically on the graphic images. 

(4) Graphic Penetration: Provide graphic penetration when the capability exists. 

For systems without graphic penetration, provide menu penetration for 

selection of individual graphics to give the same hierarchical affect provided 

by graphic penetration. 

(5) Graphic Types: Graphic-based software shall have graphics of the building 

exterior, building section, floor plans, and mechanical systems. Provide the 

following graphics: 

(a) Building Exterior Graphic: Show exterior architecture, major 

landmarks, and building number. 

(b) Building Section Graphic: Show stacked floors in section graphic with 

appropriate floor name on each floor. 

(c) Floor Plan Graphics: Provide a single graphic for each floor, unless 

the graphic will contain more information that can reasonably be 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

(d) 

shown on a single graphic. Each heating or cooling zone within a floor 

plan shall have a zone name and its -current temperature displayed 

within the zone outline. Show each controlled variable in the zone. 

Provide visual indication for each point that is in alarm. 

Mechanical System Graphics: Provide two-dimensional drawings to 

symbolize mechanical equipment; do not use line drawings. Show 

controlled or sensed mechanical equipment. Each graphic shall consist 

of a single mechanical system; examples are a graphic for an air 

handling unit, a graphic for a VAV box, a graphic for a heating water 

system, and a graphic for a chiller system. Place sensors and 

controlled devices associated with mechanical equipment in their 

appropriate locations. Place point name and point value adjacent to 

sensor or controlled device. Provide visual indication of each point in 

alarm. Condition, such as zone temperature, associated with the 

mechanical system shall be shown on the graphic. Point values shall 

update dynamically on the graphic. 

(i) Graphic Editing: Full capacity as afforded by a draw software 

package shall be included for operator editing of graphics. 

Graphics may be created, deleted, and modified, and text added. 

Provide capability to store graphic symbols in a symbol directory 

and incorporate these symbols into graphics. A minimum of 

sixteen colors shall be available. 

(ii) 

Dynamic Point Editing: Provide full editing capability for 

deleting, adding, and modifying dynamic points on graphics. 

(iii) Trending: Trend data shall be displayed graphically, with 

control variable and process variable plotted as functions of time 

one the same chart. Graphic display of trend data shall be a 

capability internal to the workstation software and not a 

capability resulting from download of trend data into a thirdparty 

spreadsheet program such as Lotus, unless such transfer is 

automatic and transparent to the operator, and the third-party 

software is included with the workstation software package. At 

the operator’s discretion trend data shall be plotted real time. 

4. Maintenance Personnel Interface Tools: Provide a notebook computer for field 

communication with the digital controllers. In addition to changing setpoints, and 

making operational changes, field personnel shall be able to upload and download 

programs with the notebook computer. Provide graphic software as indicated for 

Operator Interface. 

a. Provide laptop computer, necessary software, and direct connection cable to 

communicate with the digital controllers when directly connected. 

(1) Provide laptop computer with the following features as a minimum: 

1.6 GHZ Mobile Pentium 4-M processor or higher 

256 MB DDR SDRAM, 266 MHZ 

512 KB cache, 8 KB internal cache 

15" UXGA color display 

30 GB ATA minimum 

PnP, Y2K compliant, flash BIOS 

Windows XP Professional, 2000 Professional or higher 

3.5", 1.44 MB Floppy Drive 

2 PCMCIA slots (1 type I or 1 type II) 

24X CD-RW/DVD 

Integrated, v.92, 56K cable modem 

10/100B T Network Interface Card 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

Graphics accelerator with 32MB of Video Memory 

9-pin serial connector, 25-pin parallel connector 

2 Universal Serial Bus, 2.0 compliant 4-pin connectors 

9-cell "Smart" Lithium Ion battery, 72Whr minimum 

Battery charger and AC adapter 

Three Year Warranty 

b. Recommended by the digital controller manufacturer with a direct connection cable 

to communicate with the digital controller. 

2.4 SENSORS AND INPUT HARDWARE 

A. Field Installed Temperature Sensors: 

1. Thermistors: Precision thermistors may be used in temperature sensing applications 

below 200 degrees F. Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0.36 degree F 

or less between the range of 32 to 150 degrees F. Sensor manufacturer shall utilize 100 

percent screening to verify accuracy. Thermistors shall be pre-aged, and inherently 

stable. Stability error of the thermistor over five years shall not exceed 0.25 degree F 

cumulative. Sensor element and leads shall be encapsulated. Bead thermistors are not 

allowed. A/D conversion resolution error shall be kept to 0.1 degree F. Total error for a 

thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degree F, which includes sensor error and digital 

controller A/D conversion resolution error. Provide thermistor and digital controller 

manufacturer documentation and the Contractor’s engineering calculations which support 

the proposed thermistor input circuit will have a total error of 0.5 degree F or less. 

Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded cable for thermistors. 

2. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs): Provide RTD sensors with 1000 ohm, or 

higher, platinum element that are compatible with digital controllers. Sensors shall be 

encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or copper. 

Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0.1 percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) 

at 32 degrees F. Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0.25 

degree F cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers, without 

transmitters, is preferred provided controller supports direct connection of RTDs. When 

RTDs are connected directly to the controller, keep lead resistance error to 0.25 degree F 

or less. Provide 3 wire sensing circuits to not exceed the 0.25 degree F lead resistance 

error. Total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degree F, which includes sensor 

error, lead resistance error or 4 to 20 milliampere transmitter error, and A/D conversion 

resolution error. Provide manufacturer documentation and the Contractor’s engineering 

calculations which support the proposed RTD circuit will have a total error of 0.5 degree 

F or less for the specified application. 

a. Wiring: Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded pair cable for direct connected 

RTDs. Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded pair cable for RTDs using 4 to 20 

milliampere transmitters. 

b. Transmitters: Provide 4 to 20 milliampere transmitters for RTDs where Digital 

controllers do not support direct connection of RTDs to controllers; Digital 

controllers do not meet temperature resolution requirement of 0.5 degree F. 

3. Temperature Sensor Details: 

a. Room: Conceal element behind protective cover matched to the room interior. 

Room temperature sensor shall have integral pushbutton, digital input to the 

controller for system override, and a setpoint adjustment, analog input to the 

controller. Digital sensors that communicate directly with the terminal control unit 

are acceptable. Provide a connection to allow interrogation of the digital controller. 

b. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging RTDs for ductwork applications 

shall be 1 foot in length for each 4 square feet of ductwork cross-sectional area 

with a minimum length of 6 feet. Probe type duct sensors of one foot length 

minimum are acceptable in ducts 12 feet square and less. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

c. Immersion Type: 3 inches and 6 inches where needed total immersion for use with 

sensor wells, unless otherwise indicated. 

d. Sensor Wells: Brass materials; provide thermal transmission material compatible 

with the immersion sensor. Provide heat-sensitive transfer agent between exterior 

sensor surface and interior well surface. 

e. Outside Air Type: Provide element on the buildings north side with sunshade to 

minimize solar effects. Mount element at least 3 inches from building outside wall. 

Sunshade shall not inhibit the flow of ambient air across the sensing element. 

Shade shall protect sensing element from rain. 

B. Transmitters: Transmitters shall have 4 to 20 ma, or 0-10 VDC output linearly scaled to the 

temperature, pressure, humidity, or flow range being sensed. Transmitter shall be matched to 

the sensor, factory calibrated, and sealed. Total error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of 20 

milliampere (0.02 milliampere) at any point across the 4 to 20 ma span. Supply voltage shall 

be 24 volts ac or dc. Transmitters shall have non-interactive offset and span adjustments. 

For temperature sensing, transmitter stability shall not exceed 0.05 degree F a year. 

1. Spans and Ranges: Transmitter spans or ranges shall be the following and shall be 

suitable for the application: 

a. Temperature: 

(1) 50 degree F span: Room, chilled water, cooling coil, discharge air, return air 

sensors. 

(2) 100 degree F span: Outside air, hot water, heating coil discharge air, mixed 

air sensors. 

(3) 200 degree F span: High temperature hot water, heating hot water, 

chilled/hot water system sensors. 

b. Pressure: 

(1) 0 to 100 psi differential: Water differential range 

(2) 0 to 5 inches water range: Duct static pressure 

C. Relative Humidity Transmitters: Provide integral humidity transducer and transmitter. 

Output of relative humidity instrument shall be a 4 to 20 milliampere or 0 to 10 VDC signal 

proportional to 0 to 100 percent relative humidity input. Accuracy shall be 2 percent of full 

scale within the range 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. Sensing element shall be chilled 

mirror type, polymer, or thin film polymer type. Supply voltage shall be 24 VDC. 

Transmitter shall meet specified requirements. 

D. Pressure Transmitters: Provide integral pressure transducer and transmitter. Output of 

pressure instrument shall be a 4 to 20 milliampere or 0 to 10 VDC signal proportional to the 

pressure span. Span shall be as specified. Accuracy shall be 1.0 percent. Linearity shall be 

0.1 percent. Supply voltage shall be 24 VDC. Transmitter shall meet specified requirements. 

E. Current Transducers: Provide current transducers to monitor amperage of motors. Select 

current transducer range for normal amperage to be above 50 percent of the range. Current 

transducers shall have an accuracy of 1 percent and a 4 to 20 milliampere output signal. 

F. Input Switches: 

1. Differential Static Pressure Switch: Provide diaphragm type differential static pressure 

switches for binary (two position) operation as specified in sequence of operation. 

Devices shall withstand pressure surges up to 150 percent of rated pressure. Contacts 

shall be single pole double throw and switch may be wired for normally open or normally 

closed operation. Trip set point shall be adjustable. Pressure switch shall be sized so that 

operating pressure trip point is approximately midpoint of pressure switch adjustable 

range. Repetitive accuracy shall be 2 percent. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

2. Induced Current Operated Solid State Switches: Provide adjustable ranging to monitor 

continuous loads up to 200 amperes. Switch shall indicate whether it is normally open or 

normally closed. Limit off-state leakage to 2 milliampere or less. 

3. Timed Local Override: Provide momentary contact push button override with override 

time set in controller software. Provide to override DDC time of day program and 

activate occupancy program for assigned units. Upon expiration of override time, the 

control system shall return to time-of-day program. Time interval for the length of 

operation shall be software adjustable and shall expire unless reset. 

2.5 OUTPUT HARDWARE 

A. Damper: Damper shall conform to SMACNA DCS. 

1. A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and shall be no higher 

than 72 inches. Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inches. Larger sized damper 

shall be made from a combination of sections. 

2. Dampers shall be steel, or other materials where shown. Flat blades shall be made rigid 

by folding the edges. Blades shall be provided with compressible seals at points of 

contact. The channel frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to 

minimize air leakage. Dampers shall not leak in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 

inches water gage static pressure when closed. Seals shall be suitable for an operating 

temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Dampers shall be rated at not 

less than 2000 fpm air velocity. All blade-connecting devices within the same damper 

section will not be located directly in the air stream. Damper axles shall be 0.5 inch 

(minimum) plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze 

bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings. Pressure drop 

through dampers shall not exceed 0.04 inch water gage at 1000 fpm in the wide open 

position. Frames shall not be less than 2 inches in width. Dampers shall be tested in 

accordance with AMCA 500. 

3. Operating links external to dampers (such as crankarms, connecting rods, and line 

shafting for transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers) shall withstand a 

load equal to twice the maximum required damper-operating force. Rod lengths shall be 

stainless steel. Working parts of joints and clevises shall be brass, bronze, or stainless 

steel. Adjustments of crankarms shall control the open and closed position of dampers. 

B. Control Valves: 

1. Valve Assembly: Valves shall have stainless steel stems. Valve bodies shall be 

designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150 percent of the system 

operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve leakage rating shall be 0.01 percent of 

rated Cv. Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class 150 steel or stainless steel 

valves shall conform to ASME/ANSI B16.5 as a minimum. Cast iron valve components 

shall conform to ASTM A 126 Class B or C as a minimum. 

2. Butterfly Valve Assembly: Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for deadend 

service and for modulation to the fully closed position, with noncorrosive discs, 

stainless steel shafts supported by bearing, and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures 

from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. Valves shall have a manual means of 

operation independent of the actuator. 

3. Two-Way Valves: Two-Way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics. 

4. Three-Way Valves: Three-Way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics. 

5. Valves for Chilled Water Service: Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be 

brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches 

inclusive shall be of brass, bronze or iron. Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded 

ends. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2 to 3 inches shall have flanged-end connections. 

Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze except that valve stems may be Type 316 

stainless steel. Water valves shall be sized for a 3 psi differential through the valve at 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

ated flow, except as indicated otherwise. Select valve flow coefficient (Cv) for an actual 

pressure drop not less than 50 percent or greater than 125 percent of the design pressure 

drop at design flow. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves. 

C. Actuator: Provide electric type with spring return so that, in the event of power failure, 

actuators shall fail safe in either the normally open or normally closed position as specified. 

Actuators shall be quiet operating and function properly within the range of 85 to 110 percent 

of the motive power. Provide a minimum of one actuator for each damper. 

1. Electric Actuators: Provide direct drive electric actuators for all damper control 

applications. When operated at rated voltage, each operator shall be capable of 

delivering the torque required for continuous uniform movement of the valve or damper 

and shall have end switch to limit travel or shall withstand continuous stalling without 

damage. Operators shall function properly with range of 85 to 110 percent of line 

voltage. Provide gears of steel or copper alloy. Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be 

used for torques less than 16 inch pounds. Provide hardened steel running shafts in 

sleeve bearing of copper alloy, hardened steel, nylon, or ball bearing. Provide twoposition 

operators of the single direction, spring return, or reversing type. Provide 

proportioning operators capable of stopping at all points in the cycle and starting in either 

direction, from any point. Provide reversing and proportioning operators with limit 

switches to limit travel in either direction unless operator is stall type. Equip valve 

operators with a force limiting device such as spring yield so that, when in a relaxed 

position, device shall maintain a pressure on valve disc equivalent to system pressure at 

valve. Provide reversible shaded pole, split capacitor, synchronous, or stepped type 

electric motors. Provide actuator with NEMA 4 actuator housing. 

D. Output Switches: 

1. Control Relays: Shall be double pole, double throw (DPDT), UL listed, with contacts 

rated to the application, and enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Equip with a light 

indicator which is lit when coil is energized and is off when coil is not energized. Relays 

shall be socket type, plug into a fixed base, and be replaceable without need of tools or 

removing wiring. 

2.6 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION 

A. For control power provide a new, 120 volts or less, 60 Hz, two-pole, three wire (black, white 

and green) circuit. Run green ground wire to panel ground. Conduit grounding will not be 

accepted. 

B. Transformers: Transformers shall conform to UL 506. Power digital controllers and digital 

controllers serving terminal control units shall be fed from dedicated circuit breakers with 

surge protection specified. Transformers for digital controllers serving terminal equipment 

on lower level LANs may be grouped to have specified surge protection sized for the number 

of controllers on a single transformer. Provide a fuse cutout on the secondary side of the 

transformer. 

C. Surge Protection: Surge and transient protection consist of devices installed externally to 

digital controllers. 

1. Power Line Surge Protection: Surge suppressors external to digital controller, shall be 

installed on all incoming AC power. Surge suppressor shall be rated by UL 1449, and 

have clamping voltage ratings below the following levels: 

a. Unit is a transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS) 120VAC/single phase/2wire 

plus ground. Hard wire individual equipment protector. 

b. Unit must react with 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

c. Voltage protection threshold, line to neutral, starts at no more than 21 volts peak on 

the 120 VAC line. 

d. TVSS must have an independent secondary stage equal to or greater than the 

primary stage joule rating. 

e. The primary suppression system components must be pure Silicon Avalanche 

Diodes. 

f. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SAC) or Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) are acceptable 

in the independent secondary suppression system. 

g. The Transient Suppression System shall incorporate an indicating light which 

denotes whether the primary and/or secondary transient protection components 

is/are functioning. 

h. All system functions of the Transient Suppression System must be individually 

fused and not short circuit the AC power supply at any time. 

i. The Transient Suppression System shall incorporate an EMI/RFI noise filter with a 

minimum attenuation of 13 db at 10 kHz to 300 MHz. 

j. The system must comply with IEEE C52.41, Class “B” requirement and be tested 

according to IEEE C62.45. 

k. The system shall operate at -20 degrees C to +50 degrees C. 

2. Telephone and Communication Line Surge Protection: Provide transient surge protection 

to protect the DDC controller and LAN related devices from surges that occur on the 

phone lines (modem and direct connect) and on inter-unit LAN communications. 

Devices shall be UL listed. 

a. The surge protection shall be a rugged package with continuous, non-interrupting 

protection and not use “crowbar” circuiting. Instant automatic reset after safely 

eliminating transient surges, induced lightning and other forms of transient over 

voltages. 

b. Unit must react within 5 nanoseconds using only solid-state silicon avalanche 

technology. 

c. Unit shall be installed at the proper distance within system as recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

3. Controller Input/Output Protection: Controller input/output points shall be surge 

protected with optical isolation, MOV or silicon avalanche devices. Fuses are not 

permitted for surge protection. 

C. Wiring: Provide complete electric wiring for DDC system, including wiring to transformer 

primaries. Control circuit conductors shall not be run in the same conduit as power wiring 

over 100 volts. Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in accordance with 

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL. Circuits operating at 100 volts or less shall be defined as 

low voltage and shall be run in liquid-tight flexible conduit, galvanized rigid steel conduit 

(for exposed interior and exterior conduit runs), or electrical metallic tubing (for concealed 

interior conduit runs) in accordance with DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL. Provide circuit 

and wiring protection as required by NFPA 70. HVAC plenums include the space between a 

drop ceiling and the architectural ceiling, within walls and within ductwork. Protect exposed 

wiring from abuse and damage. 

1. AC Control Wiring: Control wiring for 24 volt circuits shall be insulated copper 18 

AWG minimum and shall be rated for 300 VAC service. 

2. Wiring for 120 volt shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 600 VAC service. 

3. Analog Signal Wiring: Analog signal wiring shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted 

pair. Each cable shall be 100 percent shielded and have 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire 

shall have insulation rated to 300 VAC. Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester 

or tinned-copper (cable-shield tape), overall 20 AWG tinned copper cable drain wire and 

overall cable insulation rated to 300 VAC. 

4. Install all control wiring in conduit separate from AC power circuits. 

5. Provide junction box with conduit seals, similar to that indicated for air handling unit 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

power entry, for all conduits exposed to conditioned air to prevent condensation inside 

the conduit. 

2.7 FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES 

A. Smoke Detectors: Provide ionization type, duct mounted smoke detector in the supply air 

and/or return air stream as indicated. The detector housing shall be Factory Mutual approved 

and UL listed in accordance with UL 268A, "Standard for Safety Smoke Detectors for Duct 

Application", specifically for use in air handling systems. The detector shall be able to 

operate between 500 fpm to 4000 fpm air velocity. The detector housing shall incorporate an 

airtight smoke chamber in accordance with UL 268. The housing shall be able to be mounted 

to rectangular or round ducts without adapter brackets. Provide integral filter system for the 

detector and housing. Detector shall be provided with a minimum of three (3) auxiliary 

contacts (1-N.C. for AHU shutdown, 1-N.O. for notification to DDC system and 1-N.O. for 

fire alarm annunciation, air sampling tube, NEMA 1 enclosure and 120 volt power unless 

otherwise indicated. If the power source is indicated as 24 volts, provide a control 

transformer suitable for the application and load. Coordinate installation with the Electrical 

and Fire Alarm systems. 

B. Smoke Dampers and Combination Smoke/Fire Dampers: Smoke damper and actuator 

assembly as required in accordance with NFPA 90A shall meet the Class II leakage 

requirements of UL 555S. Dampers shall be factory fabricated, galvanized steel or stainless 

steel with lubricated bearing, linkage, and seals to withstand temperatures from minus 20 to 

plus 250 degree F. Provide seals that can easily be replaced. Combination smoke/fire 

dampers shall have UL 1.5 hour rating and shall be equipped with electric/thermal link which 

closes damper at 165 degrees F and then automatically resets after normal temperature is 

restored by cycling damper operator. Equip dampers with electric operators which close 

smoke dampers tightly when activated. Provide a duct smoke detector for each damper. 




trades. Work conflicts shall be brought to attention of the State and work rearranged or 

modified in accordance with his decision. 






proceed with work only upon written authority of the State. 



B. Patching of all holes, etc., will be done under other sections of specification. Patch any holes 

cut unnecessarily. 

3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

A. Label DDC panels and other equipment as specified in Section 230300 GENERAL 




operation, inspection, repair and maintenance. If these items are concealed behind walls or 

ceilings of non-removable type construction, provide access panels of proper size for easy 

access at no additional cost to the State. 


A. As specified in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

3.6 DDC SYSYEM INSTALLATION 

A. Perform installation under supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the 

installation of DDC systems. Provide components for a complete and operational system. 

B. Wiring Criteria: 

1. Input/Output identification: Permanently label each field wire, cable, or pneumatic tube 

at each end with unique identification. 

2. Rigid or flexible conduit shall be terminated at all sensors and output devices. 

3. Surge Protection: Install surge protection in accordance with the manufacturer’s 


4. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground. Ground controller 

to a ground in accordance with DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Grounding of the green 

ac ground wire, at the breaker panel, alone is not adequate. Run metal conduit from 

controller panels to adequate building grounds. Ground sensor drain wire shields at 

controller end. 

5. Contractor is responsible for correcting all associated ground loop problems. 

C. Digital Controllers: 

1. Do not divide control of a single mechanical system such as an air handling unit, boiler, 

chiller, or terminal equipment between two or more controllers. A single controller shall 

manage control functions for a single mechanical system. It is permissible, however, to 

manage more than one mechanical system with a single controller. 

2. Provide digital control cabinets that protect digital controller electronics from dust, at 

locations shown on the drawings. 

3. Provide a main power switch at each highest level LAN digital controller within 

controller cabinet. 

4. No multiplexing of points is allowed. 

D. Temperature Sensors: Provide temperature sensors in locations to sense the appropriate 

condition. Provide sensor where they are easy to access and service without special tools. 

Calibrate sensors to accuracy specified. In no case will sensors designed for one application 

be installed for another application. 

1. Duct Temperature Sensors: 

a. Provide sensors in ductwork in general locations as indicated. Select specific 

sensor location within duct to accurately sense appropriate air temperatures. Do 

not locate sensors in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts or equipment. 

Install gaskets between the sensor housing and duct wall. Seal duct and insulation 

penetrations. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

. String duct averaging sensors between two rigid supports in a serpentine position to 

sense average conditions. Thermally isolate temperature sensing elements from 

supports. Provide duct access doors to averaging sensors. 

2. Immersion Temperature Sensors: Provide thermowells for sensors measuring 

temperature in liquid applications or pressure vessels. Locate wells to sense continuous 

flow conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters 

are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to effect proper 

flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent 

of pipe area. Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. Provide thermowells 

with thermal transmission material within the well to speed the response of temperature 

measurement. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal transmission 

material. 

3. Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Provide outside air temperature sensors on north side 

of the building, away from exhaust hoods, air intakes and other areas that may affect 

temperature readings. Provide sunshields to protect outside air sensor from direct 

sunlight. 

E. Damper Actuators: Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. 

F. Thermometers: Provide thermometers at locations indicated. Mount thermometers to allow 

readability when standing on the floor. 

G. Pressure Sensors: 

1. Differential Pressure: 

a. General: Install pressure sensing tips in locations to sense appropriate pressure 

conditions. 

b. Duct Static Pressure Sensing: Locate duct static pressure tip approximately twothirds 

of distance from supply fan to end of duct with the greatest pressure drop. 

c. Pumping Proof with Differential Pressure Switches: Install high pressure side 

between pump discharge and check valve. 

H. Control Drawings: Post laminated copies of as-built control system drawings in each 

mechanical room. Provide six (6) sets of as-built drawings to the activity. 

3.7 ADJUSTMENTS 

A. Calibrate instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using test equipment 

with a test equipment accuracy. Adjust controls and equipment to maintain conditions 

indicated, to perform functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified. 


A. General: 

1. Demonstrate compliance of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning control system 

with the contract documents. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies 

necessary to perform calibration and site testing. Ensure that tests are performed by 

competent employees of the DDC system installer or the DDC system manufacturer 

regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems. 

2. Testing will include the field tests and the performance verification tests. Field tests shall 

demonstrate proper calibration of input and output devices, and the operation of specific 

equipment. Performance verification test shall ensure proper execution of the sequence 

of operation and proper tuning of control loops. 

3. Obtain approval of the plan for each phase of testing before beginning that phase of 

testing. Give to the Contracting Officer written notification of planned testing at least 45 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

3.9 TRAINING 

days prior to test. Notification shall be accompanied by the proposed test procedures. In 

no case will the Contractor be allowed to start testing without written State approval of 

test procedures. The test procedures shall consist of detailed instructions for complete 

testing to prove performance of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and 

digital control system. 

4. Before scheduling the performance verification test, furnish the field test documentation 

and written certification to the Contracting Officer that the installed system has been 

calibrated, tested, and is ready for the performance verification test. Do not start the 

performance verification test prior to receiving written permission from the Government. 

A. Provide training in accordance with Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. The controls contractor shall provide the following training services: 

1. Two (2) day of on-site orientation by a field engineer who is fully knowledgeable of the 

specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of 

a review of the project as-built drawings, the control system software layout and naming 

conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations. 

2. General: Provide training course schedule, syllabus, and training materials 45 days prior 

to the start of training. Conduct training courses for designated personnel in the 

maintenance and operation of the HVAC and DDC system. Orient training to the 

specific system being installed under this contract. Use operation and maintenance 

manual as the primary instructional aid. Operational and maintenance manuals shall be 

provided for each trainee with four additional sets, two sets delivered for archiving at the 

project site, one set for the mechanical contractor, and one set for the design engineer. 

Training manuals shall include an agenda, defined objectives and a detailed description 

of the subject matter for each lesson. Furnish audio-visual equipment and all other 

training materials and supplies. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom or lab 

instruction, including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time, Monday thru 

Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility. For guidance, assume 

the attendees will have a high school education and are familiar with HVAC systems. 

The minimum amount of training for this project shall be 24 hours. 

3. Operator Training: Operator training shall include the detailed review of the control 

installation drawings, points list, and equipment list. The instructor shall then walk 

through the building identifying the location of the control devices installed. For each 

type of systems, the instructor shall demonstrate how the system accomplishes the 

sequence of operation. 

4. From the workstation, the operator shall demonstrate the software features of the system. 

As a minimum, the operator demonstrate and explain logging on, setting passwords, 

setting up a schedule, trend, point history, alarm, and archiving the database. 

5. Maintenance Training: The system maintenance course shall be taught at the project site 

within one month after the completion of the operators training. The course shall last for 

one 8 hour training day. The course shall include answering questions from the last 

training session, trouble shooting and diagnostics, repair, instructions, preventive 

maintenance procedures and schedules, and calibration procedures. 

3.10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 

A. Sequence of operations shall be as indicated. 

3.11 LAPTOP 

A. Laptop shall be provided upon project completion. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

3.12 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION/DDC SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 

A. DDC Remote Access: The Direct Digital Control (DDC) system provided shall include the 

capability for multiple users to access the DDC simultaneously from remote locations. 

Interface shall be to the entire DDC and provide the capability to monitor all I/O and adjust 

parameters. 

B. Open Systems Integrator: 

1. VFD Integrator Interface: 

a. The BAS system shall include appropriate hardware equipment and software to 

allow two way data communications between the BAS system and the VFD 

manufacturer’s control panel. 

b. It shall be the responsibility of the BAS Contractor to coordinate with the VFD 

manufacturer to provide a functional data communications connection. 

c. All data supported by the VFD communication protocol shall be mapped into the 

supervisory DDC controller’s database and shall be displayed on data screens at the 

Operator Workstation and shall be transparent to the Operator Workstation and 

shall be transparent to the operator. 

d. The BAS Contractor shall furnish either the OSP or BACnet communications 

interface as required by the VFD manufacturer. 

e. The BAS Contractor shall provide all communications and power wiring and 

gateway panel installation for the DDC system. The VFD manufacturer shall 

provide all hardware for connection of the manufacturer’s processor. 

f. The BAS Contractor shall provide all hardware and software required for the VFD 

manufacturer’s gateway interface. 

3.13 PRE-ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATION 

A. The Contractor shall provide written certification that the entire DDC system has been 

functionally tested prior to scheduling the acceptance test. The pre-acceptance test shall be 

performed in conjunction with the Test and Balance work to ensure proper water flows. 

B. Deficiencies discovered during the pre-acceptance test shall be corrected and retested. 

C. The pre-acceptance test does not take the place of the manufacturer’s recommended checkout 

or startup procedures or report. 

D. Requirements in related sections are independent from the requirements of this section and 

shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements specified in this section. 

E. Eight (8) copies of the complete certification and test report shall be submitted to the 

University at least 2 weeks prior to scheduling of the acceptance test. 

F. Test Data: The Contractor shall provide the University with typewritten schedules of 

readings taken during the pre-acceptance test indicating the required or specified readings, the 

first reading taken and final reading for the following items: 

1. Air Handling Unit: 

a. Supply and outside air cfm. 

b. External static pressures 

c. Motor full load amps. 

2. Motorized Valves: 

a. Valve Stroke Full Open/Close 

b. Feedback Signal to ATCS Correspond to Actual Condition 

c. Position Commanded by ATCS Correspond to Actual Position 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

3. Temperature Sensors: 

a. Has Sensor Been Calibrated? 

b. ATCS Reading 

c. Adjacent Thermometer Reading 

4. Variable Frequency Drives: 

a. Contactor Bypass Operational 

b. Drive Shuts Pump Down in “Off” Position 

c. Drive Starts Pump in “Manual” Position 

d. Drive Operates from ATCS in “Auto” Position 

5. ATC System: 

a. Record all point conditions (new and existing) 

b. Verify Proper Switching from Normal to Emergency Power Mode 

c. Simulate Failure of all Equipment 

6. Motorized Dampers: 

a. Damper Stroke Full Open/Close 

b. Feedback Signal to ATCS Correspond to Actual Condition 

c. Position Commanded by ATCS Correspond to Actual Position 

7. Exhaust Fans: 

a. Exhaust cfm 

b. External Static Pressures 

c. Plenum Static Pressures 

3.14 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE 

A. Upon completion of the calibration, Contractor shall startup the system and perform all 

necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper operation. Contractor shall be 

responsible for generating all software and entering all databases necessary to perform the 

sequence of control and specified software routine. An acceptance test in the presence of the 

University Representative(s) shall be performed. 

B. Alarms: Alarms shall be controlled as follows: 

1. Flexible time delays shall be used before generating an alarm to insure it is a true alarm. 

2. Alarms shall be capable of being printed out on a local terminal. 

3. All alarm messages shall have a time and date. 

4. Alarm messages shall be capable of being sent to remote locations via auto dial modem. 

5. The network shall be capable of sending messages to different telephone numbers based on 

type of alarm, time of day, or if the previous dialed number did not answer. 

C. Control: The control strategies specified in the Sequence of Operation shall be implemented 

and operational per user-defined point parameters. Further, software controls which enable 

the Sequence of Operation shall be relatively simple to adjust and modify, should the user 

wish to adjust such parameters. 

D. Reports: 

1. All reports shall be capable of the following: 

a. Custom user design 

b. User defined units and labels 

c. Being generated on a periodic basis or on a requested basis 

d. Being generated and printed on a local or remote terminal 

2. Status Reports: Status reports shall contain current status of all controlled equipment and 

current value of all sensors. 

3. Runtime Reports: Runtime reports shall contain the runtime of controlled equipment. 

4. Summary Reports: Summary reports shall be capable of containing any of the following 

information if requested by the State. 



SYSTEM FOR HVAC

a. High and low temperatures 

b. Current and past electrical peak demands 

c. Past energy consumption and cost 


A. Provide maintenance service for all laboratory service piping system components as specified 

in and in accordance with the requirements and schedule of Section 230300 GENERAL 




REQUIREMENTS. The instructions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 

1. Wiring and control diagrams and input/out point identification list with data to explain the 

detailed operation and control of each component. 

2. A control sequence describing startup, operation, shutdown and emergency conditions. 

3. Field information including location, device type and function and electrical parameters. 

4. Complete hardcopy of all program listings and functions. 

5. Instructions on programming and testing. This shall include all control programs, 

variables, set points, time periods, messages, passwords, and other information necessary to 

load, alter, test and execute the system. 

6. Complete description of programming language, including commands; editing and writing 

control programs, printouts and logs; and mathematical calculations. 

7. Instructions on modifying any control point, verifying error status, changing passwords, 

and initiating/disabling control programs and alarms. 

8. Two (2) floppy diskettes with backup program for each control unit. 

9. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. 

10. Manufacturer's bulletins, cuts and descriptive data. 

11. Parts lists and recommended spare parts. 

12. Name and phone number to call for service during normal working hours and in case of 

emergency nights and weekends. 




SYSTEM FOR HVAC

SECTION 232113 – CHILLED WATER PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the chilled water 

and other miscellaneous mechanical piping systems complete, including but not limited to the 

following: 

1. Valves and accessories. 

2. Piping and fittings. 


4. Testing and guarantee. 





B. Vibration isolation work specified in Section 220548 MECHANICAL SOUND, 

VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL. 

C. Mechanical insulation work specified in Section 230700 HVAC INSULATION. 

D. Air handling units and fan coil units specified in SECTION 237323 AIR HANDLING 

EQUIPMENT. 

E. Testing and balancing is specified in Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 

BALANCING FOR HVAC. 

F. Control valves and control end devices specified in Section 230923 DIRECT-DIGITAL 

CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. 




B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of plans, performance data and details showing 

locations and installation including but not limited to the following (note: shop drawing of 

these items can be combined with the shop drawing for the air conditioning equipment shop 

drawings): 

1. Chilled water piping interior locations. 


1. Pipes and valves 

D. Schedules: 

1. Schedule of equipment listing name and addresses of manufacturers; manufacturer's local 

supplier's name, address and phone number; catalog numbers and trade names in 

accordance with paragraph 1.05.B of Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

2. Maintenance service contract and schedule 

E. Reports: None 



CHILLED WATER PIPING





a. Pipes and valves 

2. Submit certificates of qualifications for manufacturers representatives: None 

G. As-Built Drawings: Submit drawings in accordance with Section 230300 GENERAL 


H. Guarantee and Certificate: Submit one year guarantee and certificate in accordance with 



2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS 

A. General: All pipe and pipe fittings shall be suitable for 125 psi minimum working pressure, 

in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM and ANSI specifications as indicated. 

B. Service: Aboveground chilled water. 

ITEM SIZE DESCRIPTION 

Pipe 4-inch and smaller Hard drawn copper tubing, type L, conforming to ASTM 

B88. 

5-inch and larger 

Standard weight, black steel, ASTM A53, beveled ends. 

Alternate system: Victaulic fittings and couplings. 

Fittings 4-inch and smaller Wrot copper soldered joint type conforming to ANSI B16.18 

and soldered joints with 95-5 tin antimony alloy or brazed. 

5-inch and larger Black steel, standard weight, buttweld type, ASTM A234, 

ANSI B16.9. Use standard weight weld rings at joints of 

piping if required by approved welding procedure. Alternate 

system: Victaulic fittings and couplings. 

Unions 2-1/2-inch and For copper tubing shall be cast bronze with 

smaller 

soldered ends. 

Flanges 4-inch Cast bronze, 150-lb. soldered joint type flanges, ANSI 

B16.24. 


Forged steel, 150-lb. weld neck, flat-faced or raised face to 

match flange on valves or equipment, ASTM A181, ANSI 

B16.5. Alternative system: 150-lb. Victaulic flanges. 

C. Condensate drain: Hard drawn copper tubing, Type L, ASTM B88 with cast bronze soldered 

joint ANSI B16.18 fittings or wrot copper fittings. Insulate as specified in Section 230700 

HVAC INSULATION. 




2.2 VALVES 

A. Victaulic connections shall be an approved connection type if used in conjunction with 

Victaulic piping system. Requirements of valve are the same; only the end connection type 

will change to grooved type. 

B. Provide extended neck for valves requiring insulation. 

ITEM SIZE DESCRIPTION 

Globe Valves 3-inch and smaller 125-lb. S.W.P., bronze body, rising stem, inside screw, 

composition disc, threaded ends. Provide NIBCO T-211or 

approved equal. 

Check Valves 1-1/2-inch and 

smaller 


125-lb. S.W.P., bronze body, swing check 

valve, bronze disc, bronze hinge pin, Buna-N resilient seat, 

threaded ends. Provide NIBCO T-413 or approved equal. 

125-lb. S.W.P., double door check valve, steel or cast iron 

body, aluminum bronze doors, stainless steel spring and 

pins, Buna-N resilient seat, non-slam closure, lug body style. 

Provide APCO Series 9000L or approved equal. 

Ball Valves 2-inch and smaller 125-lb. S.W.P., bronze body, Type 316 stainless steel ball 

and stem, PTFE seat, full port, lever handle with integral 

stop, threaded ends. Provide NIBCO T-580-66 or approved 

equal. 

Plug Valves 2-1/2-inch and 150-lb. S.W.P, bronze body, eccentric resilient 

smaller 

chloroprene faced plug, lever handle with integral stop, 

threaded ends. Provide Dezurik Fig. 120, Val-matic or 

approved equal 


125-lb. S.W.P., cast iron body, resilient chloroprene faced 

eccentric plug, flanged ends and manual operator with 

handwheel actuator and right angle gear drive. Provide 

DeZurik Fig. 118, Val-matic or approved equal. 

Butterfly 2-inch and larger MSS-SP67, Type I tight shutoff valve, ductile 

Valves 

iron lug body, stainless steel stem, aluminum 

bronze disc, EPDM seal, positive latching lever actuator 

with memory stop. For sizes 4-inch and larger, provide 

worm gear drive with handwheel. For valves located more 

than 5 feet above finished floor, provide chain wheel 

operator and chain. Provide NIBCO LD-2000, Bray or 


Motorized 2-inch and larger Butterfly valve as specified. Provide electric 

Butterfly 

actuator as indicated. 

Valves 

Motorized 2-inch and larger Ball valve as specified. Provide electric actuator as 

Ball Valves 

indicated. 




2.3 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR 

A. Two position actuators shall be electric type with spring return so that, in the event of power 

failure, actuators shall fail safe in the normally closed position as specified. Modulating 

actuators shall be compatible with the DDC control system. Actuators shall be quiet 

operating and function properly within the range of 85 to 110 percent of the motive power. 

1. Electric Actuators: Provide direct drive electric actuators for all valve applications. 

When operated at rated voltage, each operator shall be capable of delivering the torque 

required for continuous uniform movement of the valve and shall have end switch to limit 

travel or shall withstand continuous stalling without damage. Operators shall function 

properly with range of 85 to 110 percent of line voltage. Provide gears of steel or copper 

alloy. Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be used for torques less than 16 inch pounds. 

Provide hardened steel running shafts in sleeve bearing of copper alloy, hardened steel, 

nylon, or ball bearing. Provide two-position operators of the single direction, spring 

return, or reversing type. Equip valve operators with a force limiting device such as 

spring yield so that, when in a relaxed position, device shall maintain a pressure on valve 

disc equivalent to system pressure at valve. Provide reversible shaded pole, split 

capacitor, synchronous, or stepped type electric motors. Provide NEMA 4 actuator 

housing. 

2. Control Relays: Shall be double pole, double throw (DPDT), UL listed, with contacts 

rated to the application, and enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Equip with a light 

indicator which is lit when coil is energized and is off when coil is not energized. Relays 

shall be socket type, plug into a fixed base, and be replaceable without need of tools or 

removing wiring. 

3. End Switch: Provide each actuator with end position switches to indicate closed and 

open positions. Switches shall be double pole, double throw (DPDT), UL listed, with 

contacts rated to the application, and enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Equip with a 

light indicator which is lit when coil is energized and is off when coil is not energized. 

2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORT 

A. Hangers and supports shall be of manufacturer and type specified or as indicated or approved 

equal. Pipe supports and hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper or plastic 

coated. Provide hot-dipped galvanized pip hangers and supports. 

B. Shields: Provide protection shields at hanger points of insulated piping. Shields shall be 

Crawford Fig. 25, Elcen Fig. 219, or Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or Grinnell Fig. 167. 

C. Supports: 

1. Piping shall be supported from structural steel, grouted CMU walls, or concrete slab 

only; piping shall not be supported in any manner from the roofing. 

2. Drilled-In Threaded Inserts: Where supports in slabs are required after concrete has been 

poured, Phillips "Redhead" drilled in threaded inserts shall be provided, installed in 

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

3. Expansion Anchors and Power-Actuated Fasteners and Devices: Install lead shield 

anchors or power actuated sleeves, fasteners and devices in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations. Powder actuated pins are not allowed to be "shot" into 

the concrete structure. 

D. Schedules: Pipe support spacing and sizes of pipe hanging suspension rods shall conform to 

the following table, except support spacing for copper tubing shall not exceed 6 feet on 

centers: 




PIPE SIZE 

1/2-inch & 3/4-inch 

1-inch & 1-1/4-inch 

1-1/2-inch 

2-inch & 2-1/2-inch 

3-inch 

4-inch 

6-inch 

8-inch to 12-inch 


PIPE SIZE 

Up to 2-inch 

2-1/2-inch 


6-inch 



SUPPORT SPACING 

Not over 6-ft.-6-inch 









ROD SIZE 

3/8-inch 

1/2-inch 

5/8-inch 

3/4-inch 

7/8-inch 

1-inch 

E. Supplementary Steel: Provide all necessary supplementary steel for proper support or 

attachment of hangers. Steel shall be painted with one coat of rust inhibiting primer. 

F. Single Hangers: Unless otherwise indicated, support single pipe runs as follows: 

1. Pipe 2-1/2 inch and smaller: Split ring type hanger, Grinnell Fig. 104, Crawford Fig. 

104, Fee and Mason Fig. 199, Elcen Fig. 92 or adjustable clevis hanger. 

2. Pipe 3 inch and larger: Clevis hanger conforming to MSS SP-69, Type 1. 

G. Riser Clamps: Carbon steel conforming to MSS SP-69 Type 8. Grinnell Fig. 261, Fee and 

Mason Fig. 241. 

2.5 STRAINERS 

A. Wye Strainer: Provide wye ("Y") type strainer at suction side of pump, ahead of all flow 

control valves and as indicated, bronze body (2-inch and smaller) or cast iron body (2-1/2- 

inch and larger) with stainless steel strainer screens with not larger than 0.033-inch 

perforations and threaded ends (2-inch and smaller) or flanged ends (2-1/2-inch and larger). 

Provide valved flushing line from bottom of each strainer. Provide Hayward Model 80, 

Mueller or approved equal. 

2.6 THERMOMETERS 

A. Blue spirit filled lens tube type with separable socket. Adjustable, 9-inch scale, 0 degree F to 

100 degree F range for chilled water application and 0 degrees F to 160 degrees F for 

condenser water application with 2 degree F maximum scale divisions, enameled die-cast 

aluminum adjustable angle case. Provide stainless steel wells for steel pipes and brass wells 

for copper pipe and of suitable length to accommodate pipe size and thickness of insulation. 

2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES 

A. Pressure gauges shall be Grade A, accurate within 1 percent of full scale, phosphor bronze 

Bourdon tube, spring type, with 4-1/2-inch diameter dials unless otherwise indicated, with 

recalibrating screws. Socket shall be 1/4 inch NPT forged brass, bottom outlet. Gauges shall 




have plain cast aluminum cases with screwed rings finished in black enamel or chromed and 

shall be installed with necessary piping, including heavy duty needle valve. 

B. Pressure gauges ranges shall be such that the position of the pointer during normal operation 

will be 50 percent of dial range. 

2.8 CHILLED WATER AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL DEVICES 

A. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Provided individually selected and factory calibrated by the 

flow control valve manufacturer for the service specified. The valves shall automatically 

limit the rate of flow of the system to the required design capacity regardless of system 

fluctuations. Valves shall regulate flow within 5 percent of their tag rating over an operating 

pressure differential of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. Provide tamperproof 

valves with body tappings suitable for connecting instruments for verifying flow 

control performance. Provide the self-cleaning, cartridge-piston type with stainless steel or 

Monel, variable area orifices. Valves shall be copper or bronze body and designed for a 

minimum service pressure of 125 psig. Valve bodies shall have threaded or flanged 

connections. Furnish each automatic flow control valve with a valve kit located outside of 

insulation, and hose fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments as specified. 

Provide a metal identification tag fastened to each of the flow control valves with a chain. 

The tag shall include manufacturer's name, model number, rated flowrate in gallons per 

minute, and operating pressure differential range. Provide a portable meter with a direct 

reading gauge, hoses, shutoff valves, vent valves, “psi” to “gpm” conversion chart, and 

carrying case that is compatible with the flow control valves provided. Portable flow meter 

shall be turned over to the State at the end of the project. Provide Griswold Controls, copper 

sweat type or threaded flange type with dual hose meter KVT #3429A, Flow Design Inc. or 


B. Manual Flow Control Valve: Copper alloy body up to 2 inch size, Y-pattern ductile iron 

body for 2-1/2 inches and larger sizes, 300 psi working pressure, differential pressure read 

out ports across valve seat, memory stop, calibrated nameplate, threaded or grooved end, leak 

tight full rated working pressure and portable meter and hoses to read flowrate or differential 

pressure and flowrate calibration curve. Victaulic TA Hydronic Circuit Balancing Valve, 

Bell & Gossett or approved equal. 

2.9 AIR VENT VALVE 

A. High capacity float type, 150 psi, 3/4" NPT, Taco 418, Bell & Gossett or approved equal. 




trades. Work conflicts shall be brought to attention of the State and work rearranged or 

modified in accordance with his decision. 






proceed with work only upon written authority of the State. 









A. Install all control devices, specialties, etc., to provide for easy access for operation, repair and 

maintenance. 

B. If concealed, access doors and panels shall be provided. Coordinate installation of items 

where access doors and panels are required for proper access. Access is required where 

valves or controls are installed behind walls or above non-removable ceilings. 


A. Pipe Installation: 

1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site and worked into 

place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all windows, doors and other 

openings. Cutting or weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation 

will not be permitted. 

2. Pipes shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall be so installed 

as to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. Install 

special swing and expansion joints in pipe lines where required to accommodate specified 

movement. Filings, dust, or dirt shall be wiped from interior of the pipe before 

connections are made. 

3. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings. All piping shall be installed with 

sufficient pitch to insure adequate drainage. 

4. Screw joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut conforming to requirements 

of NBS handbook H28. Joints shall be made perfectly tight with a stiff mixture of 

litharge and glycerin or other approved threaded joint compound applied with a brush to 

the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up. 

5. Welded joints shall conform as to workmanship, testing, qualification of welders and 

general requirements, with welding section of ANSI B31.9. The State reserves the right 

to require qualifying demonstration of any welder assigned to job by Contractor at no 

additional cost. 

6. Flanges shall be suitable for the required operating pressures and temperature conditions. 

Gaskets shall be fiber plastic or synthetic material suitable for water service. All nuts, 

bolts and washers used shall be galvanized for ferrous flanges and brass for copper or 

bronze flanges. 

7. Pipes passing through walls or concrete floors shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted 

into place at time of construction. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members. 

Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall or floor and shall be cut flush with 

each surface. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of such size as to provide a 

minimum of 1/4 inch all around clearance between jacket over insulation and sleeves. 

Space between sleeve and piping shall be packed with twisted jute packing and then 

sealed with waterproof sealant. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls or floors, seal 

both ends of sleeve with Underwriter's Laboratories listed thermal barrier material to 

maintain fire rating. 

8. All piping systems shall be thoroughly tested for leaks prior to burying. 




3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORT 

A. Provide adjustable hangers, clamps, supplementary steel, etc., as required for proper support 

of all pipe lines. Hangers shall be of adequate size to permit covering to run continuously 

through hangers. Coordinate location of hangers with light fixtures as shown on Electrical 

drawings. Hangers provided under other sections shall not be used for support of piping or 

equipment provided under this section unless permission is granted in writing. 

B. Supports shall secure pipes, conduits in place, shall prevent pipe vibration, maintain required 

grading by proper adjustment, provide for expansion and contraction, and shall make neat 

appearance. 

C. Design supports of strength and rigidity to suit loading, service, and in manner which will not 

stress unduly the building construction. 

D. Where support is from concrete construction, take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate 

waterproofing. 

E. Vertical risers shall be secure at each floor level and additional supported at bottom of riser to 

prevent slipping or falling of piping. 

3.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION 

A. Vibration isolation shall be provided as specified in Section 220548 MECHANICAL 

SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL. 

B. All pipe connections to reciprocating and or rotating equipment shall be made with flexible 

pipe connections. 

3.7 THERMOMETERS 

A. Install thermometers and wells where indicated and at air handling units supply and return 

chilled water piping. 

3.8 PRESSURE GAUGES 

A. Install pressure gauges where indicated and at supply and return chilled water connection at 

each cooling coil. 

3.9 STRAINER 

A. Install strainer upstream of control valves, and as indicated on contract drawings. 

B. Contractor shall clean all strainers not more than one week before final inspection. 

3.10 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS 

A. Copper pipe shall be insulated from direct contact with ferrous piping connections by approved 

insulating (dielectric) unions or couplings or flanges. 

3.11 PAINTING 

A. All ferrous metal shall be given one shop coat of red lead or other approved rust resisting 

paint. Where zinc coated metal is furnished, it shall not be shop primed unless specifically 




called for, but all abraded places and welds shall be touched up with Galvalloy or approved 

equal. 

B. Pipe hangers, supports and other iron work in concealed spaces shall be thoroughly cleaned 

and painted with one coat of asphalt varnish. Finish painting of exposed items is specified in 

Section 099000 PAINTING. 

3.12 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING 




3.14 CLEANING AND FLUSHING PIPES 

A. Pipes shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign matter. Provide 

vents and drains connections and nipples as required to allow flushing the pipes thoroughly. 

3.15 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Pipes 

shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign matter. Temporary bypass 

shall be provided for all coils and condensers to prevent flushing water from passing through 

coils. Strainers and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned. Equipment shall be wiped clean, 

with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Bearings shall be properly lubricated 

with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. All control valves and other 

miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or 

directed. Clean all strainer screens 10 days after acceptance of this project. After cleaning, 

refill the system with potable water and water treatment chemicals for closed reheat water 

system. 


A. Perform inspections and tests as specified herein to demonstrate that piping and equipment, 

as installed, is in compliance with contract requirements. Start up and operate the system. 

During this time, periodically clean the various strainers until no further accumulation of 

foreign material occurs. Exercise care so that minimum loss of water occurs when strainers 

are cleaned. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments to place them in proper 

operation and sequence. 

1. Hydrostatic Test of Piping System: Test piping system hydrostatically at 125% of the 

working pressure using water not exceeding 100 degrees F. Conduct tests in accordance 

with the requirements of ASME B31.9 and as follows. Test piping system after all lines 

have been cleaned and before applying insulation covering. Remove or valve off from 

the system, gages, and other apparatus which may be damaged by the test before the tests 

are made. Install calibrated test pressure gage in the system to observe any loss in 

pressure. Maintain test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable an inspection of 

each joint and connection. Perform tests after installation and prior to acceptance. Notify 

the State in writing 7 days prior to the time scheduled for the tests. 

2. Auxiliary Equipment and Accessory Tests: Observe and check pumps, accessories, and 

equipment during operational and capacity tests for leakage, malfunctions, defects, 

noncompliance with referenced standards, or overloading. 




3.17 TESTING 

3. Backflow Preventers: Backflow preventers shall be tested by locally approved and 

certified backflow assembly testers. A copy of the test report shall be provided to the 

State prior to placing the domestic water system into operation, or no later than 5 days 

after the test. 

A. Prior to backfilling, hydrostatically test the piping system to a pressure of 1.5 times the 

working pressure in accordance with ASME 31.9 Building Services Piping except as 

modified herein. Hold test pressure for 1 hour. Repair all leaks and retest until satisfactory 

test is completed. 

B. Notify the State 14 days before flushing and testing to allow scheduling to observe the 

flushing and testing activities. 

C. After satisfactory completion of testing, all openings to the piping shall be protected from 

entrance of foreign objects, dirt, etc. and accelerated corrosion of the interior of the piping. 

3.18 FIELD INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Provide field instructions as specified in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated, the services of 

one or more qualified personnel shall be provided by the Contractor for a period of not less 

than four (4) hours to instruct the representatives of the State in the operation and 

maintenance of the items in this section. These field instructions shall cover all the items 

contained in the bound instructions. Daily sessions shall be separated into small sessions as 

indicated in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

3.19 TESTING AND BALANCING WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 

A. Provide testing and balancing as specified in Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 

BALANCING FOR HVAC. 



CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 232113-10 CHILLED WATER PIPING

SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the air 

conditioning and ventilation system complete, including but not limited to the following: 

1. Sheetmetal ducts 

2. Diffusers, registers and grilles 

3. Volume and motorized dampers 

4. Duct smoke detectors 

5. Operation and maintenance instructions and manuals 

6. Manufacturer's literature, shop drawings and record drawings 

7. Inspection, test and guarantee 





B. Painting work specified in Division 09 FINISHES. 


D. Insulation for air conditioning and ventilation specified in Section 230700 HVAC 

INSULATION. 

E. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air conditioning systems specified in Section 230593 

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. 

F. Air handling units specified in SECTION 237323 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT. 





locations and installation including but not limited to the following (Note: shop drawing of 

the items in this Section shall be combined with the shop drawing for the equipment in 

Section 237323 - AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT.): 

1. Ductwork 

2. Air devices 

3. Duct smoke detectors 


1. Air Devices. 

2. Duct smoke detectors. 

D. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manuals in accordance with Section 230300 

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

E. Equipment Listing: List of equipment showing name and addresses of manufacturers; 



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

manufacturer’s local supplier’s name, address and phone number; catalog numbers and trade 

names in accordance with paragraph 1.05.B of Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

F. Maintenance service contract and schedule: Submit maintenance service contract and 

schedule in accordance with Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 



H. Guarantee and Certificate: Submit one year guarantee and certificate in accordance with 



2.1 AIR DEVICES 

A. NC ratings for all air devices shall not exceed 26. 

1. Aluminum, plaque faced, opposed blade volume damper, round neck and standard white 

finish or as indicated. Titus OMNI, 24" x 24" lay-in module size for SAD-1 or approved 

equal. 

2. 24 x 24 Face Supply Air Diffuser - SAD-2: Provide Titus Model TDCA-AA series, or 

approved equal. Diffuser shall be louvered face, aluminum, 24 x 24 lay-in face with 

adjustable pattern, in sizes, capacities and patterns as indicated. Provide removable 

center core with opposed blade volume damper Titus AG-75 or approved equal, round 

neck and standard white finish or as indicated. Sliding radial blade dampers are not 

acceptable. Provide surface mount for SAD-3. 

3. Supply Air Register – SAR: Provide Titus Model 300FL series, or approved equal. 

Register shall be louvered, aluminum, surface mounted, 3/4-inch louver spacing, 

adjustable deflection angle, double deflection with front blades parallel to long dimension 

and in sizes and capacities as indicated. Provide opposed blade damper Titus AG-95 or 

approved equal and standard white finish or as indicated. 

4. Return, Transfer and Exhaust Air Register – TAR, EAR, and RAR: Provide Titus Model 

350FL series, or approved equal. Register shall be louvered, aluminum, surface 

mounted, 3/4-inch louver spacing, 35 degree fixed deflection angle with blades parallel to 

long dimension and in sizes and capacities as indicated. Provide opposed blade damper 

and standard white finish or as indicated. 

5. Provide sponge rubber under all flanges. 

6. Contractor shall coordinate finish of all air devices with the Architect. 

2.2 DUCTWORK MATERIALS 

A. All ductwork shall be galvanized metal installed of gauges and with bracing and joints all in 

accordance with latest edition of ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA Duct Construction 

Standards. 

B. For air conditioning and general ventilation systems, the thickness of the sheetmetal and size 

and spacing of the stiffeners used shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest 

edition of the ASHRAE Guide and Data Book and SMACNA HVAC Metal Duct Standard, 

+2-inch W.G. static pressure class. Connections to plenum shall be airtight. All ducts shall 

be sealed to Seal Class A requirements. No polysulfide sealant shall be used. Polyurethane 

sealant is acceptable. Branch take-off connections shall be made with 45 degree angle takeoff. 




C. Plenums shall be braced with 1-1/2-inch x 1-1/2-inch x 1/8-inch angles. Hangers shall be one 

inch x 18 gauge or as required by SMACNA. Brace ducts in accordance with SMACNA 

recommendations for seismic loads. 

D. Flexible Duct: Fiberglass insulated, flexible duct with fiberglass reinforced metallized film 

vapor barrier, coated spring steel wire helix and woven inner liner, UL listed under UL 

Standard 181, Class 1 flexible and complying with NFPA 90A and 90B. Length of flexible 

duct to air devices shall not exceed 8 feet. Flexible ducts only allowed for connecting rigid 

duct to air devices or VAV boxes and for plenums of the air devices. Thermal Flex Model 

MKE for low pressure ductwork systems (i.e. downstream of VAV boxes) and Model MKC 

for medium pressure ductwork systems (i.e. upstream of VAV boxes), Castco or approved 

equal. 

E. Provide duct access panels in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and 

NFPA 90A and 96. 

2.3 DUCT INSULATION 

A. See Section 230700 HVAC INSULATION for requirements of duct insulation. 

2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS 

A. Volume dampers shall be installed where shown and as required for air balancing. Dampers 

shall be two gages heavier than the duct in which they are installed and shall be reinforced to 

prevent vibration and noise. Provide locking quadrants with hat-channel or standouts for 

exterior insulated ductwork. Unless otherwise indicated, all volume dampers in ductwork 10 

inches or greater, in either width or height, shall be opposed blade type. Provide Ruskin, 

Pottorff or approved equal. 

B. Balancing Dampers: Balancing dampers for branches and mains shall be equipped with 

Young Regulator No. 1, Dura Dyne or approved equal. 

C. Concealed Operators: Where damper operators must be placed in remote or concealed 

locations, provide Young Regulator No. 914, Dura Dyne or approved equal, miter gear 

operator with Young Regulator No. 315, Dura Dyne or approved equal, concealed regulator 

with flush mount, chrome plated, adjustable access cover. 

D. Backdraft Dampers: Backdraft dampers shall be adjustable, counterbalanced type, heavy 

duty extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125-inch wall thickness frame, minimum 0.070-inch 

wall thickness blades with vinyl edge seals, maximum allowed spot velocity of 3500 fpm and 

maximum air temperature of 200 degrees 1. Provide front flange. Provide Ruskin CBD6, 

Pottorff or approved equal. 

E. Automatic control dampers shall be as specified in Section 230923 DIRECT DIGITAL 

CONTROL SYSTEMS. 

2.5 ACCESS PANELS 

A. Furnish access panels for dampers, coils, fans, and filters, where indicated of size shown or 

necessary. Access panels in fire rated ceiling assemblies or walls shall be rated equal to or 

greater than the assembly in which it is installed. 

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS FOR DUCTWORK 




A. At ducts to equipment, provide vent-fabric flexible connections with a minimum of 9-inch 

full length. 

2.7 SPECIAL WIRING 

A. All factory assembled, package type equipment shall be provided with integral control panel 

to which all motors in each unit shall be factory wired. Control panel shall contain all relays, 

starters, and other control devices, all arranged so as to be accessible for maintenance, testing, 

and inspection. Control panel on each unit shall contain control transformer installed so that 

all control circuits extending to remote control devices, thermostats, etc., will be 120 volts 

maximum. 

B. Any wiring not shown and required for air conditioning to properly connect equipment, 

including connections to special safety control or apparatus not shown, shall be included 

under this Section. All control wiring shall meet the requirements of the NEC and be 

installed in metal conduit. 

2.8 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR 

A. Provide in accordance with Section 230923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS. 




trades. Work conflicts shall be brought to attention of Contracting Officer and work 

rearranged or modified in accordance with his decision. 






proceed with work only upon written authority of the Contracting Officer. 













C. Provide controls as indicated for proper operation of the equipment. Provide all necessary 

relays, contactors, enclosures and transformers to ensure proper system operation. 


A. Ductwork: 

1. Fabricate all ductwork and related work to highest industry standards and 

recommendations of ASHRAE and SMACNA. Provide all necessary supplementary 

steel structure supports, purlins or brackets to support duct properly from structure. 

Provide seismic restraints as required by the UBC adopted by the City and County of 

Honolulu. 

2. Sides of ductwork shall be cross broken. Long seams shall be Pittsburgh lock groove, 

hammered flat or double seamed. Ducts shall also have supplemental stiffening as 

required to prevent drumming and to provide structurally sound assembly. 

3. Center line radius of curves, bends, offsets for branch and connections shall be equal to 

1-1/4 times duct width or larger. Duct turns in all square elbows shall be accomplished 

by using prefabricated turning vanes such as Tuttle & Bailey “Ducturn” or other 

approved equal. Double thickness turning vanes in ducts deeper than 16 inches may be 

used in lieu of “Ducturn” provided prior approval of design is given by the Contracting 

Officer. 

4. Volume and splitter dampers shall be installed where required and shall be provided with 

extension rods for adjusting and locking. Dampers shall be made of not lighter than 18 

gauge steel for dimensions up to 10 inches, and multi-louvered, opposed blade type on 

ducts over 10 inches high. All dampers shall have Young Regulator No. 401 locking 

quadrants. 

5. Paint inside of all supply, return, exhaust and transfer air ducts with one (1) coat of flat 

black paint wherever duct is visible through register or grille opening. 

6. Ducts passing through outside walls shall be suitably and properly flashed and 

counterflashed to prevent leaks. 

3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT 

A. Refer to drawings for type of construction from which equipment is to be supported. 

Structural metal supports shall be provided as indicated. 

3.6 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Provide hangers, clamps, supplementary steel, etc., as required for proper support of all 

piping. 

B. Supports shall secure ducts in place, shall prevent vibration, sway, provide for expansion and 

contraction, and shall make neat appearance. 

C. Design supports of strength and rigidity to suit loading, service, and in a manner which will 

not stress unduly the building construction. 

D. Where support is from concrete construction, take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate 

waterproofing. 

E. Provide seismic restraints as specified in Section 220548 MECHANICAL SOUND, 


3.7 PAINTING AND IDENTIFYING OF DUCTWORK 

A. General: 




1. The following items furnished under this section are to be painted and identified under 

Section 090000 PAINTING. Do not paint over name plates or other identifying labels. 

a. Exposed ducts and insulated ducts. 

b. Exposed duct hangers and supports. 

2. Paint exposed black iron work including duct, fittings, structural steel members used for 

equipment, and other supports, hangers, etc., with two coats of zinc rich paint. 

3.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 

A. Test, adjust and balance each piece of equipment as required to assure proper operation. 

Testing, adjusting and balancing is specified in Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, 

AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. 

3.9 CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS 

A. After completion of the installation, perform final calibrations and adjustments of the 

equipment provided under this contract and supply services incidental to the proper 

performance of the unit control panels under warranty. 





SECTION 237323 - AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section covers the furnishing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the air 

conditioning and ventilation system complete, including but not limited to the following: 

1. Air handling units 

2. Variable frequency drive 

3. Operation and maintenance instructions and manuals 

4. Manufacturer's literature, shop drawings and record drawings 

5. Inspection, test and guarantee 





B. Painting work specified in Division 09 FINISHES. 


D. Seismic restraints for Air Conditioning and Ventilation ductwork, piping and equipment 

specified in Section 220548 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC 

CONTROL. 

E. Ductwork and accessories specified in Section 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES. 

F. Air conditioning and ventilation system controls specified in Section 230923 DIRECT- 

DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. 

G. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air and chilled water systems specified in Section 230593 

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. 





locations and installation including but not limited to the following (Note: The shop drawing 

of the following items can be combined with the shop drawing for the ductwork shop 

drawings in Section 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES): 


2. Electrical and electronic control wiring diagrams for packaged equipment 



2. Electrical controls including variable frequency drives and starters 

D. Schedules: 

1. Schedule of equipment listing name and addresses of manufacturers; manufacturer's local 


CT Scanner Expansion & Central Plant Modifications 237323-1 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT

supplier's name, address and phone number; catalog numbers and trade names in 

accordance with paragraph 1.05.B of Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIREMENTS. 

2. Maintenance service contract and schedule 

E. Reports: Testing, adjusting and balancing of air and chilled water systems specified in 

Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. 





a. Air handling units per ARI Standards 430 and 410 

b. Variable frequency drives 

2. Submit certificates of qualifications for manufacturers representatives: None. 



H. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manuals in accordance with Section 230300 


I. Guarantee and Certificate: Submit one year guarantee and certificate in accordance with 




A. Air conditioning and ventilation equipment to be considered for bid purposes shall be from a 

manufacturer that has locally stocked spare parts, representation, and support of a factory 

authorized service organization within 500 miles of the site of installation and has serviced 

manufacturer's units of comparable type, size and capacity as those specified herein. The 

manufacturer must have other units of comparable type, size and capacity installed and 

operating satisfactorily in the State of Hawaii for a minimum of two (2) years prior to bid 

opening. 

2.2 INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) 

A. General: Provide factory-assembled central station air handler. Unit shall consist of a fan and 

coil section with factory-installed chilled water section, filter section and mixing box. Coils 

shall comply with ARI Standard 410. 

B. Unit Cabinet: Formed double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to 

internal parts and components, with joints between sections gasketed. Outside and inside 

casing shall be 18 gauge, G90 galvanized steel. Access panels shall be same materials and 

finishes as cabinet, complete with threaded bolted fasteners, and gaskets. Inspection and 

access panels shall be sized and located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections. 

Provide access panels for the fan section and filter section. Provide inspection panel for the 

coil section. 

C. Insulation: Unit shall have double-wall finish shall have insulation between the inner and 

outer panels. Insulation shall be comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Insulation shall be 

fiber glass, 1 inch thick, 3 pounds per cubic foot, thermal conductivity of 0.26 at 75 deg F 



mean temperature, maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50, 

when tested according to ASTM C 411. 

D. Condensate Drain Pan: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet complying with requirements 

in ASHRAE 62. Fabricate pans with slopes in two planes to collect condensate from cooling 

coils (including coil piping connections and return bends) when units are operating at 

maximum catalogued face velocity across cooling coil. Drain pan shall be double-wall 

construction; fill space between walls with 1 inch, 1 ½ pound density fiber glass insulation. 

Drain pan shall have main and auxiliary connections on the same side of fan. 

E. Fan Section: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, 

motor drive assembly, and support structure and equipped with formed-steel channel base for 

integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount fan with interior spring vibration 

isolation. Centrifugal fan housings shall be formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make 

curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access panels or doors to 

allow entry to internal parts and components. Drive Frame shall be rail mounted, heavy 

gauge steel to allow frame to slide for easy belt tensioning. The fan assembly shall be 

statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated 

fan speed and motor horsepower. Forward-curved fan wheels shall be galvanized-steel 

construction with inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved 

forward in direction of airflow and mechanically secured to flange and backplate. Fan shaft 

shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at 

maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment 

made after installation, turned, ground, and polished stainless steel with keyway. Prelubricated 

and sealed shaft bearings, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings, ABMA 9, 

L10 life of 100,000 hours. Belt drive shall be factory mounted, with final alignment and belt 

adjustment made after installation and with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor. Mechanical 

cast iron sheave with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 

F. Coils: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized-steel casings for cooling coils. Design 

and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to ensure full 

airflow through coils. Coil shall be continuous circuit coil fabricated according to ARI 410 

or self-draining coil fabricated according to ARI 410. Coils shall be copper, 0.016 inch tube 

thickness with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes, seamless copper tube 

headers with brazed joints, galvanized-steel channel frame, design tested and rated according 

to ARI 410, working pressure rating of 250 psig, 300 deg F. Coils shall be drainable and 

headers shall have drain and vent connections 

G. Filter Sections: Unit shall include MERV 7 filters. Filters shall be included in the units as an 

integral part of the cabinet with easy access provided by the manufacturer. 

H. Damper Sections: Mixing boxes shall include low leak damper assemblies constructed of 

welded steel channel frames with galvanized steel blades, die formed stiffeners and full blade 

stop. The dampers shall include stainless steel side seals and vinyl blade seals to reduce 

leakage. All hardware shall be zinc plated with brass pivot points and bronze oilite bearings. 

Shafts shall be corrosion resistant steel. Mixing box shall be fully insulated with 

manufacturer's standard insulation. 

I. Motor: Fan motor shall be inverter duty, 1725 rpm, open drip-proof construction. Fan 

motors are to be bolted to an adjustable platform to facilitate belt tension and alignment. 

Motors shall be NEMA B, T-frame design. Drive shall be of the V-belt type with variable 

pitch motor sheaves. The blower sheave shall be cast iron single groove with split tapered 

bushing that is keyed to the blower shaft. 



J. Corrosion Protection: Provide corrosion protection coating on coil and casing as specified. 

2.3 MOTORS 

A. Provide premium efficiency type motors designed for the supply voltages made available for 

this portion of the work, and with the following attributes: 

1. Sized to develop the required brake horsepower and to operate satisfactorily with a 

voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent; 

2. Conforming to NEMA motor standards; 

3. Dynamically balanced, and held to commercial tolerance; 

4. Selected so that, when ambient temperature reaches 120 degrees F for a period of two 

hours or more, the motor will operate satisfactorily without failure. 

5. With squirrel-cage type drip-proof enclosure, unless otherwise indicated, constant speed, 

across-the-line normal starting torque designed for quiet operation; 

6. Each motor of ample size to operate its unit at proper full load and speed continuously, 

without heating in any part more than 40 degrees C above the temperature of the 

surrounding atmosphere. 

7. Where TEFC motors are indicated or specified, the cast iron frame type shall be 

provided. 

B. Where motor is used with V-belt drive, equip with a sliding base and belt guard, and motor 

sheave. 

C. Furnish motor starters for all equipment with electrical motors furnished under this Section. 

Unless factory installed, installation of starters and power wiring shall be provided by 

Division 26 ELECTRICAL. 

2.4 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 

A. NEMA ICS1 and NEMA ICS2. All controllers shall have thermal overload protection in 

each phase. Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor windings 

and be of the thermal inverse-time-limit type. 

B. Provide full voltage, magnetic-type motor controllers with under voltage release and 

maintained contact push-button stations or switches. Provide each controller with a hand-offautomatic 

selector switch. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the 

normal automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the 

"hand" position. All safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high 

temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor 

control circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections 

to any hand-off-automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control 

device shall be made in accordance with an indicated, or a manufacturer's approved, wiring 

diagram. 

C. For each motor not in sight of the controller, provide a controller disconnecting means 

capable of being locked in the open position or a manually operated, nonfused switch in sight 

of the motor. 

D. Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1 for indoor locations and NEMA Type 4X, non-metallic 

for outdoor locations. 

E. Provide each with a "hand-off-auto" switch, overload reset button, and indicating lights 

mounted on the hinged front cover with door interlock and manual defeater mechanism. 

Provide indicating lights (green for "Running" and red for "Overload"), phase failure and 



eversal relay, auxiliary contacts for contactors (1-N.O. and 1-N.C. unless noted otherwise), 

engraved plastic nameplates ("AHU-A1, B1, C1, C2 and E1", etc.), control transformer, and 

fuses. 

2.5 SPECIAL WIRING 

A. All factory assembled, package type equipment shall be provided with integral control panel 

to which all motors in each unit shall be factory wired. Control panel shall contain all relays, 

starters, and other control devices, all arranged so as to be accessible for maintenance, testing, 

and inspection. Control panel on each unit shall contain control transformer installed so that 

all control circuits extending to remote control devices, thermostats, etc., will be 120 volts 

maximum. 

B. Any wiring not shown and required for air conditioning to properly connect equipment, 

including connections to special safety control or apparatus not shown, shall be included 

under this Section. Unless otherwise indicated, all control wiring for control power and for 

air conditioning control communication shall meet the requirements of the NEC and be 

installed in metal conduit. 

2.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 

A. Variable frequency drive (VFD) shall consist of solid-state adjustable frequency controller 

(AFC) and performance-matched energy efficient motor matched by the controller 

manufacturer and matched to the requirements of the specified pumps and air handling units. 

Provide all accessories for a completely operational system to meet the requirements and 

sequence of operation specified herein. Provide Magnetek/Yaskawa, Danfoss or approved 

equal. 

B. The Adjustable Frequency Controller (AFC) shall be a fully digital Pulse Width Modulator 

(PWM) using very large scale integration techniques as well as surface-mount technology for 

increased reliability. The AFC shall use a 16-bit micro-processor with a 12-bit resolution to 

allow stepless motor control from 1% to 110% of maximum motor base speed. 

1. All programmable settings shall be held in non-volatile memory and shall not be affected 

by power outages, brown-outs, power dips, etc. The AFC shall have initial 

programmable settings intact from the factory without the need for battery backup. The 

AFC shall not need to be programmed at the job site prior to running the motor but shall 

be ready to run a motor as soon as power connections are made. 

2. Programming at the job site to accommodate specific local application requirements such 

as frequency avoidance and preset speeds shall be available to the user. Complete motor 

and drive package efficiency versus load and speed shall be submitted prior to purchase 

and coordinated with the requirements of the pumps and air handling units. 

3. All high voltage components within the enclosure shall be isolated with steel or 

polycarbonate covers. 

4. The AFC and options shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. The AFC and options shall 

comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE and the 

National Electric Code. 

5. The AFC shall be functionally tested under motor load and then cycled. This assures that 

if the AFC is started up according to the instruction manual provided, the unit will run 

reliable. 

6. The AFC shall have the following features: 

a. Remote start-stop. 

b. Speed selection. 

c. Timed acceleration and deceleration. 

d. Current limit and voltage limit. 



e. 6-66 Hz controlled speed range. 

7. The AFC shall include the following features: 

a. Operators control shall be mounted on the door of the wall mounted steel cabinet 

and consist of a membrane command center which allows manual stop/start, speed 

control, local/remote status indication, manual or automatic speed control selection, 

run/jog selection and forward reverse selection. In addition, the command center 

will serve as a means to configure controller parameters such as minimum speed, 

maximum speed, acceleration and deceleration times, volts/hertz ratio, torque 

boost, slip compensation, over frequency limit, frequency agreement, current limit, 

and job frequency. Potentiometers will not be allowed for these settings. The 

controller shall have an internal means of deactivating keypad parameter 

adjustments to eliminate unauthorized data entry. A slip compensation circuit for 

accurate 1% speed regulation without the need of a tachometer. 

b. Adjustable D-C braking that is programmable from the command center adjustable 

in both amplitude and duration. 

c. An electronic overload circuit designed to protect an A-C motor operated by the 

AFC output from extended overload operation on an inverse time basis. 

d. Automatic and manual torque boosts that are adjustable within the control to 

accelerate hard-to-start applications. 

e. An LED display mounted on the door of the cabinet that digitally indicates: 

(1) Frequency output 

(2) Voltage output 

(3) Current output 

(4) First fault indication 

f. The capability of starting into a rotating load without the need of a time delay upon 

a start command. 

g. Relay contacts for remote indication of drive fault and motor running for 

interwiring to another device. 

h. An automatic restart circuit which is adjustable by number of restart attempts and 

the interval between restarts. 

i. Three critical frequency avoidance bands, which can be programmed in the field, 

enable the controller to avoid resonate frequencies of the driven equipment. Each 

critical frequency avoidance band shall have a band width adjustable via keypad 

entry of up to 10 Hertz. 

j. Three programmable preset speeds which will force the AFC to preset speed upon 

a user contact closure. This feature shall be set digitally by entering data via the 

door mounted membrane command center. 

k. The AFC shall have the capability to ride through power dips up to 500 msec 

without a controller trip depending on load and operating conditions. 

l. Multiple volts/hertz patterns adjustable in one hertz increments from 30 hertz to 

maximum hertz for maximum flexibility and control. 

m. Jog speed selection. 

n. Two frequency agreement speeds adjustable in the field and interconnected to onboard 

dry relay contacts. 

o. An isolated electrical following capability and control interface shall enable the 

AFC to follow a 0-20 Ma, 4-20 Ma, 0-4 volt, 0-8 volt, or 0-10 volt DC grounded or 

ungrounded speed signal from an external source. In addition, the drive shall be 

able to follow a pulse train speed signal input. 

p. For smooth acceleration and deceleration capabilities, the drive shall have a preprogrammed 

ramp curve which can be activated locally. 

q. Two auxiliary selectable contacts (DPDT) which can be activated by two of the 

following with the actual setpoint adjustable: 

(1) Zero speed. 



(2) Reverse rotation. 

(3) Output current. 

(4) Output speed. 

(5) Run. 

(6) Line dip in excess of 15 msec. 

8. The AFC shall include the following protective circuits and features: 

a. Instantaneous Electronic Trip for the following faults: 

(1) Motor current exceeds 150% for longer than one minute of controller 

maximum sine wave current rating. 

(2) Output phase-to-phase short circuit condition. 

(3) Total ground fault under any operating condition. 

(4) High input line voltage. 

(5) Low input line voltage. 

(6) Loss of input phase. 

(7) External fault. (This protective circuit shall permit wiring of remote 

normally close safety contact to shut down the drive.) 

b. DV/DT and DI/DT protection for semiconductors. 

c. All live power equipment shall be covered by protective shields to ensure the safety 

of operating personnel. 

d. Metal oxide varistors. 

9. The AFC shall have the following separate adjustments available: 

a. Maximum frequency - 66 Hz. 

b. Minimum frequency - 0 to 5 Hz. 

c. Acceleration - 0.1 to 360 seconds standard. 

d. Deceleration - 0.1 to 360 seconds as standard. 

e. Volts/Hertz - Programmable. 

f. Maximum load - 150% for one minute. 

g. Current limit: 50% to 150% of sine wave current rating. 

h. Regulation Frequency Stability Long Term - "0.01% of base speed. 

i. Slip Compensation - 1/2 to 1% speed regulation. 

10. The AFC shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service 

conditions: 

a. Elevation: to 3,300 feet without derating. 

b. Ambient Operating Temperature Range: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C. 

c. Atmosphere: Non-condensing relative humidity to 95%. 

d. A-C Line Voltage Variation: -5% to +10%. 

e. A-C Line Frequency Variation: "2 Hz. 

C. The energy efficient motor shall utilize premium materials and optimized design for energy 

efficient performance and minimum losses on adjustable frequency power. Motors shall have 

the following electrical design features: 

1. Full Class F, non-hygroscopic insulation system evaluated in accordance with IEEE-117 

classification tests. 

2. Motors shall be rated with a minimum 1.15 service factor on sine wave power and 

electrical design shall not exceed the insulation allowable temperature rise at 1.0 service 

factor on adjustable frequency power. 

3. Motor windings shall be of copper. 

4. Motor rotor construction shall be die cast aluminum or fabricated copper or their 

respective alloys. Rotor on frames 213T and above shall be keyed to shaft and rotating 

assembly dynamically balanced to NEMA limits per MG1-12.05. Balance weights, if 

required, shall be secured to the rotor resistance ring or fan blades by rivets. Machine 

screws and nuts are prohibited. 

5. The motor shall use an open bearing (non-shielded) positive lubrication system. The 

design of this positive lubrication system shall minimize contaminant entry into bearings 



and protect against over lubrication and corrosion and grease migration into motor. 

6. All mounting hardware shall be hex head, high strength, SAE Grade 5, zinc plated for 

corrosion protection. Screwdriver slot fasteners are prohibited. 

7. TEFC motors with external cooling fans shall have fan covers with openings meeting the 

"guarded" definition of NEMA. 

8. TEFC motors shall have provision for drainage of condensation at low points of the 

enclosure. 

9. Each completed and assembled motor shall receive a routine factory test per NEMA 

standards. Test shall include winding resistance, no load current and power, highpotential 

test and mechanical vibration check. 

D. Manual Bypass Transfer Switch: 

1. Provide a full voltage, 3 contactor, motor transfer switch to directly switch the motor 

between the AFC output and the incoming power line. This switch is mechanically 

interlocked between the AFC and the Bypass modes of operation. It is a motor 

horsepower rated switch which is UL listed as a manual motor starter without the 

requirement for a separate magnetic bypass motor starter. 

2. Provide a main incoming disconnect circuit breaker (MCB) with a through-the-door 

handle, which is interlocked with the bypass cabinet door. This thermal magnetic circuit 

breaker will provide short circuit protection for motor while operating in the Bypass 

mode in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). 

Provide complete with the through-the-door handle to meet the National Electrical Code 

requirements for a lockable means of disconnect. This disconnect will remove all power 

from both control cabinets and the motor in all operating modes. 

3. To meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code for motor thermal or current 

protection, a thermal overload relay (OL), sized for the motor nameplate full load amps 

(FLA) or the AFC “Sine Wave Amp” rating, whichever is lower, shall be provided. 

4. Provide a complete manual bypass switch and AFC shall be mounted in a common 

cabinet within the MCC, NEMA 1, ventilated with 3% input line reactors and 

appurtenances. 

E. Provide 3% integral AC input line reactors sized and selected by the VFD manufacturers. 

For drives without an input line reactor, provide a separate, external 3% AC input line 

reactor. 

F. VFD Interface: Provide VFD interface to allow communication between the VFD and the 

new DDC system. Interface shall allow output of all VFD displays and diagnostics to the 

DDC system. 

1. VFD Translator/BACnet: Provide a communications system that will allow a BACnetbased 

Direct Digital Control (DDC) system to access each VFD’s microprocessor/control 

panel’s arrray of point information without installing any duplicate sensors. 

2. The BACnet translator will communicate to the DDC system bi-directionally, utilizing 

standard ASHRAE BACnet Protocol, and will allow full monitoring and reset control of 

the chillers by the BACnet DDC system. 

3. The VFD manufacturer is to provide all devices and accessories as necessary to 

accomplish this interface, such as complete list of all available points, all BACnet 

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) files, any necessary software, 

all necessary passwords, labor as needed, and all interface hardware as necessary for 

complete and operational connection to the BACnet DDC System. 


A. Provide vibration isolation in accordance with Section 220548 MECHANICAL SOUND, 




2.8 CORROSION PROTECTION 

A. Provide corrosion protection coating of the air handling unit cabinet and cooling coil. 

B. The coil shall be protected with a polyurethane aluminum based, metal impregnated coating. 

The coating product shall be performed by an applicator qualified by the coating 

manufacturer to apply the product. Prior to coating, the coil shall be rinsed using a high 

pressure warm water spray. Any bent fins shall be properly adjusted. The coil shall then be 

degreased with a pH neutral detergent and rinsed with a high pressure warm water spray. 

Ensure the coil is completely dry prior to coating. A chromate free conversion layer shall be 

applied, achieving total coverage and penetration. The coil shall be completely dry prior to 

the next step. A metal impregnated polyurethane topcoat shall be applied. Ensure total 

penetration and coverage without bridging. The total DFT of the topcoat shall be 20 to 25 

microns or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. The coating shall provide 

protection against ultraviolet radiation and shall be temperature resistant to 365 degrees F. 

The coating shall be documented to a minimum of 3,000 hours in both ASTM B117 salt 

spray test and ASTM B287 acetic salt spray test. The coating manufacturer shall provide a 3 

year warranty. Blygold, Thermoguard FInguard or approved equal. 

C. The cabinet and exterior surfaces shall be coated with Ameron PSX 700 Engineered 

Siloxane, Thermoguard Casing Guard or approved equal. Metal preparation shall include 

degreasing and etching. The coating shall be applied to all exterior surfaces until a total DFT 

of 6-8 mils. Coating shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. After the coating has cured, the equipment shall be assembled using care 

not to damage the coating during assembly. Fasteners shall be stainless steel with bonderized 

rubber washer. Any touch up required shall be performed in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s recommendations. 




trades. Work conflicts shall be brought to attention of Contracting Officer and work 

rearranged or modified in accordance with his decision. 






proceed with work only upon written authority of the Engineer. 






C. Provide controls as indicated for proper operation of the equipment. Provide all necessary 



elays, contactors, enclosures and transformers to ensure proper system operation. 



3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 

A. Label air handling units, fans, vav boxes, and other equipment as specified in Section 230300 




operation, inspection, repair and maintenance. If these items are concealed behind walls or 

ceilings of non-removable type construction, provide access panels of proper size for easy access 

at no additional cost to the State. 


A. Ductwork: See Section 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES for interconnecting ductwork to 

air handling equipment. 

B. Piping: See Section 232113 CHILLED WATER PIPING for interconnecting piping to air 

handling equipment. 

3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT 

A. Refer to drawings for type of construction from which equipment is to be supported. 

Structural metal supports shall be provided as indicated. 


A. Provide vibration isolation as specified in Section 220548 MECHANICAL SOUND, 



A. Pipes shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign matter. Equipment 

shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. Temporary 

filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction and after all 

construction dirt has been removed, new filters shall be installed. Bearings shall be properly 

lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened 

to proper tension. All valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall 

be adjusted to setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by 

the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. 

3.9 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 

A. Test, adjust and balance each piece of equipment as required to assure proper operation. See 

Section 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC for further 

requirements. 

3.10 CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS 

A. After completion of the installation, perform final calibrations and adjustments of the 

equipment provided under this contract and supply services incidental to the proper 

performance of the unit control panels under warranty. 



3.11 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE 

A. Upon completion of the calibration, Contractor shall start-up the air conditioning system and 

perform all necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper operation. Contractor 

shall be responsible for generating all software and entering all database necessary to perform 

the sequence of control and specified software routines. An acceptance test in the presence of 

the Engineer shall be performed. 

B. Provide operational acceptance tests. The tests shall be performed during a normal day of 

operation after the air conditioning system has been completely installed and made operable. 

Results of the tests shall be indicated on the Operational Performance Test form attached and 

shall be part of the submittal for the testing and balancing report. 

3.12 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Furnish approved operation instructions for each principal item of equipment for the use of 

the operation and maintenance personnel. The operation instructions shall include wiring 

diagrams, control diagrams and control sequence for each principal item of equipment. 

Operating instruction shall be printed or engraved and shall be framed under glass or in 

approved laminated plastic and posted where directed by the Engineer. Operating instruction 

shall be attached to or posted adjacent to each principal item of equipment including start-up, 

procedure in the event of equipment failure and other items of instruction as recommended by 

the manufacturer of each item of equipment. Operating instructions exposed to the weather 

shall be made of weather-resistant materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be weather 

protected. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be 

secured to prevent easy removal or peeling. 

3.13 FIELD INSTRUCTION 

A. See requirements in Section 230300 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for 

field instruction of air conditioning and ventilation system. Upon completion of the work and 

at a time designated, the services of one or more qualified personnel shall be provided by the 

Contractor for a period of not less than eight (8) hours to instruct the representatives of the 

State in the operation and maintenance of the air conditioning system. These field 

instructions shall cover all the items contained in the bound instructions. 



REQUIREMENTS. 


A. Provide hard bound copies of the Operating and Maintenance Manual on all equipment and 

the system as a whole. Provide manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section 


3.16 SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE SERVICE 


REQUIREMENTS. 




SECTION 260500 - ELECTRICAL WORK 


1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. Provide complete electric power and lighting system and signal systems for this project. Work 

shall include: 

1. Complete service equipment and feeder distribution system. 

2. Complete lighting and receptacle system. 

3. Empty raceways with pullstrings, pullboxes, and outlets for Telephone/Data, Nurse Call 

and CATV Systems. 

4. Connection of equipment and appliances including but not limited to headwall systems, 

mechanical equipment and other equipment furnished by the Hospital. 

5. Complete Fire Alarm System. 

6. Demolition work as required. 

7. Phasing work as required. 

8. Obtain and pay for electrical permits. 

9. Maintain at project site a copy of Drawings to record daily any additions or changes. After 

final inspection two (2) copies of "as-built" drawings shall be prepared from the site copy 

and turned over to the Architect. This is mandatory. 

10. Test complete installation. 

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTION 

A. Mechanical equipment is specified in DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING AND DIVISION 23 – 

HVAC. 

1.3 WORK BY OTHERS 

A. Telephone instruments, equipment, cables and other accessories by Hospital. 

B. Nurse call equipment, cables and other accessories by Hospital. 

C. Data equipment, cables and other accessories by Hospital. 

D. CATV equipment, cables and other accessories by Hospital. 

1.4 RULES AND REGULATIONS 

A. Comply with local ordinances; National Electrical Code; National Electrical Safety Code; 

applicable regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters; specifications of ANSI, 

NEMA, EEI, and IPCEA; and regulations of the Building Department, Maui County. 

B. Contractor to obtain and pay for the electrical permit as required by local rules and regulations. 

He shall arrange for periodic inspection by the local authorities as work progresses so that 

certificates of completion and inspection may be turned over to the Architect. 

1.5 DRAWINGS 

A. Specifications are accompanied by architectural plans of building, site plans and diagrammatic 

electrical plans showing locations of outlets, fixtures, switches, service runs, feeder runs, 

devices, and other electrical equipment. Locations are approximate and before installing, 



ELECTRICAL WORK

Contractor shall study adjacent construction details and make installation in most logical 

manner. Any device may be relocated with 10'-0" before installation at direction of Architect 

without additional charge to Hospital. 

B. Before installing, verify all dimensions and sizes of equipment at job site. Circuit and conduit 

routing is typical and may be altered in any logical manner; however, all changes shall be 

approved by Architect and shown on "as-built" drawings. 


A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 

B. Submit for approval shop drawings or catalog cuts of following equipment and resubmit until 

approval is received before placing order: 

1. Light fixtures, ballasts and lamps. 

2. Panelboard, relays, circuit breakers, safety switches, time switch and contactors. 

3. Any built-to-order equipment. 

C. Shop drawings and catalog cuts for substitute materials shall clearly specify compliance with 

and/or deviation from specified material. Approval of shop drawings and catalog cuts shall not 

release Contractor from complying with intent of specifications and drawings. Any deviations 

from approved shop drawings shall have prior approval by the Architect. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: 

1. Materials and equipment shall be new and those listed by Underwriters' Laboratories shall 

bear "UL" label of approval. Brand names, manufacturer's names and catalog numbers 

indicate standards of design and quality required. Substitute materials may be used if 

qualified by written permission from Architect. 

2. List of substitute materials together with qualifying data shall be submitted for approval as 

provided in the SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Failure to obtain approval of substitute materials 

prior to bidding shall mean that materials as specified shall be provided. 

3. Qualifying data shall include cuts, shop drawings, samples if requested by the Architect and 

specifications to show equality with material specified herein and in drawings. 

B. Wiring: 

1. Rigid steel, zinc-coated, 3/4 inch minimum diameter, except as noted. Other sizes to 

conform to NEC requirements, based on RHW Wires. 

2. Electrical metallic tubing, 3/4 inch minimum, galvanized. 

3. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Steel conduit, zinc coated inside and outside with additional 

silicone epoxy-ester lubricating coating inside; 3/4 inches minimum diameter. 

4. Flexible conduit - galvanized with high density plastic jacket. 

5. Surface Raceway: At the Wyland Building, surface raceway shall be Wiremold 5400 series 



ELECTRICAL WORK

with all accessories and fittings as required. All other locations shall utilize Wiremold 

2400 series with all accessories and fittings as required. 

C. Gutters, pullboxes, enclosures and cabinets for panelboards, breakers, and switches unless 

otherwise specified shall be NEMA 1 for interior locations and NEMA 4X stainless steel for 

exterior locations exposed to weather. Fabricate from code gauge galvanized steel, prime 

painted, and enamel finished according to NEMA specifications. 

D. Cabinets shall be fabricated from galvanized NEC gauge steel with hinged door and latch, 

finished to match panelboards, and with 3/4" treated plywood backing inside. Locks shall be 

keyed to panelboard locks. 

E. Outlet Boxes: 

1. Concealed boxes shall be pressed from NEC gauge steel, galvanized 4" square x 1- 1/2" 

deep minimum. 

2. Exposed boxes and weather exposed boxes recessed boxes, including lighting outlets on 

exteriors shall be galvanized cast iron or alloyed aluminum with threaded hubs for conduit 

connections. Aluminum boxes shall be prime painted and enamel finished. 

3. Extension or raised rings for pressed boxes pressed from NEC gauge steel and galvanized. 

F. Wires: 

1. Conductors shall be copper, 600 volts, No. 12 AWG minimum. Conductors No. 10 and 

smaller, solid and round. Conductors No. 8 and larger, 7 or 19 strands, concentric. All 

conductors No. 6 and smaller shall be NEC Type TW and THW. All conductors No. 4 and 

larger shall be NEC Type RHW or THW. Wiring fixtures and fixture wiring channels shall 

be NEC type RHH or THHN. Exterior underground conductor shall be Type RHW-USE or 

cross-linked polyethylene, Style USE. 

2. Color Code: 

Black--Phase "A", red--Phase "B", blue--Phase "C", white--neutral, green--ground. 

G. Devices: 

1. Switches: Single or double pole, 3 or 4 way as required, non-mercury quiet, 20 amperes, 

120-277 volts, UL Labeled AC type, tumbler switch with endurance or 10,000 makebreaks. 

Leviton Decora 562X-2 Series. Electronic dimming switches shall be slide type 

with presets and compatible with electronic dimming ballast. Coordinate color with 

Architect prior to ordering. Wall occupancy sensors shall be Wattstopper DW-100 or 

approved equal. Ceiling occupancy sensors shall be Wattstopper DT-300 series or 

approved equal. Contractor to provide power packs and wiring as required. Contractor to 

program occupancy sensors to suit the requirements of the Hospital. 

2. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Duplex, 20 ampere, 125 volts, side wired, 3 wires, 

grounding type in plastic body. Leviton Decora 16352-X series. Coordinate color with 

Architect prior to ordering. GFI outlets to be similar but with indicator light and test and 

reset buttons. All receptacles on emergency circuits shall be with red with red device plate. 

Hospital grade receptacles shall be provided as indicated and/or as required by N.E.C. and 

local codes. 

3. Special Purpose Receptacles: Specification grade, size as indicated or as required. Provide 

one matching cap per receptacle. 



ELECTRICAL WORK

Equal wiring devices by General Electric Company, Hubbell, Bryant, and Sierra are 

approved. 

4. Floor Outlet: At the Wyland Building, floor outlets shall be Walker 863 Series with duplex 

cover plate with brass finish. The floor telephone/data outlets at the Wyland Building shall 

be similar. All other locations shall be Walker 880 Series with brass duplex cover plate. 

The floor telephone/data outlets shall be similar. 

H. Telephone/Data Outlet: Wall, 4-11/16" square, outlet box raised ring,yoke and plastic 

grommeted hole in plastic device plate. Provide two-gang plaster ring and two gang device 

plate. Coordinate all work with Hospital I.T. Department. 

I. Device and Cover Plates: 

1. Plate for interior flush construction shall be stainless steel. 

2. Plates for exposed and weather exposed boxes shall be cast metal for neoprene gasket for 

sealing against entry of water or moisture into box. Switch plates provided with neoprene 

cover over handle or rain-tight lever mechanism. Receptacle plates shall be provided with 

stainless steel spring-loaded gasketed weatherproof lids that allow use of receptacle when 

the lid is closed. 

J. Panelboards: Type and rating as indicated with molded plastic case circuit breaker complement. 

Enclosure shall be galvanized steel with hinged door, circuit directory with complete circuit 

assignment typed neatly. General Electric, Westinghouse, Cutler Hammer, Square D and 

Siemens. All panelboards shall come with copper busing. 

K. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be molded plastic case circuit breaker with toggle 

operated mechanism thermal-magnetic overload trips. Interchangeable trip shall be provided 

when available. Toggle positions "ON", "TRIPPED" and "OFF", engraved on body of toggle. 

Enclosed in NEMA style steel box. Boxes shall be NEMA 1 for interior locations and NEMA 

4X stainless steel for exterior locations. General Electric, Westinghouse, Square D, Siemens and 

Cutler Hammer. 

L. Disconnect Switches: Heavy duty fusible or nonfusible safety switch. Horsepower rated when 

used as motor disconnect. Contacts shall be lever operated and spring loaded. When for use 

with fuses, conventional NEC or of current limiting type, blades shall be rejection type. 

Enclosures to have provision for padlocking. Enclosed in NEMA 1 enclosure for interior 

locations and NEMA 4X stainless steel for exterior locations. General Electric, Westinghouse, 

Siemens, Cutler Hammer and Square D. 

M. Lighting: 

1. Provide light fixtures complete with necessary lamps, ballasts, starters and accessories 

according to “Luminaire Schedule”. 

2. Fluorescent Ballasts shall be Class P, ETL-CBM, UL, program start, electronic type with 

less than 10% Total Harmonic Distortion (THD). Provide Lutron “HI-LUME” electronic 

dimming ballasts when indicated. Electronic dimming switch shall be compatible with 

ballast. 

3. Fluorescent Lamps: 4100 degrees K, 32 watt T8 and 2850 lumens. 

N. Relays: Mechanically or magnetically held as required, tungsten rated silver contacts, amperes 



ELECTRICAL WORK

as noted in steel enclosure. Square D Company, Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, Westinghouse, 

General Electric or equal. 

O. Ground rods shall be copper clad, 3/4" x 8' long. 

P. Hardware, Support, Backing, Etc.: Provide all hardware, supports, backing and other 

accessories necessary to install electrical equipment. Wood materials shall be treated, iron or 

steel materials shall be galvanized for corrosion protection, and non-ferrous materials shall be 

galvanized steel. 

Q. Nurse Call System: Provide empty raceways with pullstrings and junction boxes with blank 

device plates. Coordinate conduit and junction box sizes with Hospital prior to rough-in. 

R. Fire Alarm System: Contractor shall provide all equipment, wiring, testing and programming to 

accommodate all relocation, demolition and additions to the existing Simplex 4100 fire alarm 

system. All new devices shall match existing devices at the Hospital. All work shall be 

coordinated with the Hospital and the Hospital’s Fire Alarm Equipment supplier. 


3.1 INTERIOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with local ordinances and regulations of the County. Workmanship subject to approval 

of Architect who shall be afforded every opportunity to determine skill and competency. 

Concealed work re-opened at random during formal inspection by Architect without additional 

charge to the Hospital. 

B. Construction shall conform to construction practices as recommended by American Electricians 

Handbook by Croft (latest edition), Edison Electric Institute, National Electrical Code, National 

Electrical Safety Code and applicable instruction of manufacturers of equipment and materials 

supplied for project. 

C. Raceways: 

1. Conceal all raceways unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 

2. All conduits in wet locations within building line shall be rigid steel conduits. Electric 

metallic tubing may be used in dry locations within building. Paint conduits in or under 

ground floor slabs with asphaltic corrosion resistance base paint or compound after 

installation in place. Plastic conduit may be used in buried underground locations only. Do 

not bend plastic conduit up through ground floor concrete slab. Install rigid galvanized 

steel conduit elbow to under floor plastic conduit at penetration through floor slab. 

3. Cut raceways square, and ream inner edges. Butt together evenly in couplings. 

4. Make bends and offsets with hickey or conduit bending machine. Do not use vise or pipe 

tee. Bends made so that interior cross-sectional area will not be reduced. Radius of curve 

of inner edge of field bend not less than ten times internal diameter of raceway. Use of 

running threads not permitted. Where raceways cannot be joined by standard threaded 

couplings, use approved water-tight raceway unions. 

5. Cap raceways during construction with plastic or metal-capped bushings to prevent 

entrance of dirt of moisture. Swab all raceways out and dry before wires or cables are 



ELECTRICAL WORK

pulled in. 

6. Mount raceways free from other piping, valves, or mechanical equipment. 

7. Fish wires, cords, strings, chains or the like shall not be placed or inserted in the raceway 

system during installation of the raceway. 

8. Install insulating bushings and two locknuts on each end of every run of raceway at 

enclosures and boxes. Provide grounding bushings as required to grounding receptacles 

and connect metal raceways to service ground, per NEC Article 250. 

9. Project adequate number of threads through box for bushings. 

10. Run exposed raceways parallel with, or at right angles to structural or architectural 

elements. 

11. Securely fasten conduits with galvanized pipe straps with screws or bolts. 

12. Trenching for all interior underground conduits shall be excavated to depths required to 

keep curvature of conduits below top of slab indicated on plans. Bottoms of trenches shall 

be tamped hard. Rocks, where encountered, shall be excavated to depths of 3" below 

bottom of conduit jacket and before conduit is laid, space between bottom of conduit jacket 

and rock surface shall be filled with gravel to the satisfaction of the Architect. After 

conduits have been inspected and approved by Architects and prior to backfilling, forms 

shall be removed and excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. 

Material for backfilling consist of excavated material except adobe, or borrow of sand or 

gravel, and shall be free of trash, lumber or other debris. Backfill shall be placed in 

horizontal layers, not exceeding 9" in thickness and properly moistened. Each layer shall 

be compacted to density equal to that of adjacent undisturbed material that will prevent 

excessive settlement or shrinkage. 

13. Install #10 gage galvanized steel pull wire or nylon pull line in all empty raceways. 

D. Outlet Boxes: Provide outlet boxes to suit conditions encountered. Provide outlet boxes in 

spaces with extension or raised rings of such depth that metal will be flush with surrounding 

surfaces of opening. When two or more switches are installed at single locations, mount in gang 

box under single device plate. Use gang boxes wherever 3 or more switches are installed at one 

location. Concealed boxes shall be pressed steel, galvanized, 4" square by 1-1/2" deep 

minimum. Exposed boxes shall be galvanized cast steel, prime painted cast aluminum or copper 

free cast aluminum. 

E. Conductor Fill in Raceway: Conductor fill in raceways shall conform to NEC Chapter 9, Table 

3A (based on Type RHW wires) unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 

F. Wire Pulling: Mechanical means for pulling shall be torque-limiting type and not used for #2 

AWG and smaller wires. Pulling tension shall not exceed wire manufacturer's 

recommendations. Where necessary, powdered soapstone used as lubricant for drawing wires 

through conduit. Other means of lubricating allowed with written approval of the Architect. 

G. Wire Splicing: 

1. Form wires neatly in enclosures and boxes. 



ELECTRICAL WORK

2. Splice in accordance with NEC Article 110. Twist conductors #10 and smaller and dip 

solder with "Western Union" joint or crimp connect. Splice conductors #8 through #4/0 

with high pressure compression (indent) copper sleeve connectors. Do not use bolt-on 

connectors. Reinsulate splices and waterproof splices. Reinsulate splices according to wire 

manufacturer's instructions. Splice insulation shall be 200% in thickness of original wire 

insulation and of same electrical and mechanical characteristics. Tape shall be vinyl 

plastic. 

H. Installation of Lighting Fixtures: Support fixtures securely and safely by means of fixture studs 

in the outlet boxes or other approved means. Ceiling fixtures arranged to hang vertically unless 

otherwise directed by Architect. Provide accessories, such as straps, mounting plates, nipples or 

brackets for proper installation. Provide additional suspension wires and channels for mounting 

on suspended ceilings as recommended by fixture manufacturer. 

I. Grounding: 

1. Service entrance, motors, metallic enclosures, raceways and electrical equipment grounded 

according to requirements of National Electrical Code, Article 250. At service entrance, 

install 5/8" x 8'-0" copper clad steel ground rods (number as required to obtain desired 

ground), with top 12" below finished grade to obtain ground to 25 ohms or less as 

measured by three-point potential method with electrical ground megger. Connect service 

entrance ground to building service entrances equipment via ground wire (size per NEC 

Article 250-94) and nearest cold water pipe with No. 1/0 bare copper. Ground connection 

to equipment, raceways, motors, grounding type receptacles and other metallic parts 

directly exposed to ungrounded electric conductors by continuous metal raceways, or No. 

14 AWG minimum, AWG copper, NEC type TW, green insulated. At water meter and 

"Di-electric" union joints, install pipe clamps, Thomas & Betts Co. No. 3900 series, on 

both sides of meter on metallic pipes and connect together with No. 1/0 bare copper. 

Connection shall not interfere with installation or removal of water meter. 

2. All grounding wire runs within buildings shall be in rigid steel conduits. Where 

practicable, all ground wires shall be run together with circuit conductors. 

3. A No. 6 bare copper wire shall be used to connect ground to telephone cabinet. A four-foot 

slack of grounding wire shall be left in cabinet. 

4. Install ground wire in all non-metallic conduits, size per NEC. 

J. Equipment Connections: Connect all equipment and appliances. Make power connections to 

motor on equipment with short section of flexible conduit. 

K. Finishing: 

1. Patch, repair and restore all structural and architectural elements cut or drilled for 

installation of electrical system. Drilling, cutting, patching, repairing and restoring shall be 

subject to approval of the Architect. 

2. Attach electrical equipment to wood by wood screws, and attach to concrete by embedded 

or expansion inserts and bolts. Use powder driven charge with approval only. Close 

unused knock-outs on boxes or enclosures with metal cap. Powder actuated fasteners shall 

not be used on precast concrete. Do not use powder activated fasteners to attach enclosures 

and boxes to the building. 

3. Wipe clean all exposed raceways and enclosures with rag and solvent. Prime painting and 

finishing of unfinished raceways and enclosures shall conform to DIVISION 9 - 



ELECTRICAL WORK

FINISHES. Factory finished enclosures shall not be painted. Panelboards identified by 

stenciling with paint on backs of doors the voltage and designation. Voltage ratings 

stenciled on front of disconnect switches and junction boxes where wires are terminated for 

connection to equipment that are not part of contract. 

4. Connect circuits to circuit assignments shown on drawings. Provide neatly typewritten 

circuit directory for all panelboards. 

3.2 PAINTING 

A. Wipe all exposed raceways clean of dirt, oil, grease, etc., with rag and solvent, primed and 

finished to match surrounding finish under DIVISION 9 - FINISHES. Factory-finished 

enclosures not to be painted, except apartment living unit load center shall be painted to match 

wall finish. 

3.3 TESTING 

A. All wiring shall be tested to insure proper operation according to functions specified. 

B. Measure insulation resistance of all feeder wires. All feeder cables, #4 or larger shall have 

insulation resistance of 1.5 megohms or higher. Insulation resistance shall be measured by 500 

volts megger. Resistances of feeder cables shall be recorded and turned over in four (4) copies 

to Architect during final inspection. Proper operation of all electrical devices shall be 

demonstrated at request of Architect during final inspection. 

C. Balance loading on each feeder. 

D. Measure ground resistance at service equipment in the presence of the Architect. Submit four 

(4) copies of test results to Architect. 

3.4 GUARANTEE 

A. Installation shall be complete in every detail and ready for use. Any item supplied by Contractor 

developing defects within one (1) year of final acceptance by Architect, except lamps which 

shall be guaranteed for 50% of rated life as published by manufacturer, shall be replaced by such 

materials, apparatus or parts including installation labor to make such defective portion of 

complete system conform to true intent and meaning of drawings and specifications, at no 

additional charge to the Hospital. 




ELECTRICAL WORK

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL 


1.1 DESCRIPTION 

A. This section includes the following for termite control: 

1. Chemical Soil treatment. 


A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency. 

B. PCO: Pest control operator. 

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS 

A. Chemical Soil Treatment: System consists of application of termiticide chemicals to exposed 

soil and to voids in construction where insects may gain entry to the building. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 

B. Product Data: 

1. Treatments. 

2. Application instructions. 

3. Copies of the EPA-registered labels for all chemicals. 

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that 

treatments furnished comply with requirements. 




specified. 

E. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report 

for the Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 

1. Date and time of application. 

2. Moisture content of soil before application. 

3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 

4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 

5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 



TERMITE CONTROL

6. Areas of application. 

7. Water source for application. 

F. Warranties: Copies of special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed by the Hawaii State Pest Control Board in 

Branch #3 and certified as a commercial applicator under the Hawaii Pesticide Law by the 

Hawaii State Department of Agriculture in category 7b and who is: 

1. Chemical Soil Treatment: An experienced installer who has completed termite control 

treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of 

successful in-service performance. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal 

registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated. Do 

not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label 

requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Coordinate termite control treatment application or installation with excavating, filling, and 

grading and concreting operations. 

1. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive The Owner of 

other rights The Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall 

be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite 

control work, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity 

or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage 

caused by termite infestation. 

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. The Surety shall not 

be held liable beyond 2 years from the project acceptance date. 

2. All necessary repairs of damages resulting from subterranean termite infestation within a 

period of one (1) year from the date of project acceptance will be made at the Contractor's 

own expense up to a total cost of $5,000.00; and 

3. If subterranean termite infestation should occur through the treated area within the three 

(3) year guarantee period, the soil shall be re-treated as described in paragraph 1.8 B.4. 

below, or, other methods, including but not limited to, installation of a monitored bait 

station system to reduce infestation shall be installed without cost to the Owner. 



TERMITE CONTROL

4. Minimum retreatment under special warranty. 

a. All corrective treatments shall be performed to at least 10 feet around each visible 

subterranean termite activity. 

b. Drill one hole per block along one course above adjacent grade of hollow tile walls 

which extend below grade, and treat at a rate consistent with the pesticide label. 

c. Remove carpets from areas being treated. 

d. Drill and treat through all interior concrete floors, along both sides of all partitions 

and walls, and all cracks and expansion joints according to label directions. Drill 

holes through concrete slab shall be 1/2 inch or 9/16 inch diameter and spaced not 

more than 18 inches apart. 

e. Drill one hole at each plumbing or utility penetration through ground floor slab and 

treat according to label instructions. 

f. Patch drill holes with cement/concrete to full depth of slab thickness and refinish 

walls/floors as necessary to prevent any backflow and to restore original 

appearance. 

g. Re-install carpets as applicable / necessary. Installation shall be done by a 

competent commercial carpet installer. 

h. Replace any finish/finish materials which are contaminated by spilled chemicals. 

5. The above-ground areas infested with subterranean termites shall be treated as 

appropriate with a proven, effective insecticide to eliminate those termites. 

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, 

inspection, and retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to The Owner, 

in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) continuing service agreement, starting on the 

date of Substantial Completion. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for 

agreement period and for future renewal options. 


2.1 CHEMICAL SOIL TREATMENT 

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities 

having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water 

or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment 

solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label 

volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, 

according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. 

B. Chemicals shall be aqueous solutions of Type I repellent termiticides such as Prelude, Dragnet 

SFR, Demon TC, or Prevail FT or the Type II non-repellent termiticide Premise 75. The 

chemicals shall be used in accordance with the labels and provisions related to the use of those 

pesticides as adopted by the Hawaii Pesticide Law, Chapter 149A, HRS, and the Federal 

Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 



TERMITE CONTROL

1. Type II non-repellent termiticides such as Dursban TC shall not be used. 

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. 

2. American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department. 

3. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. 

4. DowElanco. 

5. FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties. 

6. Zeneca Professional Products. 

7. Other approved manufacturers. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with 

requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation 

work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with 

application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and 

with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources 

of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, 

formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. 

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could 

decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be 

treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be 

applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. 

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, 

complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and 

with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 

B. Notify Architect at least one day before application of chemicals. 

3.4 APPLYING CHEMICAL SOIL TREATMENT 

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity 

required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration 



TERMITE CONTROL

of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a 

continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and 

under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 

1. A totalizing meter shall be provided to determine application rates and to indicate the 

total volume of pesticide applied in U.S. gallons. the meter shall be no more than five feet 

from the applicator at all times. 

2. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, 

including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil 

materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 

a. Whenever possible, the solution shall be applied not more than 24 hours before the 

pouring of concrete over the affected area. 

b. Where a treated area that is not scheduled to be covered with a vapor retarder 

moisture barrier in the finished construction (e.g. lanai area) cannot be covered 

with a poured concrete slab the same day, the area shall be protected with a 

waterproofing covering such as polyethelene sheeting. 

3. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation 

walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric 

conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; 

and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout 

around footings. 

a. Treatment shall include the provision of vertical barriers as stated on the product 

label. 

4. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat 

adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply 

overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or 

ground. 

5. Masonry: Treat voids. 

6. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be 

penetrated. 

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. 

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until 

ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered 

Label instructions. 

D. Post warning signs in areas of application. 

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, 

landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 




TERMITE CONTROL

Specs - HHSC - Hawaii Health Systems Corporation

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?